Skip to main content

Full text of "Worlds of IF (January 1960)"

See other formats


w (y  \j 

Oi), 

<J  o 

C>  CJ  O o O 

o o Odoo 

•ionooo  ooool 


s in  your  neighborhood 

won't  run  off  with  your  books 
if  you  put  inside  the  front  cover 
of  each  book... a gummed  bookplate 
with  your  name  printed  on  it! 


YOUR  NAME  HERE 


YOUR  NAME  HERE 


FINAGLE  SAYS  — 

The  umpteenth  corollary 
of  Finagle's  General  Law  of 
Dynamic  Negatives  says: 
"No  books  are  ever  lost 
by  loaning  except  ones  you 
particularly  want  to  keep." 


100  for  $4;  200,  $6;  300,  $8 
with  owner's  name  imprinted 

All  Postpaid.  Add  state  sales  lax,  if  any. 


^'amr 


ACTUAL  SIZE,  all  d. 


No.  CM-12  by  Cullen  Rapp  No.  GX-57  by  Lynd  Ward 


The  desiji^ns  shown  above  are  the  only  ones  we 


Order  from 


MAGAZINE  421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y. 


THERE  are  some  things  that  cannot 
be  generally  told  — things  you  ought  to 
know.  Great  truths  are  dangerous  to 
some — but  factors  for  personal  power 
and  accomplishment  in  the  hands  of 
those  who  understand  them.  Behind 
the  tales  of  the  miracles  and  mysteries 
of  the  ancients,  lie  centuries  of  their 
secret  probing  into  nature’s  laws  — 
their  amazing  discoveries  of  the  hid- 
den processes  of  man*s  mind,  and  the 
mastery  of  life’s  problems.  Once  shroud- 
ed in  mystery  to  avoid  their  destruc- 
tion by  mass  fear  and  ignorance,  these 
facts  remain  a useful  heritage  for  the 
thousands  of  men  and  women  who  pri- 
vately use  them  in  their  homes  today. 

THIS  FREE  BOOK 

The  Rosicrucians  (not  a religious 

SBe  Rosicrucians  < 


organization)  an  age-old  brotherhood 
of  learning,  have  preserved  this  secret 
wisdom  in  their  archives  for  centu- 
ries. They  now  invite  you  to  share  the 
practical  helpfulness  of  their  teachings. 
Write  today  for  a free  copy  of  the 
book,  ’’The  Mastery  of  Life.”  Within 
its  pages  may  lie  a new  life  of  oppor- 
tunity for  you.  Address:  Scribe  M.J.B. 

j- SEND  THIS  COUPON 

! Scribe  M.J.B.  I 

1 The  ROSICRUCIANS  (AMORC)  } 

I San  Jose,  California  i 

} Please  send  me  the  free  book,The  Mastery  • 

I of  Life,  which  explains  how  I may  learn  to  | 
t use  my  faculties  and  powers  of  mind.  i 
' I 

! Name  I 

' I 

J Address J 

!_  Cipjr j 


SAN  JOSE,  CALIFORNIA.  U.S.A. 


WORLDS  OF 


SCIENCE  FICTION 

JANUARY  1960 

All  Stories  New  and  Complete 

Editor:  H.  L.  GOLD 

Feature  Editor:  EREDERIK  POHL 


1 

NOVELETTES 

1 

M 

THE  DIVERS  by  Jomes  Stamers 

18' 

= 

= 

THE  LAST  LEAP  by  Daniel  F.  Golouye 

64 

1 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE  by  J.  F.  Bone 

110 

1 

1 

SHORT  STORIES 

1 

1 

THE  GOOD  SEED  by  Mark  Mallory 

5 

1 

DISSOLUTE  DIPLOMAT  by  Bob  Show  and  Walt  Willis 

45 

1 

M 

THE  LITTLE  RED  BAG  by  Jerry  Sohl 

51 

TO  EACH  HIS  OWN  by  Jack  Sharkey 

89 

1 

1 

THE  AUTUMN  AFTER  NEXT  by  Margaret  St.  Cloir 

101 

FEATURE 

B 

WORLDS  OF  IF  by  Frederik  Pohl 

82 

COVER  by  Emsh;  “Take  Them  to  Oor  leadersi" 

B 

1 

Illustrations  by  Wood,  AAorrow  and  Froncis 

M 

1 

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIflIllllllllllllllllllillllllllllllllllllllllilllilllllllllllllllllllilllllll'IIIIIIIIIIH 

IF  is  published  bi-monthly  by  Digest  Productions  Corporation,  Vol.  9,  No.  6.  Main  offices: 
421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  New  York.  85^  per  copy.  Subscriptions  12  issues  $3.00 
in  the  United  States,  Canada,  Mexico,  South  and  Central  America  and  U.  S.  possessions, 
elsewhere  $4.00.  Entered  as  second-class  matter  at  the  Post  Office,  New  York,  New  York. 
Copyright  New  York  1959  by  Digest  Productions  Corporation.  All  rights  including  trans- 
lations reserved.  All  material  submitted  must  be  accompanied  by  self-addressed,  stamped 
envelopes.  The  publisher  assumes  no  responsibility  for  unsolicited  material.  All  stories 
printed  in  this  magazine  are  fiction,  and  any  amilarity  between  characters  and  actual 
persons  is  coincidental.  Pidnted  in  the  U.  S.  A.  by  the  Guinn  Company,  Inc.,  New  York. 

Title  registered  in  the  United  States  Patent  Office. 

Next  Issue  (Marehl  on  Sale  January  Sth. 


By  MARK  MALLORY 


The  island  was  drowning 


— if  they  failed  to  find 
some  common  ground,  both 
of  them  were  doomed. 


They  said — as  they  have 
said  of  so  many  frontiers- 
men just  like  him — that  there 
must  have  been  a woman  in 
his  past,  to  make  him  what  he 
was.  And  indeed  there  had, 
but  she  was  no  flesh-and-blood 
female.  The  name  of  his  lady 
was  Victoria,  whom  the 
Greeks  called  Nike  and  early 
confounded  with  the  Pallas 
Athena,  that  sterile  maiden. 
And  at  the  age  of  thirty-four 
she  had  Calvin  Mulloy  most 
firmly  in  her  grasp,  for  he 


had  neither  wife  nor  child, 
nor  any  close  friend  worth 
mentioning — only  his  hungry 
dream  for  some  great  accom- 
plishment. 

It  had  harried  him  to  the 
stars,  that  dream  of  his.  It  had 
driven  him  to  the  position  of 
top  survey  engineer  on  the 
new,  raw  planet  of  Mersey, 
still  largely  unexplored  and 
unmapp^.  And  it  had  pushed 
him,  too,  into  foolishnesses 
like  this  latest  one,  building  a 
sailplane  out  of  scrap  odds  and 
ends  around  the  Mersey  Ad- 
vance Base — a sailplane  which 
had  just  this  moment  been 
caught  in  a storm  and  cracked 
up  on  an  island  the  size  of  a 
city  backyard,  between  the 
banks  of  one  of  the  mouths  of 
the  Adze  River. 

The  sailplane  was  gone  the 
moment  it  hit.  Actually  it  had 
come  down  just  short  of  the 
island  and  floated  quickly  off, 
what  was  left  of  it,  while  Cal- 
vin was  thrashing  for  the  is- 
land with  that  inept  stroke  of 
his.  He  pulled  himself  up, 
gaping,  onto  the  rocks,  and, 
with  the  coolness  of  a logical 
man  who  has  faced  crises  be- 
fore, set  himself  immediately 
to  taking  stock  of  his  situa- 
tion. 

He  was  wet  and  winded,  but 
since  he  was  undrowned  and 
on  solid  land  in  the  semi- 
tropics, he  dismissed  that  part 
of  it  from  his  mind.  It  had 
been  full  noon  when  he  had 
been  caught  in  the  storm,  and 
it  could  not  be  much  more  than 


minutes  past  that  now,  so 
swiftly  had  everything  hap- 
pened ; but  the  black,  low 
clouds,  racing  across  the  sky, 
and  the  gusts  of  intermittent 
rain,  cut  visibility  down 
around  him. 

He  stood  up  on  his  small 
island  and  leaned  against  the 
wind  that  blew  in  and  up  the 
river  from  the  open  gulf.  On 
three  sides  he  saw  nothing  but 
the  fast-riding  waves.  On  the 
fourth,  though,  shading  his 
eyes  against  the  occasional 
bursts  of  rain,  he  discerned  a 
long,  low,  curving  blackness 
that  would  be  one  of  the  river 
shores. 

There  lay  safety.  He  esti- 
mated its  distance  from  him 
at  less  than  a hundred  and 
fifty  yards.  It  was  merely,  he 
told  himself,  a matter  of 
reaching  it. 

UNDER  ordinary  condi- 
tions, he  would  have  set- 
tled down  where  he  was  and 
waited  for  rescue.  He  was  not 
more  than  fifteen  or  twenty 
miles  from  the  Advance  Base, 
and  in  this  storm  they  would 
waste  no  time  waiting  for  him 
to  come  in,  before  starting  out 
to  search  for  him.  No  sail- 
plane could  survive  in  such  a 
blow.  Standing  now,  with  the 
wind  pushing  at  him  and  the 
rain  stinging  against  his  face 
and  hands,  he  found  time  for 
a moment’s  wry  humor  at  his 
own  bad  luck.  On  any  civilized 
world,  such  a storm  would 
have  been  charted  and  pre- 

7 


THE  GOOD  SEED 


dieted,  if  not  controlled  entire- 
ly. Well,  the  more  fool  he,  for 
venturing  this  far  from  Base. 

It  was  in  his  favor  that  this 
world  of  Mersey  happened  to 
be  so  Earthlike  that  the  dif- 
ferences between  the  two  plan- 
ets were  mostly  unimportant. 
Unfortunately,  it  was  the  one 
unimportant  difference  that 
made  his  present  position  on 
the  island  a death  trap.  The 
gulf  into  which  his  river  emp- 
tied was  merely  a twentieth 
the  area  of  the  Gulf  of  Mexico 
— but  in  this  section  it  was 
extremely  shallow,  having  an 
overall  average  depth  of 
around  seventy-five  feet. 
When  one  of  these  fiash 
storms  formed  suddenly  out 
over  its  waters,  the  wind 
could  either  drain  huge  tidal 
areas  around  the  mouths  of 
the  Adze,  or  else  raise  the 
river  level  within  hours  a 
matter  of  thirty  feet. 

With  the  onshore  wind 
whistling  about  his  ears  right 
now,  it  was  only  too  obvious 
to  Calvin  that  the  river  was 
rising.  This  rocky  little  bit 
sticking  some  twelve  or  fifteen 
feet  above  the  waves  could 
expect  to  be  overwhelmed  in 
the  next  few  hours. 

He  looked  about  him.  The 
island  was  bare  except  for  a 
few  straggly  bushes.  He 
reached  out  for  a shoot  from 
a bush  beside  him.  It  came  up 
easily  from  the  thin  layer  of 
soil  that  overlaid  the  rocks, 
and  the  wind  snatched  it  out 
of  his  hand.  He  saw  it  go  skip- 

8 


ping  over  the  tops  of  the 
waves  in  the  direction  of  the 
shore,  until  a wave-slope 
caught  it  and  carried  it  into 
the  next  trough  and  out  of 
sight.  It  at  least,  he  thought, 
would  reach  the  safety  of  the 
river  bank.  But  it  would  take 
a thousand  such  slender 
stems,  plaited  into  a raft,  to 
do  him  any  good;  and  there 
were  not  that  many  stems,  and 
not  that  much  time. 

Calvin  turned  and  climbed 
in  toward  the  center  high 
point  of  the  island.  It  was  only 
a few  steps  over  the  damp 
soil  and  rocks,  but  when  he 
stood  upright  on  a little  crown 
of  rock  and  looked  about  him, 
it  seemed  that  the  island  was 
smaller  than  ever,  and  might 
be  drowned  at  any  second  by 
the  wind-lashed  waves.  More- 
over, there  was  nothing  to  be 
seen  which  offered  him  any 
more  help  or  hope  of  escape. 

Even  then,  he  was  not 
moved  to  despair.  He  saw  no 
way  out,  but  this  simply  rein- 
forced his  conviction  that  the 
way  out  was  hiding  about  him 
somewhere,  and  he  must  look 
that  much  harder  for  it. 

He  was  going  to  step  down 
out  of  the  full  force  of  the 
wind,  when  he  happened  to 
notice  a rounded  object  nest- 
ling in  a little  hollow  of  the 
rock  below  him,  about  a dozen 
or  so  feet  away. 

He  went  and  stood  over 
it,  seeing  that  his  first 
guess  as  to  its  nature  had 

MARK  MALLORY 


been  correct.  It  was  one  of  the 
intelligent  traveling  plants 
that  wandered  around  the 
oceans  of  this  world.  It  should 
have  been  at  home  in  this  situ- 
ation. Evidently,  however,  it 
had  made  the  mistake  of  com- 
ing ashore  here  to  seed.  It  was 
now  rooted  in  the  soil  of  the 
island,  facing  death  as  surely 
as  he^  if  the  wind  or  the  weaves 
tore  it  from  its  own  helplessly 
anchored  roots. 

“Can  you  understand  me?” 
he  asked  it. 

There  was  an  odd  sort  of 
croaking  from  it,  which  seem- 
ed to  shape  itself  into  words, 
though  the  how  of  it  remained 
baffling  to  the  ear.  It  was  a 
sort  of  supplemental  telepathy 
at  work,  over  and  above  the 
rough  attempts  to  imitate  hu- 
man speech.  Some  of  these  in- 
telligent plants  they  had  got  to 
know  in  this  area  could  com- 
municate with  them  in  this 
fashion,  though  most  could 
not. 

“I  know  you,  man,”  said  the 
plant.  “I  have  seen  your  gath- 
ering.” It  was  referring  to  the 
Advance  Base,  which  had  at- 
tracted a steady  stream  of  the 
plant  visitors  at  first. 

“Know  any  way  to  get 
ashore?”  Calvin  asked. 

“There  is  none,”  said  the 
plant. 

“I  can’t  see  any,  either.” 

“There  is  none,”  repeated 
the  plant. 

“Eveiyone  to  his  own  opin- 
ion,” said  Calvin.  Almost  he 
sneered  a little.  He  turned  his 


gaze  once  more  about  the  is- 
land. “In  my  book,  them  that 
won’t  be  beat  can’t  be  beat. 
That’s  maybe  where  we’re  dif- 
ferent, plant.” 

He  left  the  plant  and  went 
for  a walk  about  the  island.  It 
had  been  in  his  mind  that  pos- 
sibly a drifting  log  or  some 
such  could  have  been  caught 
by  the  island  and  he  could  use 
this  to  get  ashore.  He  found 
nothing.  For  a few'  minutes, 
at  one  end  of  the  island,  he 
stood  fascinated,  watching  a 
long  sloping  black  rock  with  a 
crack  in  it,  reaching  down  in- 
to the  water.  There  was  a 
small  tuft  of  moss  growing  in 
the  crack  about  five  inches 
above  where  the  waves  were 
slapping.  As  he  watched,  the 
waves  slapped  higher  and 
higher,  until  he  turned  away 
abruptly,  shivering,  before  he 
could  see  the  water  actually 
reach  and  cover  the  little 
clump  of  green. 

For  the  first  time  a realiza- 
tion that  he  might  not  get  off 
the  island  touched  him.  It  was 
not  yet  fear,  this  realization, 
but  it  reached  deep  into  him 
and  he  felt  it,  suddenly,  like  a 
pressure  against  his  heart.  As 
the  moss  was  being  covered, 
so  could  he  be  covered,  by  the 
far-reaching  inexorable  ad- 
vance of  the  water. 

And  then  this  was  wiped 
away  by  an  abrupt  outburst 
of  anger  and  self-ridicule  that 
he — who  had  been  through  so 
many  dangers — should  find 
himself  pinned  by  so  common- 


THE  GOOD  SEED 


9 


place  a threat.  A man,  he  told 
himself,  could  die  of  drown- 
ing anywhere.  There  was  no 
need  to  go  light-years  from 
his  place  of  birth  to  find  such 
a death.  It  made  all  dying — 
and  all  living — seem  small  and 
futile  and  insignificant,  and 
he  did  not  like  that  feeling. 

CALVIN  went  back  to  the 
plant  in  its  little  hollow', 
tight-hugging  to  the  ground 
and  half-sheltered  from  the 
wind,  and  looked  down  on  its 
dusky  basketball-sized  shape, 
the  tough  hide  swollen  and 
ready  to  burst  with  seeds. 

“So  you  think  there’s  no 
way  out,”  he  said  roughly. 

“There  is  none,”  said  the 
plant. 

“Why  don’t  you  just  let 
yourself  go,  if  you  think  like 
that?”  Calvin  said.  “Why  try 
to  keep  down  out  of  the  wind, 
if  the  waves’ll  get  you  any- 
w'ay,  later?” 

The  plant  did  not  answer 
for  a while. 

“I  do  not  want  to  die,”  it 
said  then.  “As  long  as  I am 
alive,  there  is  the  possibility 
of  some  great  improbable 
chance  saving  me.” 

“Oh,”  said  Calvin,  and  he 
himself  was  silent  in  turn.  “I 
thought  you’d  given  up.” 

“I  cannot  give  up,”  said  the 
plant.  “I  am  still  alive.  But  I 
know  /there  is  no  way  to 
safety.” 

“You  make  a lot  of  sense.” 
Calvin  straightened  up  to 
squint  through  the  rain  at  the 


dai'k  and  distant  line  of  the 
shore.  “How  much  more  time 
would  you  say  we  had  before 
the  water  covers  this  rock?” 
“The  eighth  part  of  a day- 
light period,  perhaps  more, 
perhaps  less.  The  water  can 
rise  either  faster  or  more 
slowly.” 

“Any  chance  of  it  cresting 
and  going  down?” 

“That  would  be  a great  im- 
probable chance  such  as  that 
of  which  I spoke,”  said  the 
plant. 

Calvin  rotated  slowly,  sur- 
veying the  water  around 
them.  Bits  and  pieces  of  flot- 
sam were  streaming  by  them 
on  their  way  before  the  wind, 
now  angling  toward  the  near 
bank.  But  none  were  close 
enough  or  large  enough  to  do 
Calvin  any  good. 

“Look,”  said  Calvin  abrupt- 
ly, “there’s  a fisheries  survey 
station  upriver  here,  not  too 
far.  Now,  I could  dig  up  the 
soil  holding  your  roots.  If  I 
did  that,  would  you  get  to  the 
survey  station  as  fast  as  you 
could  and  tell  them  I’m 
stranded  here?” 

“I  would  be  glad  to,”  said 
the  plant.  “But  you  cannot  dig 
me  up.  My  roots  have  pene- 
trated into  the  roclc.  If  you 
tried  to  dig  me  up,  they  would 
break  off — and  I would  die 
that  much  sooner.” 

“You  would,  would  you?” 
grunted  Calvin.  But  the  ques- 
tion was  rhetorical.  Already 
his  mind  was  busy  searching 
for  some  other  way  out.  For 


10 


MARK  MALLORY 


the  first  time  in  his  life,  he  felt 
the  touch  of  cold  about  his 
heart.  Could  this  be  fear,  he 
wondered.  But  he  had  never 
been  afraid  of  death. 

Crouching  down  again  to  be 
out  of  the  wind  and  rain,  he 
told  himself  that  knowledge 
still  remained  a tool  he  could 
use.  The  plant  must  know 
something  that  was,  perhaps, 
useless  to  it,  but  that  could  be 
twisted  to  a human’s  advan- 
tage. 

“What  made  you  come  to  a 
place  like  this  to  seed?”  he 
asked. 

“Twenty  nights  and  days 
ago,  when  I first  took  root 
here,”  said  the  plant,  “this 
land  was  safe.  The  signs  were 
good  for  fair  weather.  And 
this  place  was  easy  of  access 
from  the  water.  I am  not  built 
to  travel  far  on  land.” 

“How  would  you  manage  in 
a storm  like  this,  if  you  were 
not  rooted  down?” 

“I  would  go  with  the  wind 
until  I found  shelter,”  said  the 
plant.  “The  wind  and  waves 
would  not  harm  me  then.  They 
hurt  only  whatever  stands 
firm  and  opposes  them.” 

“You  can’t  communicate 
with  others  of  your  people 
from  here,  can  you?”  asked 
Calvin. 

“There  are  none  close,”  said 
the  plant.  “Anyway,  what 
could  they  do?” 

‘“They  could  get  a message 
to  the  fisheries  station,  to  get 
help  out  here  for  us.” 

“What  help  could  help  me?” 


said  the  plant.  “And  in  any 
case  they  could  not  go  against 
the  wind.  They  would  have  to 
be  upwind  of  the  station,  even 
to  help  you.” 

“We  could  tiy  it.” 

“We  could  try  it,”  agreed 
the  plant.  “But  first  one  of  my 
kind  must  come  into  speaking 
range.  We  still  hunt  our  great 
improbable  chance.” 

There  was  a moment’s  si- 
lence between  them  in  the 
wind  and  rain.  The  river  was 
noisy,  working  against  the 
rock  of  the  island. 

“There  must  be  something 
that  would  give  us  a better 
chance  than  just  sitting  here,” 
said  Calvin. 

The  plant  did  not  answer. 
“What  are  you  thinking 
about?”  demanded  Calvin. 

“I  am  thinking  of  the  irony 
of  our  situation,”  said  the 
plant.  “You  are  free  to  wan- 
der the  water,  but  cannot.  I 
can  wander  the  water,  but  I 
am  not  free  to  do  so.  This  is 
death,  and  it  is  a strange 
thing.” 

“I  don’t  get  you.” 

“I  only  mean  that  it  makes 
no  difference — that  I am  what 
I am,  or  that  you  are  what 
you  are.  We  could  be  any 
things  that  would  die  when 
the  waves  finally  cover  the  is- 
land.” 

“Right  enough,”  said  Calvin 
impatiently.  “What  about  it?” 
“Nothing  about  it,  man,” 
said  the  plant.  “I  was  only 
thinking.” 


THE  GOOD  SEED 


11 


“Don’t  waste  your  time  on 
philosophy,”  said  Calvin 
harshly.  “Use  some  of  that 
brain  power  on  a way  to  get 
loose  and  get  off.” 

“Perhaps  that  and  philoso- 
phy are  one  and  the  same.” 
“You’re  not  going  to  con- 
vince me  of  that,”  said  Calvin, 
getting  up.  “I’m  going  to  take 
another  look  around  the  is- 
land.” 

The  island,  as  he  walked 
around  its  short  margin, 
showed  itself  to  be  definitely 
smaller.  He  paused  again  by 
the  black  rock.  The  moss  was 
lost  now,  under  the  water, 
and  the  crack  was  all  but  un- 
der as  well.  He  stood  shielding 
his  eyes  against  the  wind- 
driven  rain,  peering  across  at 
the  still  visible  shore.  The 
waves,  he  noted,  were  not  ex- 
treme-some four  or  five  feet 
in  height — ^which  meant  that 
the  storm  pi'oper  was  proba- 
bly paralleling  the  land  some 
distance  out  in  the  gulf. 

He  clenched  his  fists  in  sud- 
den frustration.  If  only  he  had 
hung  on  to  the  sailplane — or 
any  decent-sized  chunk  of  it! 
At  least  going  into  the  water 
then  would  have  been  a gam- 
ble with  some  faint  chance  of 
success. 

He  had  nowhere  else  to  go, 
after  rounding  the  island.  He 
went  back  to  the  plant. 

“Man,”  said  the  plant,  “one 
of  my  people  has  been  blown 
to  shelter  a little  down- 
stream.” 


Calvin  straightened  up  ea- 
gerly, turning  to  stare  into  the 
wind. 

“You  cannot  see  him,”  said 
the  plant.  “He  is  caught  be- 
low the  river  bend  and  cannot 
break  loose  against  the  force 
of  the  wind.  But  he  is  close 
enough  to  talk.  And  he  sends 
you  good  news.” 

“Me?”  Calvin  hunkered 
down  beside  the  plant.  “Good 
news?” 

“There  is  a large  tree  torn 
loose  from  the  bank  and  float- 
ing this  way.  It  should  strike 
the  little  bit  of  land  where  we 
are  here.” 

“Strike  it?  Are  you  posi- 
tive ?” 

“There  are  the  wind  and  the 
water  and  the  tree.  They  can 
move  only  to  one  destination 
— this  island.  Go  quickly  to 
the  windward  point  of  the  is- 
land. The  tree  will  be  coming 
shortly.” 

Calvin  jerked  erect  and 
turned,  wild  triumph  bursting 
in  him. 

“Good-by,  man,”  said  the 
plant. 

But  he  was  already  plung- 
ing toward  the  downstream 
end  of  the  island.  He  reached 
it  and,  shielding  his  eyes  with 
a hand,  peer^  desperately 
out  over  the  water.  The  waves 
hammered  upon  his  boots  as 
he  stood  there,  and  then  he 
saw  it,  a mass  of  branches 
upon  which  the  wind  was 
blowing  as  on  a sail,  green 
against  black,  coming  toward 
him. 


12 


MARK  MALLORY 


He  crouched,  wrung 
with  impatience,  as  the 
tree  drifted  swiftly  through 
the  water  toward  him,  too 
ponderous  to  rise  and  fall 
more  than  a little  with  the 
waves  and  presenting  a gal- 
leonlike appearance  of  mass 
and  invincibility.  As  it  came 
closer,  a fear  that  it  would,  in 
spite  of  the  plant’s  assurances, 
miss  the  island,  crept  into  his 
heart  and  chilled  it. 

It  seemed  to  Calvin  that  it 
was  veering — that  it  would 
pass  to  windwaz’d  of  the  is- 
land, between  him  and  the 
dimly  seen  shore.  The  thought 
of  losing  it  was  more  than  he 
could  bear  to  consider;  and 
with  a sudden  burst  of  panic, 
he  threw  himself  into  the 
waves,  beating  clumsily  and 
frantically  for  it. 

The  river  took  him  into  its 
massive  fury.  He  had  forgot- 
ten the  strength  of  it.  His  first 
dive  took  him  under  an  incom- 
ing wave,  and  he  emerged, 
gasping,  into  the  trough  be- 
hind, with  water  exploding  in 
his  face.  He  kicked  and  threw 
his  arms  about,  but  the  slow 
and  futile-seeming  beatings 
of  his  limbs  appeared  helpless 
as  the  fluttering  of  a butterfly 
in  a collector’s  net.  He  choked 
for  air,  and,  rising  on  the 
crest  of  one  wave,  found  him- 
self turned  backward  to  face 
the  island,  and  being  swept 
past  it. 

Fear  came  home  to  him 
then.  He  lashed  out,  fighting 
only  for  the  solid  ground  of 


the  island  and  his  life.  His 
world  became  a place  of  foam 
and  fury.  He  strained  for  air. 
He  dug  for  the  island.  And 
then,  suddenly,  he  felt  him- 
self flung  upon  hard  rock  and 
gasping,  crawling,  he  emerged 
onto  safety. 

He  hung  there  on  hands  and 
knees,  battered  and  panting. 
Then  the  i*emembrance  of  the 
tree  cut  like  a knife  to  the 
core  of  his  fear-soaked  being. 
He  staggered  up,  and,  looking 
about,  saw  that  he  was  almost 
to  the  far  end  of  the  island. 
He  turned.  Above  him,  at  the 
windward  point,  the  tree  it- 
self was  just  now  grounding, 
branches  first,  and  swinging 
about  as  the  long  trunk, 
caught  by  the  waves,  pulled  it 
around  and  onward. 

With  an  inarticulate  cry,  he 
ran  toward  it.  But  the  mass  of 
water  against  the  heavy  tree 
trunk  was  already  pulling  the 
branches  from  their  tanglings 
with  the  rock.  It  floated  free. 
Taking  the  wind  once  more  in 
its  sail  of  leaves,  it  moved 
slowly — and  then  more  swiftly 
on  past  the  far  side  of  the 
island. 

He  sci'ambled  up  his  side  of 
the  island’s  crest.  But  when  he 
reached  its  top  and  could  see 
the  tree  again,  it  was  already 
moving  past  and  out  from  the 
island,  too  swiftly  for  him  to 
catch  it,  even  if  he  had  been 
the  swimmer  he  had  just 
proved  himself  not  to  be. 

He  dropped  on  his  knees, 
there  on  the  island’s  rocky 


THE  GOOD  SEED 


13 


spine,  and  watched  it  fade  in 
the  grayness  of  the  rain,  un- 
til the  green  of  its  branches 
was  lost  in  a grayish  blob,  and 
this  in  the  general  welter  of 
storm  and  waves.  And  sudden- 
ly a dark  horror  of  death 
closed  over  him,  blotting  out 
all  the  scene. 

A VOICE  roused  him.  “That 
is  too  bad,’'  said  the 
plant. 

He  turned  his  head  numbly. 
He  was  kneeling  less  than  half 
a dozen  feet  from  the  little 
hollow  where  the  plant  still 
sheltered.  He  looked  at  it  now, 
dazed,  as  if  he  could  not  re- 
member what  it  was,  nor  how 
it  came  to  talk  to  him.  Then 
his  eyes  cleared  a little  of  their 
shock  and  he  crept  over  to  it 
on  hands  and  knees  and 
crouched  in  the  shelter  of  the 
hollow. 

“The  water  is  rising  more 
swiftly,”  said  the  plant.  “It 
will  be  not  long  now.” 

“No!”  said  Calvin.  The 
word  was  lost  in  the  sound  of 
the  waves  and  wind,  as  though 
it  had  never  been.  Nor,  the 
minute  it  was  spoken,  could  he 
remember  what  he  had  meant 
to  deny  by  it.  It  had  been  only 
a response  without  thought, 
an  instinctive  negation. 

“You  make  me  wonder,” 
said  the  plant,  after  a little, 
“why  it  hurts  you  so — this 
thought  of  dying.  Since  you 
first  became  alive,  you  have 
faced  ultimate  death.  And  you 
have  not  faced  it  alone.  All 


things  die.  This  storm  must 
die.  This  rock  on  which  we  lie 
will  not  exist  forever.  Even 
worlds  and  suns  come  at  last 
to  their  ends,  and  galaxies, 
perhaps  even  the  Universe.” 
Calvin  shook  his  head.  He 
did  not  answer. 

“You  are  a fighting  people,” 
said  the  plant,  almost  as  if  to 
itself.  “Well  and  good.  Per- 
haps a life  like  mine,  yielding, 
giving  to  the  forces  of  nature, 
traveling  before  the  wind, 
sees  less  than  you  see,  of  a 
reason  for  clawing  hold  on 
existence.  But  still  it  seems 
to  me  that  even  a fighter 
would  be  glad  at  last  to  quit 
the  struggle,  when  there  is  no 
other  choice.” 

“Not  here,”  said  Calvin 
thickly.  “Not  now.” 

“Why  not  here,  why  not 
now,”  said  the  plant,  “when 
it  has  to  be  somewhere  and 
sometime?” 

Calvin  did  not  answer. 

“I  feel  sorry  for  you,”  said 
the  plant.  “I  do  not  like  to  see 
things  suffer.” 

Raising  his  head  a little  and 
looking  around  him,  Calvin 
could  see  the  water,  risen  high 
around  them,  so  that  waves 
were  splashing  on  all  sides, 
less  than  the  length  of  his  own 
body  away. 

“It  wouldn’t  make  sense  to 
you,”  said  Calvin  then,  rais- 
ing his  rain^wet  face  toward 
the  plant.  “You’re  old  by  your 
standards.  I’m  young.  I’ve  got 
things  to  do.  You  don’t  under- 
stand.” 


14 


MARK  MALLORY 


“No,”  the  plant  agreed.  “I 
do  not  understand.” 

CALVIN  crawled  a little 
closer  to  the  plant,  into 
the  hollow,  until  he  could  see 
the  vibrating  air-sac  that  pro- 
duced the  voice  of  the  plant. 
“Don’t  you  see?  I’ve  got  to  do 
something — I’ve  got  to  feel 
I’ve  accomplished  something 
— before  I quit.” 

“What  something?”  asked 
the  plant. 

“I  don’t  know]”  cried  Cal- 
vin. “I  just  know  I haven’t  I 
I feel  thrown  away!” 

“What  is  living?  It  is  feel- 
ing and  thinking.  It  is  seeding 
and  ti'ying  to  understand.  It  is 
companionship  of  your  own 
people.  What  more  is  there?” 
“You  have  to  do  some- 
thing.” . 

“Do  what?” 

“Something  important. 
Something  to  feel  satisfied 
about.”  A wave,  higher  than 
the  rest,  slapped  the  rock  a 
bare  couple  of  feet  below  them 
and  sent  spray  stinging  in 
against  them.  “You  have  to 
say,  ‘Look,  maybe  it  wasn’t 
much,  but  I did  this.’  ” 

“What  kind  of  this?” 

“How  do  I know?”  shouted 
Calvin.  “Something  — maybe 
something  nobody  else  did — 
maybe  something  that  hasn’t 
been  done  before!” 

“For  yourself?”  said  the 
plant.  A higher  wave  slapped 
at  the  veiy  rim  of  their  hol- 
low, and  a little  water  ran 
over  and  down  to  pool  around 


them.  Calvin  felt  it  cold 
around  his  knees  and  wrists. 
“Or  for  the  doing?” 

“For  the  doing!  For  the 
doing!” 

“If  it  is  for  the  doing,  can 
you  take  no  comfort  from  the 
fact  there  are  others  of  your 
own  kind  to  do  it?” 

Another  wave  came  in  on 
them.  Calvin  moved  spasmodi- 
cally right  up  against  the 
plant  and  put  his  arms  around 
it,  holding  on. 

“I  have  seeded  ten  times 
and  done  much  thinking,”  said 
the  plant — rather  muffledly, 
for  Calvin’s  body  was  pressing 
against  its  air-sac.  “I  have  not 
thought  of  anything  really 
new,  or  startling,  or  great,  but 
1 am  satisfied.”  It  paused  a 
moment  as  a new  wave 
drenched  them  and  receded. 
They  were  half  awash  in  the 
hollow  now,  and  the  waves 
came  regularly.  “I  do  not  see 
how  this  is  so  different  from 
what  you  have  done.  But  I am 
content.”  Another  and  strong- 
er wave  rocked  them.  The 
plant  made  a sound  that  might 
have  been  of  pain  at  its  roots 
tearing.  “Have  you  seeded?” 

“No,”  said  Calvin,  and  all 
at  once,  like  light  breaking  at 
last  into  the  dark  cave  of  his 
being,  in  this  twelfth  hour,  it 
came  to  him — all  of  what  he 
had  robbed  himself  in  his 
search  for  a victory.  Choking 
on  a wave,  he  clung  to  the 
plant  with  frenzied  strength. 
“Nothing!”  The  word  came 
tom  from  him  as  if  by  some 


THE  GOOD  SEED 


15 


ruthless  hand.  "‘Fve  got  noth- 
ing!” 

'Then  I understand  at  last,” 
said  the  plant.  “For  of  all 
things,  the  most  terrible  is  to 
die  unfruitful.  It  is  no  good  to 
say  we  will  not  be  beaten,  be- 
cause there  is  always  waiting, 
somewhere,  that  which  can 
t)eat  us.  And  then  a life  that 
is  seedless  goes  down  to  de- 
feat finally  and  forever.  But 
when  one  has  seeded,  there  is 
no  ending  of  the  battle^  and 
life  mounts  on  life  until  the 
light  is  reached  by  those  far 
generations  in  which  we  have 
had  our  own  small  but  neces- 
sary part.  Then  our  personal 
defeat  has  been  nothing,  for 
though  we  died,  we  are  still 
living,  and  though  we  fell,  we 
conquered.” 

But  Calvin,  clinging  to  the 
plant  with  both  arms,  saw  on- 
ly the  water  closing  over  him. 

“Too  late — ” he  choked. 
“Too  late— too  late—” 

“No,”  bubbled  the  plant. 
“Not  too  late  yet.  This 
changes  things.  For  I have 
seeded  ten  times  and  passed 
on  my  life.  But  you — I did  not 
understand.  I did  not  realize 
your  need.” 

The  flood,  cresting,  ran 
clear  and  strong,  the 
waves  breaking  heavily  on  the 
drowned  shore  by  the  river 
mouth.  The  rescue  spinner, 
two  hours  out  of  Base  and  de- 
scending once  again  through 
the  fleeting  murk,  checked  at 
the  sight  of  a begrimed  human 

16 


figure,  staggering  along  the 
slick  margin  of  the  shore,  car- 
rying something  large  and 
limp  under  one  arm,  and  with 
the  other  arm  poking  at  the 
ground  with  a stick. 

The  spinner  came  down  al- 
most on  top  of  him,  and  the 
two  men  in  it  reached  to  catch 
Calvin.  He  could  hardly  stand, 
let  alone  stumble  forward,  but 
stumble  he  did. 

“Cal!”  said  the  pilot.  “Hold 
up!  IFs  us.” 

“Let  go,”  said  Calvin  thick- 
ly. He  pulled  loose,  dug  with 
his  stick,  dropped  something 
from  the  limp  thing  into  the 
hole  he  had  made,  and  moved 
on. 

“You  out  of  your  head. 
Cal?”  cried  the  co-pilot. 
“Come  on,  weVe  got  to  get  you 
back  to  the  hospital.” 

“No,”  said  Calvin,  pulling 
away  again. 

“What’re  you  doing?”  de- 
manded the  pilot.  “WhaFve 
you  got  there?” 

“Think-plant.  Dead,”  said 
Calvin,  continuing  his  work. 
''Let  go!”  He  fought  weakl>% 
but  so  fiercely  that  they  did 
turn  him  loose  again.  “You 
don’t  understand.  Saved  my 
life.” 

“Saved  your  life?”  The  pilot 
followed  him.  “How?” 

“1  was  on  an  island.  In  the 
river.  Flood  coming  up.”  Cal- 
vin dug  a fresh  hole  in  the 
ground.  “It  could  have  lived  a 
little  longer.  It  let  me  pull  it 
ahead  of  time — so  Fd  have 
something  to  float  to  shore 

MARK  MALLORY 


on.”  He  turned  exhaustion- 
bleared  eyes  on  them.  Saved 
my  life.” 

The  pilot  and  the  co-pilot 
looked  at  each  other  as  two 
men  look  at  each  other  over 
the  head  of  a child,  or  a mad- 
man. 

'‘All  right,  Cal,”  said  the 
pilot.  "So  it  saved  your  life. 
But  how  come  you’ve  got  to  do 


this?  And  what  are  you  doing, 
anyhow?” 

"What  am  I doing?”  Calvin 
paused  entirely  and  turned  to 
face  them.  "What  am  I do- 
ing?” he  repeated  on  a rising 
note  of  wonder.  "Why,  you 
damn  fools,  Tm  doing  the  first 
real  thing  I ever  did  in  my 
life!  I’m  saving  the  lives  of 
these  seeds!”  END 


Charting  Our  Genes 

In  a combined  assault  on  ‘^linkage  studies”  for  *^the  location  of  genes  for 
such  things  as  eye  color,  blood  groups  and  specific  hereditary  diseases,” 
Johns  Hopkins  University  researchers  and  computer  men  are  engaged  in 
what  may  be  the  final  probe  into  the  mystery  of  heredity. 

Using  inherited  disease  as  a marker,  it  can  be  determined  which  genes 
travel  together;  the  computers  are  set  to  work  figuring  out  the  odds  of 
two  hereditary  traits  being  contained  in  the  same  chromosome,  and  then 
the  genetic  makeup  of  all  members  of  the  family  in  regard  to  the 
hereditary  disease. 

The  same  method  can  be  used  with  eye  color,  blood  groups,  and  even 
such  odd  inherited  traits  as  the  ability  to  taste  certain  chemicals. 

Prof.  S.  A.  Talbot,  spokesman  for  the  research  group,  cited  ellip- 
tocytosis,  a rare  dominant  characteristic  in  which  the  red  blood  cell  has 
an  elliptical  shape,  as  an  aid  in  computing  the  location  of  genes.  There 
are  about  a dozen  marker  traits  known  to  exist  in  Man  of  that  clearly 
determinable  a nature,  and  with  the  use  of  computers,  scientists  should 
be  able  to  assign  a linkage  group  to  one  in  five  of  these  traits. 

The  major  difficulty  is  collecting  five-generation  families.  This  is  no 
problem  with  test  animals  and  insects,  but  it  is  with  hum.an  beings.  Prof. 
Talbot  suggests  an  international  linkage-analysis  center  where  docu- 
mented data  can  be  assembled  and  studied. 

The  genetic  prevention  of  certain  hereditary  diseases  is  one  obvious 
benefit,  and  it  is  readily  within  grasp. 

Farther  off  is  the  complete  charting  of  the  chromosome  for  the  preven- 
tion of  all  inherited  disease — but  not  as  far  off  as  one  vrould  imagine,  for 
progress  is  being  made  at  a truly  fantastic  rate  compared  with  the  rela- 
tively slow  development  in  other  branches  of  medicine  until  now.  Ulti- 
mately? Mating  for  desired  traits  has  long  been  done  in  animal  hus- 
bandry, and  is  an  overworke<l  theme  in  science  fiction,  where  govern- 
mental decree  is  taken  for  granted — but  need  theie  be  force?  There  isn^t 
for  marriage. 


17 


the 

Divers 

By  JAMES  STAMERS 

*Xhe  key  to  Fred’s  success  was 


simple  he  may  not  have 


had  much  of  a mind,  hut  it 


was  all  his,  nobody  else’sl 


He  had  forgotten  the  beer 
again.  He  remembered 
that  he  had  forgotten  only  as 
he  opened  the  apaiianent  door. 
A wave  of  smoke  and  onions 
and  hamburger  flowed  past 
him  into  the  dingy  corridor 
and  he  stumbled  on  the  gar- 
bage pail,  plunked  right  in  the 
doorway  for  him  to  lug  along 
the  passage  to  the  chute.  The 
bed  was  not  made  in  one  of 
their  two  rooms  and  newspa- 
pers littered  the  other.  Elsie 
was  in  the  kitchen. 

“Fred!  Fred,  did  you  re- 
member my  beer?” 

18 


He  closed  the  door  so  that 
the  neighbors  would  not  hear 
the  row  to  come,  except 
through  the  walls. 

‘‘Didja,  Fred?” 

She  stood  akimbo  in  the 
kitchen  doorway,  a cigarette 
hanging  from  her  lips,  her 
dressing  gown  loose  and  spot- 
ted, her  feet  in  old  scuffs. 

‘‘I  forgot,”  he  mumbled, 
‘‘ril  go  now.” 

Oh,  no,  he  wouldn't.  Not 
until  he  had  heard  a full  re- 
sume of  his  lack  of  character, 
lack  of  enterprise,  ambition, 
decency,  thoughtfulness,  man- 
hood, semblance  of  virtue. 

“I  said  I was  going,  Elsie. 
1 said  I was  going,  didn't  I?” 
“Well,  my  day ! You  remem- 
bered my  name !” 

It  was  true  he  rarely  used 
her  name  or  called  her  any 
husbandly  term  such  as  dear 
or  darling  instead,  and  rarely 
looked  at  her  at  all  if  he  could 
avoid  it  inconspicuously.  Ten 
years  of  marriage — ten  years 
of  legal  proximity,  rather,  for 
nothing  in  him  was  married  to 
anything  in  her  any  more. 

“I  don't  know  why  you  mar- 
ried me,”  he  said. 

“Makes  you  wonder,  doesn't 
it?  Go  on,  get  out.” 

He  almost  knocked  the 
man  over  as  he  left  the 
apartment.  The  man  was 
standing  there,  about  to  ring 
the  bell.  Well  dressed,  clean, 
expensive  overcoat,  polished 
shoes,  black  hat  and  a mild 
friendly  face. 

20 


“Mr.  Frederick  Williams?^ 
the  man  asked. 

“Yes,”  said  Fred. 

“You  entered  the  Sunday 
News  competition  for  a free 
space  ride?” 

“Yes.  Did  I win  it?” 
“Unfortunately,  no,”  said 
the  man. 

“Oh.  Well,  excuse  me,  Tve 
got  to  go  and  get  something.” 
“I'll  come  with  you.  My 
name  is  Howard  Sprinnell, 
Mr.  Williams,  and  Tve  been 
examining  the  entries  to  that 
competition.  Frankly,  we 
think  you  have  considerable 
talent.” 

“Mister,”  said  Fred  over 
his  shoulder  as  they  went 
down  the  stairs,  “if  you're 
trying  to  sell  me  something — ” 
“I  don't  want  a penny  from 
you,  Mr.  Williams.” 

“Then  what — ” 

“We  would  merely  appreci- 
ate a few  hours  of  your  time, 
at  your  convenience.” 

“A  few  hours?”  Fred  said, 
distressed.  By  working  double 
shift  in  the  automation-parts 
supply  house,  he  could  just 
keep  going,  financially  and 
physically.  The  question  of 
mental  fatigue  was  exclusive- 
ly Elsie's  province  and  there 
he  had  a rough  working 
technique  for  responding 
without  really  listening.  His 
job  called  for  no  mental  effort 
greater  than  reading  a ship- 
ping list,  and  his  home  life 
certainly  didn't.  Most  of  the 
time  he  had  nothing  in  his 
mind  at  all;  the  days  passed 


JAMES  STAMERS 


faster  that  way.  But  Elsie  and 
the  job  kept  him  tired.  Odd 
how  just  not  listening  wrung 
you  out  and  drained  you  off. 

“We  are,  of  course,  very 
glad  to  offer  you  compensation 
for  your  time,  Mr.  Williams,” 
said  the  man. 

Elsie  would  just  drink  it 
away.  He'd  have  to  haul  crates 
of  bourbon  instead  of  cans  of 
beer,  that's  all. 

“Not  interested,”  he  said. 

That  was  it.  That  was  the 
way  to  keep  a salesman  stall- 
ed. Just  “not  interested.” 
Keep  saying  it  and  nothing 
else.  They  all  said  they  were 
not  salesmen  and  weren't  sell- 
ing anything.  Every  salesman 
he  had  ever  met  at  the  door 
said  that.  Galactic  Encyclope- 
dia, Nuclear  Brush,  Your 
Venus  Vacation,  video  sub- 
scriptions, even  the  Federal 
numbei's  game,  they  all  start- 
ed out  by  offering  you  a spe- 
cial opportunity  and  were  not 
selling  you  anything.  The  man 
was  still  talking. 

“Not  interested,'’  Fred  said. 

“Fred,”  said  the  man  as 
they  reached  the  bottom  of  the 
stairs,  “I'm  doing  you  a favor. 
I'm  not  supposed  to  tell  you 
this,  but  either  you  come  vol- 
untarily or  you'll  come  any- 
way. Why  not  get  paid  for  it?” 

“Not  interested.  And  if  any- 
one wants  me,  they  can  come 
and  get  me.  I don't  care.  I just 
don't  care.” 

He  slouched  off  into  the  rain 
toward  the  supermarket. 

As  Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell 


watched  him  go  he  took  a 
small  silver  case  from  his  top- 
coat pocket.  He  raised  the 
case  to  his  lips  and  said  quiet- 
ly: “Sprinnell  here.  No.  A 
clear  case,  but  no.  Pick  him 
up.” 

The  squad  car  arrived  si- 
lently on  its  jets  as  Fred 
Williams  reached  the  door  of 
the  apartment  house.  He  was 
carrying  a pack  of  beer  in 
each  hand  and  was  glad  to  see 
the  man  had  gone.  That's  all 
you  had  to  do — just  keep  say- 
ing “not  interested”  until  they 
went  away. 

“O.K.,  bud.” 

The  troopers  took  him  on 
both  sides,  grasped  his  arms, 
and  levered  him  round. 

“Hey!”  Fred  protested. 
“The  beer's  for  my  wife.  She's 
waiting  for  it.  Please,  fellers, 
I'll  never  hear  the  end  of  it  if 
she  doesn't  get  her  beer.” 
“Joe,”  said  the  trooper  on 
Fred's  right,  jerking  his  head 
in  the  direction  of  the  door  be- 
hind them. 

A third  trooper  climbed  out 
of  the  squad  car,  took  the 
packs  from  Fred's  hands  and 
walked  into  the  apartment 
house.  He  climbed  the  stairs 
swiftly,  wrinkling  his  nose  at 
the  stale  thickness  of  the  air, 
knocked  on  the  apartment  door 
and  waited  for  Elsie  to  open 
it. 

“Here's  your  beer,”  he  said 
shortly. 

“Where's  Fred?” 

“Your  husband  is  being  de- 

21 


THE  DIVERS 


tained  in  connection  with  a 
robbery  at  his  office/' 

"‘Fred!  Are  you  kidding? 
Fred  hasn't  the  sense  or  the 
guts ! How  long  will  he  be 
gone?" 

“Two  or  three  weeks." 

“Oh,"  said  Elsie,  scratching 
herself  disinterestedly.  “Well, 
thanks  for  the  beer." 

She  shut  the  door  and  the 
trooper  returned  to  the  squad 
car.  He  looked  at  Fred  sym- 
pathetically but  said  nothing. 
The  squad  car  took  off,  then 
turned  on  its  sirens. 

‘‘What's  this  all  about?" 
asked  Fred  Williams  from  the 
back  seat. 

“Just  excitement,  bud.  We 
live  a dull  life." 

You  think  you  do,  you 
should  live  mine.  I don't  care 
anyway.  If  I ask  them  what 
I'm  doing  in  this  squad  car. 
I'll  get  a silly  answer. 

“A  guy  called  Spinner  or 
something  send  for  you?" 

“We  don't  get  sent  for,  bud. 
Where  have  you  been,  the 
Middle  Ages?" 

He  had  a point  there.  Se- 
curity troopers  were  un- 
der direct  control  of  the 
President  and  came  and  went 
as  they  pleased.  The  satellite 
stations  gave  them  general  di- 
rectives and  the  President 
directed  the  stations.  Fred 
Williams  grinned  at  the 
thought  of  Spinner,  or  what- 
ever his  name  was,  calling  the 
President  to  call  a satellite 
station  to  call  these  cops  to 


come  and  get  him.  He  would 
have  been  shocked  and  fright- 
ened if  anyone  had  told  him 
this  was  almost  exactly  what 
had  happened. 

They  shot  into  the  garage 
of  an  ordinary  Federal  police 
station,  a large  tiled  vault 
smelling  of  hoses,  soap  and 
water.  The  troopers  took  him 
upstairs,  along  wax-polished 
corridors,  through  swinging 
doors  and  out  of  the  muttered 
voices,  footsteps,  paper  rat- 
tling and  telephone  tinkle  of 
the  station,  into  the  smooth 
silence  of  a surgery.  That  fel- 
low Spinner  was  waiting  in  a 
white  doctor's  coat. 

“They  pick  you  up  too?" 
Fred  Williams  said. 

The  Security  troopers  hoist- 
ed him  into  a dentist's  chair, 
saluted  the  other  man  and 
went  away. 

“You  can  leave  any  time 
you  wish,  Fred.  If  you  do, 
though.  I'll  have  you  brought 
back.  I'm  Dr.  Howard  Sprin- 
nell." 

“Funny,  I thought  your 
name  was  Cloud  Spinner  or 
something,"  Fred  confessed. 

“That's  veiy  interesting." 
The  doctor  leaned  forward 
across  his  desk.  “What  made 
you  think  that?" 

“I  just  remembered  it  that 
way,  that's  all." 

“Ah.  You  have  an  unusual 
mind,  Fred.  No,  I mean  it. 
And  just  to  show  you  this  is 
not  fooling,  I have  a call  here 
for  you  from  the  President." 

“From  Jake?" 


22 


JAMES  STAMERS 


“From  President  Jackson, 
yes.” 

Dr.  SPRINNELL  pressed  a 
a green  button  on  the 
video  control  on  his  desk. 
The  wall  panel  lit  and  Presi- 
dent Jackson’s  familiar  face 
looked  at  Fred  Williams. 

“Mr.  Williams,”  said  the 
President.  “The  nation  has 
called  you  to  an  unusual  task. 
On  your  complete  cooperation 
and  absolute  discretion  in  not 
mentioning  to  anyone — to  any- 
one at  all — what  you  may  now 
learn  depend  matters  of  the 
utmost  consequence  to  us  all. 
I wish  you  good  luck  and  God- 
speed.” 

The  panel  went  dark  and 
the  doctor  switched  off. 

“That  was  Jake  himself,” 
Fred  Williams  said.  “Talking 
to  me.” 

Like  the  many  thousand 
million  in  the  System,  Fred 
referred  to  the  President  fa- 
miliarly as  Jake,  but  he  never 
thought  he  would  get  to  talk 
to  him,  or  be  talked  to  person- 
ally. 

“What  did  he  want  to  talk 
to  me  for?”  Fred  asked,  dazed. 

“That’s  what  I want  to 
show  you,”  said  Dr.  Sprinnell. 
“You  understood  what  the 
President  said  about  keeping 
this  entirely  confidential?” 
“Hell,  no  one  would  believe 
it  if  I said  I’d  been  talking  to 
the  President,  anyway.” 
“That’s  what  we  figure,” 
said  the  doctor,  smiling  slight- 
ly. He  picked  up  a pack  of 


cards  and  flipped  five  of  them 
onto  the  desk,  a circle,  a cross, 
two  wavy  lines,  a rectangle 
and  a star.  “These  are  Zener 
cards,  Fred.  Ever  see  them 
before?” 

No,  but  they  didn’t  look  like 
much.  This  was  cockeyed,  the 
whole  situation — having  the 
President  call  him  so  that  he 
and  a quack  could  play  cards. 

“It  will  be  clearer  in  a little 
while,”  Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell 
said.  “But  first  we  must  run 
this  little  check.  Please  point 
to  one  of  these  cards  every 
minute  when  I say  ‘now.’  ” 

Fred  shifted  himself  in  the 
high  chair  and  pointed  to  one 
of  the  five  cards  obediently 
every  minute.  After  twenty 
minutes,  the  doctor  increased 
the  rate.  He  noted  every  selec- 
tion. 

“Last  lap  now,  Fred.” 

He  was  sick  of  this,  but  it 
was  better  than  sitting  in  the 
apartment  with  Elsie.  Fred 
pointed  to  a card  for  the  last 
time. 

“And  now,”  the  doctor  said, 
standing  up  and  feeding  his 
notations  into  a machine  in 
the  corner  of  the  room,  “we 
have  here  the  results.” 

He  pulled  a tape  from  the 
machine  as  it  purred  out,  and 
showed  it  to  Fred.  It  was  a 
score  of  some  sort. 

“In  another  room,”  Dr. 
Howard  Sprinnell  explained, 
“we  have  a synchronized  tele- 
path trying  to  influence  your 
selections  of  these  cards.  If 
you  have  psi  qualities,  Fred, 

23 


THE  DIVERS 


these  results  will  show  how 
high  they  are.  If  you  have 
none,  then  your  chances  of 
picking  the  right  card  are  one 
in  five.  That  goes  for  picking 
the  card  ahead  of  the  right 
one,  or  behind  it,  or  two  ahead 
and  so  on.  In  other  words,  if 
the  cards  had  been  selected 
here  by  a machine  instead  of 
you,  we  would  expect  twenty 
per  cent  of  the  answers  to  be 
right,  by  sheer  chance — or 
statistical  probability,  to  put 
it  more  accurately.” 

“So  how  did  I do?  Am  I a 
mind-reader?  That  would 
make  me  laugh.” 

The  doctor  glanced  at  the 
result  tape  he  was  hold- 
ing. 

“You  have  the  results  we 
want,”  he  said.  “Otherwise  I 
would  not  tell  you  this.  You 
would  be  thanked,  given  a re- 
ward, made  a fuss  of  by  some 
civil  servant  of  prominence 
and  sent  home  in  style.” 

He  looked  up  at  Fred  in  the 
dentist’s  chair. 

“Do  you  remember  that 
contest  in  the  Sunday  NeivsV’ 
Fred  Williams  remembered 
it.  Every  week  there  had  been 
a puzzle  picture  to  identify. 
The  contest  had  lasted  nearly 
a year.  He  remembered  par- 
ticularly that  each  week  there 
had  been  a cut  of  the  room  in 
which  entries  were  to  be 
judged,  a large  editorial  office, 
just  above  the  puzzle  picture. 
Just  a room.  He  had  wondered 
why  they  bothered  to  put  it  in. 

24 


“There  was  a picture  of  a 
room  in  the  paper,”  said  the 
doctor,  “where  each  week, 
without  any  possibility  of 
fraud  or  anyone  seeing  it  ex- 
cept the  judges,  the  solution 
to  the  puzzle  was  hung  up  on 
the  wall  in  the  middle  of  the 
picture  shovm  in  the  paper. 
The  puzzles  themselves  were 
meaningless.  We  w'anted  to 
see  how  many  people  wrote 
in  the  right  solution  just  from 
seeing  the  picture  of  the  emp- 
ty room.  The  right  solution, 
of  course,  was  the  one  hanging 
in  that  room  at  that  time, 
which  no  one  could  see,  and 
which  was  selected  an  hour 
before  publication  of  the  pa- 
per each  week  by  random  se- 
lection in  a dictionaiy.” 

“So  what  did  I get,  a con- 
solation prize?”  asked  Fred. 

“In  a way,”  the  doctor 
smiled.  “But  not  for  coming 
near  winning.  The  top  twenty 
winners  were  highly  gifted 
people  we  recruited  into  the 
Psi  faculties  of  Duke,  Har- 
vard, Oxford,  Paris  and  else- 
where. They  scored  consistent- 
ly throughout  the  year  with  a 
better  than  probability  devia- 
tion.” 

“Huh?” 

“They  got  a lot  more  right 
than  they  could  by  chance 
alone.  But  your  results  Avere 
even  more  interesting  to  us. 
You  got  the  same  result  here, 
just  now,  on  the  Zener  cards.” 
“I’m  still  in  the  running?” 
“Fred,  quite  seriously,  you 
are  the  best  candidate  we’ve 


JAMES  STAMERS 


ever  met.  Hence  the  special 
treatment.  In  the  history  of 
the  System  Government,  there 
have  only  been  ten  other  peo- 
ple with  results  similar  to 
yours.” 

“Is  that  so?  Well,  I suppose 
you  know  what  you're  doing, 
Doc.  But  I never  had  a pre- 
monition in  my  life.” 

Doctor  Howard  Sprinnell 
frowned.  “I  should  hope  not. 
Almost  everyone  has  some  psi 
capacities,  but  w'e're  not  inter- 
ested in  minor  phenomena. 
This  is  a government  depart- 
ment, Fred.  Here  a thing  has 
to  work  all  the  time,  whenever 
it's  needed,  wherever  it’s  need- 
ed. A faculty  professor  has. 
off-days  when  he  couldn't  roll 
a die  against  chance.  But  you 
can't.” 

“Look,  doc.  I think  you’ve 
got  the  wrong  man.  I'm  Fred 
Williams.  Frederick  L.  Wil- 
liams. Are  you  sure — ” 

“Look  yourself,”  interrupt- 
ed the  doctor,  leaning  over  to 
wave  the  tape  under  Fred’s 
nose.  Chance  would  give  you 
twenty  per  cent  right — one 
out  of  five.  Look  at  your  re- 
sult.” 

Fred  took  the  tape  and 
studied  it.  “You’ve  read  it 
wrong.  This  says  several  mil- 
lion per  cent.” 

“It  says  z67'o  per  cent.  NiL 
Not  one  answer  right,  Fred. 
The  millions  are  the  probabil- 
ities of  that  deviation  ...  oh, 
never  mind.  See  the  big  black 
zero?” 

“Yes,  Doc.” 


“That  is  your  result.  It’s 
statistically  almost  impossi- 
ble, but  you've  done  it.  You 
did  it  with  the  puzste  in  the 
competition.  You  did  not  get 
one  single,  solitary  answer 
right.  Not  one!  Even  a ma- 
chine gets  one  out  of  five 
right,  Fred.  Don't  you  see?” 
No,  he  didn’t,  and  it  seemed 
to  be  just  what  Elsie  was  al- 
ways complaining  about.  He 
lacked  this  and  lacked  that. 
And  now  he  couldn’t  even  do 
what  a machine  did. 

“Okay,  Doc,”  Fred  said 
tiredly.  “So  I'm  dumber  than 
a machine.  That  figures.” 

“If  you  talk  like  that,  you 
are,”  snapped  Doctor  Howard 
Sprinell.  “You  have  the  high- 
est negative  Psi  rating  in  the 
Solar  System.  No  clairvoy- 
ance, no  telepathy,  no  induced 
hallucinations,  no  precogni- 
tions, no  telekinesis,  no  psi- 
screens,  no  interference  of  any 
kind.  When  we  send  you  out 
into — well,  never  mind,  Fred. 
The  main  point  at  present  is 
that  you  are  a very,  very  rare 
observer.” 

“That’s  fine,”  Fred  said. 
“Look,  Doc,  I feel  beat.” 
“You’re  meant  to.  Hell, 
man.  I’ve  been  tiring  you  for 
two  hours  now.  And  what’s 
more.  I'll  give  you  a little 
warning  in  advance.  We  aren’t 
going  to  let  you  eat  for  three 
days  either.  You’re  going  to 
be  so  tired  that  your  body  is 
going  to  loosen  its  grip.  Don’t 
worry,  you  won’t  die.  Ten  peo- 
ple have  done  this  before  you 

25 


THE  DIVERS 


and  they’re  all  right.  You’ll 
meet  them  all  soon.  Now  just 
hold  still.” 

Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell  slip- 
ped a hypo  needle  swiftly  into 
Fred’s  neck,  withdrew  it  and 
dabbed  with  a piece  of  surgi- 
cal wool. 

“Off  you  go,  Fred.” 

He  was  breaking  into 
pieces,  but  he  didn’t  care. 
He  slept  and  woke  and  slept 
and  woke  in  the  chair  in  old 
Cloud  Spinner’s  office  and  now 
he  was  coming  apart  and  he 
just  did  not  care.  Fred  Wil- 
liams had  had  several  years 
of  simple  apathy.  It  came  nat- 
urally to  him.  His  body  rested, 
tired  and  inert,  lacking  in 
vigor  from  lack  of  food,  and 
his  mind  separated  slowly 
from  it,  like  a man  standing 
up  in  a pool  of  pygmies.  His 
heart,  hands,  liver,  stomach, 
viscera  had  their  pygmy 
minds  all  bundled  in  with  his, 
and  now  falling  away  in  sepa- 
ration as  he  rose  from  them. 

His  mind  rose  away  from 
his  body  in  the  chair  alto- 
gether. He  viewed  his  body 
with  unconcern,  and  the  chair 
in  which  it  sat,  and  the  room, 
and  through  the  walls  the  sur- 
rounding offices,  and  the 
rooms  of  the  Federal  police 
station,  where  the  Security 
trooper  named  Joe  who  had 
taken  the  beer  sat  picking  his 
teeth  and  gabbing  with  a pair 
of  young  Federal  cops,  and  the 
roof  of  the  block  in  which  the 
station  stood. 


His  mind  went  up  like  a 
balloon,  rising  swiftly  into  the 
atmosphere,  and  the  city 
shrank  away  under  him  like 
a toy  plan,  a kid’s  aid  to  Bet- 
ter Civics,  Home  Town  box 
VI,  no  Solar  Credits  neces- 
sary. He  shifted  automatically 
away  from  the  main  airport, 
but  a moment  later  he  went 
clean  through  an  airliner 
cockpit,  cabins  with  passen- 
gers, exhaust,  and  out  exactly 
where  he  was  before.  His 
mind  followed  the  airliner  in- 
voluntarily, until  he  asked 
himself  why,  and  immediately 
continued  rising  into  the  sky, 
looking  down  at  the  ground 
and  the  great  spherical  hori- 
zon. 

His  mind  rose  into  cloud 
and  examined  minutely  a wa- 
ter molecule  floating  from  a 
piece  of  dust  as  big  as  a rock. 
His  sense  of  proportion  sent 
him  shooting  out  of  the  top  of 
the  cloud  suddenly,  like  a star- 
tled fish.  The  ground  became 
a globe  gradually,  and  as  the 
clouds  below  became  little 
wisps  over  the  light  blue  haze 
of  the  Earth,  his  feeling  of 
liberation  increased  and  he 
rose  faster.  He  went  through 
layer  after  layer  of  radiation 
sparking  fitfully  around  him, 
and  fiercer  belts.  And  then  the 
dust  thinned  out  like  scattered 
transparent  ball  bearings,  and 
his  mind  approached  the  sat- 
ellite stations  riding  over  the 
Earth.  He  was  tempted  to  go 
through  one,  but  it  seemed  un- 
important and  he  rose  out. 


26 


JAMES  STAMERS 


The  Moon  was  swinging 
down  away  from  him,  a vast 
pitted  ball  bigger  to  his  mind 
than  the  Earth  now.  He  put  on 
more  speed,  so  that  his  mind 
flashed  away  from  the  Sun. 
Then  as  he  paused  an  odd 
thing  happened.  One  moment 
he  was  up  there,  alone  above 
the  small  Earth  and  its  small- 
er Moon,  and  the  next  instant 
his  mind  had  flashed  right  into 
the  center  of  the  Sun,  deep  in 
the  inferno  of  its  core,  where 
violence  and  variegated  light 
surrounded  him.  And  then  he 
was  out  again,  and  his  mind 
zoomed  off  as  if  he  were  sit- 
ting in  the  front  seat  of  a low- 
slung  car  with  the  landmarks 
coming  at  a rush  toward  him 
and  away  to  the  side.  The 
Galaxy  fell  away  behind  his 
mind  in  this  fashion  and  the 
Great  Nebula  of  Andromeda 
passed  by. 

His  mind  roamed  for  a 
while  among  the  other  galactic 
clusters  and  the  spiral  gal- 
axies. He  found  his  mind 
could  appear  at  any  point  he 
wished,  without  the  long  rush 
through  space.  He  could  trans- 
fer instantaneously  from  place 
to  place,  and  he  hopped  in  this 
way  at  random  from  Crab  to 
Lagoon  and  in  to  Polaris  and 
out  to  the  Great  Spiral  of 
Ursa  Major,  and  onward  to 
the  open  centers  of  the  uni- 
verse. 

In  deeper  space,  where  end- 
less banks  of  galaxies  roller- 
coasted  away  from  each  other, 
he  felt  a change  of  quality 

THE  DIVERS 


come  over  his  mind.  It  turned 
within  itself  where  all  the 
vivid  stars  became  mere  float- 
ing lights  on  the  surface  of  a 
bubble  outside.  Here,  within 
his  mind,  was  deeper  space 
and  yet  another  liberation. 
His  mind  hung  like  a grape 
about  to  empty  into  a vat, 
which  in  this  larger  sense  was 
truly  himself.  Insofar  as  he, 
Fi-ed  Williams,  was  a mind,  it 
was  only  a skin  around  the 
greater  liquid,  in  which  indeed 
he  perceived  all  things  held 
in  common. 

He  was  about  to  throw  off 
the  skin  and  mingle  in  this 
condition  where  he  and  the 
Magellanic  Clouds  and  Joe  the 
Security  trooper’s  toothpick 
had  a single  existence,  when 
he  was  back  in  the  chair  in  the 
office. 

His  body  settled  over  him 
again.  He  felt  compressed  and 
imprisoned  and  robbed.  His 
head  turned  as  if  it  were  o*n 
antiquated  pulleys  and  his 
arms  and  shoulders  were 
strung  together  awkwardly. 

“It’s  bad  to  be  back,  isn’t  it? 
You’ll  never  get  used  to  that. 
But  that  was  one  hell  of  a 
Dive.” 

Fred  williams  looked  at 

the  other  people  in  the  of- 
fice. There  were  ten  of  them 
and  Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell. 
Three  were  women,  and  all 
except  the  doctor  had  large 
eyes. 

That  was  what  you  noticed 
about  them,  their  enormous 

27 


gentle  eyes  and  their  slightly 
thin  faces.  The  doctor  held  a 
mirror  up  for  him  to  see  his 
own  face,  and  it  was  much  the 
same. 

“They  thought  we  had  lost 
you  there  for  a while,”  said 
the  doctor.  “All  Divers  do  that 
on  their  first  trip  out — but 
you.  I’m  told,  almost  joined 
the  Lord.” 

“Is  that  what  This  is?” 

“It’s  a matter  outside  our 
field,”  said  Dr.  Howard  Sprin- 
nell  carefully,  “and  a matter 
of  choice  as  to  name.  But  mys- 
tical evidence  seems  to  point 
that  way.” 

One  of  the  girls  laughed. 
“You’re  embarrassing  the  So- 
lar Government,  Fred.  They 
are  not  supposed  to  have  any 
sectarian  views.  But  that’s 
what  we  Divers  think  the 
This  is.  My  name’s  Milly.  'This 
is  Pat,  and  Joan,  Bill,  Ed,  Al, 
John,  Anthony,  Ricardo  and 
Mitch.  Welcome  to  the  Divers, 
Fred.” 

Fred  Williams  smiled 
around.  The  women  were  at- 
tractive, all  brown-haired  and 
nicely  shaped.  The  seven  men 
were  just  regular  guys  you 
might  meet  anywhere.  But 
then,  he  wasn’t  anything  to 
win  a prize  himself. 

“So  far  as  we  are  concern- 
ed, Fred,”  Dr.  Howard  Sprin- 
nell  said,  “and  this  is  official, 
there  is  the  normal  conscious 
mind,  the  subliminal  mind  of 
which  we  are  not  usually  con- 
scious but  which  is  apparently 
a parcel  of  regional  physical 

28 


minds  and  the  mind  you  roam 
in,  and  there  is  the  uncon- 
scious mind,  which  does  not 
seem  to  belong  to  any  one  pez’- 
son,  although  everyone  has  it, 
and  which  you  people  embar- 
rass me  by  referring  to  as  the 
This. 

“All  we  know,  officially,  is 
that  the  This  is  the  natural  or 
original  home  of  the  universe, 
and  the  only  reason  we  know 
that  is  because  we  don’t  want 
Divers  to  disappear  into  it  and 
not  come  out.  You’re  all  too 
rare.  I gather  it  is  almost  un- 
bearable to  come  out  of.  But 
you’ll  just  have  to  avoid  the 
temptation  to  go  home,  as  it 
were.  After  all,  it  has  taken 
several  million  years  to  get 
man  out  here  where  he  is  and 
what  he  is.  And  the  second 
reason  is  that  the  entire  Solar 
Government  depends  on  the 
people  in  this  room  for  infor- 
mation.” 

Fred  Williams  looked  at  the 
others.  They  were  serious. 
The  smallest  of  the  girls,  Pat, 
caught  him  looking  and 
smiled. 

She  turned  to  the  doctor. 
“Can  I tell  Fred?” 

“You  followed  him,  so  you 
may  as  well.  7 don’t  know 
what  you  Divers  feel.  But  the 
Defense  Council  is  waiting 
for  the  rest  of  you  and  we 
must  hurry  along.” 

Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell  pat- 
ted Fred  on  the  shoulder  as  he 
passed.  He  stood  aside  for  the 
other  Divers  to  leave  the 
room,  nodded  to  Pat  and  Fred, 


JAMES  STAMERS 


and  shut  the  door  behind  him. 

Fred  Williams  levered  his 
body  off  the  dentist’s  chair 
and  stood  unsteadily.  The  girl 
took  his  arm.  She  was  smaller 
than  he,  the  top  of  her  head 
reaching  to  his  mouth,  small, 
delicate  and  scented  with 
heather. 

“There’s  a lounge  next  door 
— you  may  not  have  noticed  it 
on  the  way  out — and  there’s 
always  a bowl  of  fruit  and 
some  cheese  and  biscuits 
there.  Let’s  go  in.” 

He  followed  her. 

Even  the  short  walk  helped 
accustom  himself  to  his  body 
again.  And  the  room  was  large 
and  airy,  overlooking  the  cen- 
tral park  of  the  city  and  the 
clouds  beyond  the  tall  build- 
ings in  the  distance. 

He  stood  looking  out  at  the 
view  and  eating  an  apple 
while  she  sliced  cheese  and 
laid  the  pieces  on  a plate  with 
some  biscuits  for  him.  Then 
she  sat  down,  folded  her  hands 
in  her  lap  and  looked  at  him. 
She  was  wearing  a white-and- 
blue-check  dress.  She  looked 
young  and  fresh  and  alive. 
The  room  was  clean  and  fresh. 
He  could  not  think  of  Elsie 
and  that  apartment  as  being 
in  the  same  world. 

“Did  the  doc  say  you  fol- 
lowed me?”  Fred  asked  even- 
tually. 

“One  of  us  always  goes  with 
a new  Diver  on  the  first  trip.” 

“What  did  I look  like?  I 
mean  was  there  anything  to 
see?” 


“Oh,  yes.”  Pat  laughed.  "As 
a matter  of  fact,  our  minds 
look  like  the  inside  of  eggs  out 
there.” 

“But  a plane  went  through 
me.  And  I shot  for  some  rea- 
son into  the  Sun.” 

He  turned  and  looked 

disbelievingly  up  into  the 

sky. 

The  Sun  made  him  blink 
and  his  eyes  watered. 

“Now  I can’t  even  look  at 
it,”  he  said,  “any  more  than 
I could  before.” 

“Show  me  your  mind,”  she 
said  simply.  “Where  is  it?” 
“Well . . .” 

“That’s  the  whole  point  of 
the  Divers.  A mind  is  not  in 
space-time.  It  is  connected 
with  a body  which  is — or,  to 
be  exact,  it  is  associated  with 
— a physical  brain,  which  in 
turn  can  work  a mouth  and 
hands  to  communicate  what 
the  mind  has  seen.  The  Solar 
Government  has  the  problem 
in  reverse.  They  can  send  ships 
through  hyper-space ; other- 
wise, as  you  know,  we  could 
never  have  populated  the  Gal- 
axy. Why,  Polaris,  which  you 
visited,  is  over  a thousand 
light-years  from  Earth!  They 
can  make  matter  shift  in  and 
out  of  hyper-space.  But  they 
can’t  communicate  that  far 
away.  Radiation  won’t  take 
the  shift.  So  the  government 
can  either  send  radio  waves 
out  and  wait  a couple  of  thou- 
sand years  for  the  answer,  or 
it  has  to  shuttle  whole  ships 


THE  DIVERS 


29 


to  and  fro  just  to  get  a simple 
message. 

“Worse,  from  a defense 
viewpoint,  there  are  times 
when  they  must  have  informa- 
tion fast  and  when  the  nature 
of  the  news  means  that  no 
ship  will  be  either  available 
or  allowed  to  become  available 
to  carry  the  news.  Suppose 
you  are  an  intelligent  life- 
form  off  Canopus  and  you 
think  up  a magnificent  way  of 
taking  over  the  Solar  System. 
You’re  six  hundred  and  fifty 
light-years  away,  but  time  is 
no  problem  because  either  you 
live  longer  than  that  or  you 
have  a tribe-culture.  Even  if 
the  system  had  a billion  police 
ships,  which  it  hasn't,  it  could 
never  be  sure  of  catching 
Canopus  preparing,  or  inter- 
cepting whatever  horror  they 
sent  oft.  And  even  if  it  were 
lucky,  the  ship  would  have  to 
come  back  itself  to  get  the 
news  to  the  Solar  Govern- 
ment. 

“A  Diver  can  send  his  mind 
instantaneously  from  one  end 
of  the  universe  to  the  other, 
he  can  examine  atomic  parti- 
cles or  survey  galaxies,  he  can 
see  through  matter  as  if  it 
were  full  of  holes — which  it  is 
— he  can  patrol  sectors  and 
report  exactly  what  he  found 
there.  He  can  dive  into  deep 
space  and  be  free.” 

“Yes,”  Fred  Williams  said. 
“That’s  it.  Free.  That’s  exact- 
ly how  we  feel,  isn’t  it?” 

“Never  mind.  You’ll  be  go- 
ing out  again.  Regularly.  With 

30 


me  at  first  until  you  get  pa- 
troling  under  control.  And 
then  on  your  own.” 

“Are  we  always  hungry?” 
asked  Fred  Williams,  taking 
another  apple. 

“It  helps.  The  government 
would  like  us  to  be  permanent- 
ly at  the  point  of  death,  but 
that  is  fortunately  impracti- 
cal. The  less  hold  our  bodies 
have,  the  easier  it  is  to  go  out. 
There’s  one  other  point, 
though.  And  since  you’re  com- 
ing with  me  on  your  training. 
I’d  prefer  you  to  know — no 
matter  what  the  rules  say. 
Whenever  you  go  near  another 
living  being  in  a Dive,  your 
mind  can  see  the  other  mind, 
and  you  can  read  it  from  the 
pictures  in  it.  It’s  difficult  to 
describe,  but  you’ll  see  for 
yourself.  And  if  the  mind  you 
are  looking  at  is  connected  up 
to  a body,  as  we  are  now,  and 
if  the  pictures  don’t  seem  to 
fit  the  situation,  you  can  take 
it  that  they  refer  to  events 
still  in  the  future  as  far  as 
that  body  is  concerned.  The 
mind  has  a different  space- 
time  existence  from  the  body, 
obviously,  and  quite  often  it 
is  ahead  in  time.  That’s  why 
we  have  to  be  negative  Psi. 
Anyone  can  Dive,  but  only  a 
negative  Psi  can  remain  ob- 
jective about  other  beings’ 
minds.  A Psi  would  collect 
other  minds’  contents  and  get 
them  confused  with  his  own — 
future  and  present  all  messed 
up,  full  of  symbols — take  a 
look  at  a Psi’s  mind  sometime 


JAMES  STAMERS 


on  the  way  back.  There  are  a 
lot  of  accidental  roamers 
around  on  Earth.'' 

‘‘If  we  can  read  other 
minds,"  Fred  Williams  said 
thoughtfully,  “then  we  Divers 
could  have  a hell  of  a lot  of 
power." 

He  was  surprised  when  Pat 
laughed. 

“We  all  think  of  that,"  she 
said,  “but  so  did  the  Solar 
Government.  We  have  a bunch 
of  Psis  and  Security  troops 
tracing  us  all  the  time  when 
we're  in  the  body.  But  the  real 
hold  on  us  is  not  that.  How 
would  you  feel  if  you  were 
told  you  could  never  Dive 
again?" 

“I — I wouldn't  like  that." 

“You  see?  And  you've  only 
been  on  the  first  experimental 
Dive.  Imagine  when  it  is  your 
whole  life." 

Fred  Williams  nodded  slow- 
ly. 

Then  he  asked:  “Where  do 
you  live?" 

“Oh,  no.  Divers  never  mix. 
Our  existence  is  a top-secret. 
And  the  risk  of  losing  two 
Divers  in  a single  accident 
would  keep  the  Defense  Coun- 
cil awake  at  night." 

“But  everyone  was  here  to- 
day." 

“To  welcome  you.  That's  a 
big  occasion  to  us." 

“It's  the  biggest  thing  that 
ever  happened  to  me,"  Fred 
Williams  said. 

“I  know,"  Pat  answered 
quietly.  “I  saw  your  mind. 
But  ril  change  that,  Fred." 


She  stood  up  and  brushed 
her  hands  over  her  dress. 

“Where  will  I see  you 
again?"  he  asked. 

“You  never  will." 

He  stood  up  to  protest. 

“Not  in  the  body,"  she 
amended. 

He  looked  so  mournful  that 
she  walked  over  and  kissed 
him. 

“There's  a good-by  present. 
Diver.  But  we  will  meet  reg- 
ularly." 

Finding  him  sitting  with 
a pile  of  apple  cores  beside 
him,  the  doctor  clicked  his 
tongue  reprovingly. 

“Tell  me.  Doc,  how  could 
you  stop  me  Diving?"  asked 
Fred  worriedly. 

“Fill  you  full  of  vitamins 
and  carbohydrates  and  alcohol 
and  send  you  on  a pleasure- 
cruise  with  a lot  of  accom- 
plished women,"  said  Dr. 
Howard  Sprinnell  promptly. 
“Or  allow  you  to  stuff  yourself 
with  apples,  for  a start.  Now 
come  along  or  I'll  bar  you 
from  the  exercise  room." 

Fred  Williams  followed  him 
thoughtfully. 

“By  the  way,"  the  doctor 
said  over  his  shoulder,  “your 
wife  thinks  you're  under  ar- 
rest. You’ve  been  here  four 
days  so  far  and  we  can  keep 
you  another  ten  or  so.  After 
that  you’ll  have  to  go  back. 
You're  on  our  payroll  now,  but 
you'd  better  keep  your  job. 
Or  we  can  find  you  a heavier 
one,  if  you're  not  tired  enough. 

31 


THE  DIVERS 


We’ll  seal  a miniature  trans- 
mitter into  your  larynx  under 
the  skin  before  you  leave,  so 
that  you  can  report  audibly 
from  wherever  you  are.  Div- 
ing has  the  same  effect  on  the 
body  as  sleep,  you’ll  find,  so 
you  can  do  both  at  once.  I’ll 
grade  off  the  injections  before 
you  leave  here.  Now^  this  is  the 
political  field  as  we  know 
it . . 

They  stood  in  a large  lecture 
hall,  filled  with  spaced  models 
of  the  Solar  System,  set  in 
the  Milky  Way  and  surround- 
ed by  the  related  galaxies. 

‘‘Here’s  the  spiral  in  Andro- 
meda,” said  the  doctor,  using 
a long  pointer.  “I  understand 
you  went  there  ...” 

He  took  Fred  Williams  on  a 
general  tour  of  the  hall. 

“Of  course  there  are  others 
not  shown  here,”  he  concluded. 
“The  Coma- Virgo  system  of 
galaxies,  for  one  example.  But 
these  are  the  ones  politically 
important  at  this  time.  In  Sag- 
ittarius, we  have  a problem. 
There’s  a human  colony  there 
— a very  early  one,  as  a matter 
of  fact — which  we’re  sending 
an  envoy  to.  But  we  don’t 
know  what  sort  of  an  envoy 
they  are  expecting,  whether  he 
should  be  a technical  agrono- 
mist, a sociologist,  a radiation 
expert,  or  a plain  folksy  re- 
minder of  Earth,  or  what.  A 
simple  problem  really,  but  a 
mistake  will  cost  us  several 
billion  credits  to  correct.  So 
your  first  assignment,  under 
Pat’s  tuition,  will  be  to  find  out 


and  report.  When  you  get 
back,  you’ll  rank  officially  as  a 
Diver.  Rendezvous  is  over  the 
Peninsula,  above  San  Fran- 
cisco ; you  can’t  miss  it.  Take 
your  mind  there  before  you 
leave  and  come  back  there  on 
the  way  in.  Around  fifteen 
thousand  feet  is  the  recom- 
mended height,  but  that,  like 
your  mind,  is  immaterial,  if 
you’ll  pardon  the  pun.  And 
now  I suggest  you  go  down  to 
the  police  gym  and  take  some 
good  strong  exercise  so  that 
you  feel  properly  tired  for  the 
journey.” 

Dr.  Howard  Sprinnell  put 
his  hands  in  his  pockets  and 
gazed  at  his  polished  shoes. 

“I  don’t  quite  know  how  to 
say  this,  Fred,”  he  continued, 
“but  I’m  responsible  for  you 
Divers.  You’re  entitled  to  your 
own  forms  of  amusement,  of 
course,  but  please  remember 
you  are  being  watched  by  Psis. 
No  dropping  in  on  the  Presi- 
dent’s bedroom.  Other  people’s 
bedrooms,  all  right,  though  I 
trust  you’ll  keep  out  of  mine. 
But  do  nothing  that  could 
make  you  be  considered  a secu- 
rity risk.  That  is  the  only  thing 
that  would  worry  us.” 

Fred  Williams  assured  him 
and  left  the  hall  to  go  down  to 
the  police  gym.  He  did  not  un- 
derstand why  the  warning 
should  be  necessary.  On  the 
other  hand,  you  could  take  it 
as  a delicate  permission  to  do 
anything  that  was  not  a secu- 
rity risk.  He  passed  the  police 
canteen  and  restrained  himself 


32 


JAMES  STAMERS 


from  going  in  to  order  a 
doughnut  with  Martian  syrup. 
It  would  keep  him  from  Div- 
ing. 

He  rose  into  the  atmos- 
phere above  the  city  and 
headed  across  America  to  the 
rendezvous  above  the  West 
Coast.  The  Earth  spun  away 
from  beneath  him.  He  had 
time  to  be  surprised  that  in 
the  few  hours  back  on  Earth 
he  had  forgotten  the  unbur- 
dened clarity  of  mind  in  a 
Dive.  He  knew  who  he  was.  He 
was  unquestionably  Fred  Wil- 
liams up  here,  as  much  as  he 
was  Fred  Williams  down 
there.  But  here  he  felt  differ- 
ent, free,  while  down  there  he 
was  embedded  and  obscured  in 
a shell  of  a body.  Here,  this 
time,  his  vision  was  not  limited 
to  a forward  cone  but  extended 
in  a complete  sphere  around 
him. 

He  saw  the  large  nick  in  the 
coast  ahead  and  came  down  to 
meet  his  tutor  Diver. 

Pat  had  said  he  looked  like 
the  inside  of  an  egg,  but  he 
was  not  prepared  for  the  great 
ovoid  poised  there  below  him. 
He  came  up  to  her  with  a rush 
and  found  he  was  even  bigger 
by  comparison.  When  they 
touched,  he  heard  her  voice. 
There  was  a slight  resistance 
as  his  mind  met  hers  and  then 
she  slipped  inside  his,  so  that 
he  enclosed  her  mind  within 
his  ovoid  mind. 

‘‘One  of  the  disadvantages 
of  a Diver,'’  she  said  quietly 


within  him,  •‘is  that  we  can 
only  talk  to  each  other  by  con- 
tact. A Psi  could  see  our 
thoughts  radiating  out  like  an 
aurora,  but  we  can't.  We  trav- 
el this  way  when  two  Divers 
are  together,  which  isn't  often, 
so  that  we  both  think  of  going 
to  the  same  place.  If  we  do  get 
separated,  come  back  here  im- 
mediately and  we'll  start 
again." 

“Fine." 

''Please,  The  very  gentlest 
suggestion  of  vocalizing  will 
do.  That  was  like  a cannon." 

“Sorry." 

“Much  better.  Now,  gently, 
out.  Think  of  rising  slowly  . . , 
That's  right." 

They  rose  away  from  the 
Earth. 

“Over  there,"  she  prompted, 
“is  the  galactic  spiral  arm  we 
are  in.  See,  running  from 
Orion?  The  Solar  System  is 
out  here  on  a limb.  Over  here 
is  where  we're  going,  deep  into 
the  Galaxy,  our  own  galaxy. 
You'll  soon  pick  up  the  main 
roads.  See  that  fan-shaped 
arch?  That's  a T-Tauri  varia- 
ble, signposts  to  us.  Think  of 
being  just  off  that  one  now." 

He  did — and  there  they 
were,  in  a dark  lane  of  the 
Milky  Way. 

“Now  you  can  imagine  what 
would  happen  if  we  were  mov- 
ing separately  and  turned  our 
minds  to  different  points.  You 
have  to  go  back  and  start 
again  then.  Now,  we're  going 
down  this  dark  lane." 

They  moved  through  the 

33 


THE  DIVERS 


splendor  of  the  Milky  Way, 
through  vast  lanes  of  fine  dark 
nebulae,  across  a giant  rift, 
past  glowing  clouds  of  hydro- 
gen and  oxygen  and  bright  ex- 
panding shells,  rings  within 
rings,  flowing  out  from  intense 
stars  in  their  center  as  if  the 
star  were  a pebble  dropped  in 
a pond  of  burning  space,  the 
planetary  nebulae. 

The  Sagittarian  region  was 
well  known  to  Pat  and  she 
commented  on  the  Lagoon,  and 
Omega  and  Trifid  Nebula  sus- 
pended around  them.  The  local 
system  they  sought  lay  off  a 
loose  globular  star  cluster,  one 
of  a crowd  here  deep  in  toward 
the  center  of  the  Galaxy,  the 
bright  core  around  which  the 
spiral  arms  of  the  entire  Milky 
Way  ponderously  swung. 

He  was  part  engrossed  in 
the  technique  of  moving  his 
mind,  part  awed  by  the  variety 
and  beauty  of  the  Galaxy,  and 
part  lost  in  the  beauty  of  the 
mind  within  him.  She  moved 
with  deft,  clear  thought  like 
the  chime  of  crystals.  The  sen- 
sory images  of  Earth  were 
gross  and  distorted  projections 
of  the  way  he  saw  her,  but  she 
was  at  once  the  beating 
rhythm  beneath  rock-and-roll 
and  the  abstracted  clarity  of 
Chopin,  the  summer  wind  and 
the  warmth  of  a wine.  He  held 
her  mind  within  his  in  a new 
union  so  complete  that  any- 
thing else  was  mere  fumbling. 

“Thank  you,”  he  heard  her 
voice  say  gently,  and  they  sank 
down  toward  the  rings  of 

34 


small  planets  they  had  come  to 
visit. 

A COLONY  from  Earth  im- 
plied an  atmosphere,  and 
several  planets  in  the  group 
indeed  looked  fuzzy.  The  two 
Divers  skimmed  rapidly  from 
one  to  another  in  a general 
survey,  selected  the  largest  of 
those  which  might  support 
man,  and  sank  down  through 
its  belts  of  radiation. 

The  central  mass  of  land  lay 
beneath  thin  clouds,  through 
which  the  local  sun  shone  in 
drifting  spotlights  over  the 
cultivated  areas  and  irregular 
groups  of  cities. 

“When  we  get  closer,”  her 
voice  said,  “you’ll  see  them 
walking  about  inside  their 
minds,  which  to  us  will  be 
cloudy  colored  eggs  around 
them.  They  cannot  see  this,  of 
course,  any  more  than  a non- 
Psi  or  we  ourselves  on  Earth. 
If  it  isn’t  obvious  what  they 
are  thinking,  we’ll  have  to  go 
close  enough  to  touch  their 
minds  with  ours.  But  be  very 
careful  before  you  do  that.  If 
they  are  very  empty-minded, 
there  is  a risk  that  their  body 
magnetism  will  polarize  your 
mind  in  temporarily.  You  can 
get  out  again,  but  it’s  messy 
and  unpleasant  while  it  lasts. 
And  it’s  almost  impossible  to 
avoid  being  sucked  into  a me- 
dium’s mind,  so  I hope  they 
haven’t  got  any.” 

They  were  now  over  the 
main  city  and  headed  toward 
a large  domed  building,  appar- 


JAMES  STAMERS 


ently  modeled  on  the  Capitol. 

“How  did  they  get  here  ?”  he 
^skcd 

“We  don’t  really  know.  The 
contacts  so  far  have  been  by 
radio  to  a very  early  investi- 
gating fleet.  Obviously  they 
must  have  come  out  after  the 
hyper-space  drive  was  invent- 
ed— we’re  over  twenty  thou- 
sand light-years  from  Earth, 
here,  I’m  told — but  they  don’t 
seem  to  realize  the  difficulties 
of  sending  them  the  envoy  they 
asked  for.  Assuming  these  are 
the  people  that  wanted  one.” 

“Look,  an  old  landcar — 
down  there  on  the  street!”  he 
exclaimed. 

The  colony  apparently  still 
used  ground  vehicles.  As  they 
came  closer,  they  could  see  peo- 
ple walking  in  the  streets  and 
moving  in  and  out  of  door- 
ways. There  were  no  moving 
sidewalks,  personal  vertijets, 
anti-gravs.  It  was  cleaner  but 
otherwise  as  old-fashioned  as 
the  quarter  in  which  Fred 
Williams  lived  on  Earth. 

“Imagine  coming  so  far — to 
find  this,”  he  said,  disappoint- 
ed. 

“You’ll  find  colonies  are 
usually  several  generations  be- 
hind, but  let’s  not  be  too 
hasty,”  she  said.  “We  can  have 
a look  around  later.  First,  let’s 
see  if  we  have  the  right  planet 
and  get  this  envoy  matter  out 
of  the  way.  Down  through  the 
dome,  here.” 

They  passed  through  the 
weather  sheathing  and  curved 
girders  of  the  dome  into  an 

THE  DIVERS 


assembly  hall  full  of  human 
beings,  seated  around  a central 
dais.  The  colonists  had  appar- 
ently been  inspired  by  Con- 
gress. A quick  glance  at  their 
minds  showed  they  were  poli- 
ticians, no  better  and  no  worse 
than  the  Earth  variety,  intent 
on  compromise  and  the  ex- 
change of  benefits  between  the 
groups  of  interests  they  seem- 
ed to  represent.  Several  car- 
ried visibly  in  their  minds  one 
fixed  interest  and  a quick 
count  showed  that  agriculture 
was,  in  one  form  or  another, 
the  main  business  of  the  col- 
ony. 

“I  think  that  answers  it,” 
she  said.  “We’ll  have  to  check 
on  the  other  planets,  but  farm 
problems  seem  to  be  what 
they’re  most  concerned  about.” 

He  felt  dissatisfied.  “Should- 
n’t we  touch  one  of  their  minds 
to  see  if  this  is  really  the  polit- 
ical center?  It  may  only  be  a 
village  meeting.” 

It  seemed  incongruous  to 
use  the  wonderful  reach  of 
Diving  to  gather  little  facts 
like  this  and  to  depart  know- 
ing nothing  else.  Then  again, 
he  recalled  the  doctor  describ- 
ing it  as  a simple  problem. 

He  felt  her  mind  move  un- 
derstandingly  within  his.  “All 
right,  let’s  touch  the  Speaker 
and  see  how  far  his  authority 
goes.  He’d  be  very  conscious  of 
a superior  Congress  if  there  is 
one.” 

They  moved  together  to  the 
dais  and  brushed  against  the 
Speaker’s  mind.  The  short, 

35 


bald  man  sitting  impressively 
in  the  center*  of  the  bubble  im- 
mediately leaned  forward  and 
banged  his  gavel.  The  entire 
assembly  rose  to  their  feet  and 
stood  still.  The  Speaker  slouch- 
ed in  his  chair.  His  mind  shook 
off  the  influences  of  his  body 
and  rose  up  to  touch  the  two  of 
them. 

“Welcome,  at  last,”  he  said. 

“You  have  been  expecting 
us?” 

“Of  course.  Though  why  do 
you  say  ‘us’?” 

They  moved  partly  from 
each  other,  overlapping  only  at 
the  extreme  limit  of  their  own 
minds,  so  that  he  could  see 
there  were  two  of  them  to- 
gether. 

A gasp  sounded  in  the 
Speaker’s  mind  like  an  echo 
and  there  was  a movement 
throughout  the  assembly. 

“Can  they  hear  us?”  Pat 
asked. 

“Naturally.  Psi  capacity  is 
a minimum  requirement  for 
the  Senate.  Can’t  you  hear 
us?” 

“Only  by  mental  contact.” 

“How  odd,”  the  Speaker  re- 
plied. “Still,  we  ourselves  can- 
not merge  in  each  other,  only 
into  housings.” 

“Housings?” 

“But  surely  ...  You  must 
know.  Of  course  you  must.” 

“Pm  afraid  we  don’t.” 

“For  heaven’s  sake,  what 
part  of  the  Solar  System  do 
you  come  from  that  you 
don’t  know  a housing  when 
you  see  one?  Ganymede,  Mer- 

36 


cury,  Jove,  Venus,  Bacchus? 
Although  I was  under  the  im- 
pression that  the  entire  system 
used  the  same  terms.” 

“One  moment,”  Fred  said. 
“What  system  are  you  talking 
about?” 

“This  system  here,  natural- 
ly.” 

“We  come  from  a different 
part  of  the  Galaxy,  a part  that 
is  called  the  Solar  System  by 
those  who  live  there.” 

There  was  a multiple  rus- 
tling of  thoughts  which  dis- 
turbed the  Speaker  momen- 
tarily. 

“Please,  gentlemen,  please! 
Will  every  Senator  please  quit 
his  housing  so  that  we  have 
less  of  these  physical  interrup- 
tions ?” 

Every  member  of  the  as- 
sembly sat  down,  relaxed 
his  body  and  rose  gently  above 
it  with  a clear  and  uncluttered 
mind. 

“Thank  you.  Senators,”  the 
Speaker  said.  “Now.  Do  we 
understand  that  you  come 
from  some  other  part  of  our 
galaxy  ?” 

“Yes,”  Pat  said.  “We  call  it 
the  Milky  Way.” 

“So  do  we.” 

“You  probably  brought  the 
name  with  you.” 

“You  are  suggesting  that  we 
came  from  you  and  brought 
the  name  of  the  Galaxy  with 
us?” 

“Why,  yes.” 

“I  see.  Would  you  identify 
this  solar  system  of  yours?” 

JAMES  STAMERS 


Pat  held  in  her  mind  a pic- 
ture of  the  Solar  System  and 
the  Sun,  embedded  in  the  long 
spiral  arm  of  the  Galaxy.  She 
made  the  image  of  the  Earth 
expand  and  contract  in  empha- 
sis. 

“Thank  you.  So  you  come 
from  that  little  system,  do 
you  ? How  interesting.  And  yet 
you  have  never  heard  of  hous- 
ings.” 

“We  call  them  bodies." 

“Well,  so  they  are.  I recall  a 
primitive  energy  transmis- 
sion we  had  here  long  ago.  We 
extended  an  invitation  to  the 
operators,  but  they  have  not  so 
far  arrived.  They  came  from 
your  system,  or  so  they  said.” 

“They  did.  They  contacted 
you  by  what  we  call  radio.  We 
were  sent,  frankly,  to  see  what 
sort  of  envoy  should  be  sent 
here  to  you.” 

“Ah ! There  has  been  a nat- 
ural confusion.  We  thought 
you  were  here  from  one  of  our 
outer  systems  where  we  are 
having  some  difficulty  raising 
the  right  housing.  In  fact,  we 
were  just  debating  the  correct 
form  of  grain  to  transmit  to 
feed  the  housings  on.  They  are 
in  the  awkward  stage  of  hav- 
ing sufficient  minds  to  exist, 
but  insufficient  nerve  cortex  to 
enable  us  to  enter  them.  Our 
local  represenatives  — whom 
we  mistook  you  for  — have 
been  having  a very  difficult 
time  for  several  hundred 
years,  but  we  will  soon  find 
the  answer.  Now,  we  will  be 
glad  to  receive  an  envoy  from 

THE  DIVERS 


ybur  system.  We  are  always 
glad  to  receive  representatives 
from  our  successful  colonies. 
As  to  the  type  of  envoy,  any- 
one with  a broad  galactic  view- 
point will  do.  We  will,  of 
course,  be  glad  to  offer  housing 
and  the  usual  facilities.” 
“When  you  say  housing,  you 
mean  bodies?” 

“Naturally.  Bodies  such  as 
these  Senators’  or  my  own 
are  the  most  adaptable  for 
this  climate.  If  you  go  in  to 
our  Ganymede  or  out  to  Jove 
you  would  have  to  use  a local — 
er — body,  because  these  hu- 
man types  would  melt  or  suffo- 
cate respectively.  But  the  local 
housings  in  silica  and  in  am- 
monia crystal  have  proved 
quite  adequate  for  normal  loco- 
motion and  physical  work 
there.  The  normal  facilities  of 
the  sport  planets  would  be 
available,  to  be  sure.  We  are 
quite  proud  of  our  slither 
bodies,  I suppose  you  would 
call  them,  in  the  snow  worlds 
— quite  a recent  development. 
I fear  we  are  not  too  luxurious 
here,  but  galactic  opinion 
forces  us  to  make  our  housings 
do  almost  everything  they  are 
capable  of  doing — ^walk,  drive, 
cook  and  other  such  menial 
tasks.  But  then  at  least  every- 
one knows  we  are  not  spending 
the  revenue  on  our  own  hous- 
ing— er — our  own  bodies.  Only 
last  century  we  barely  averted 
a political  threat  to  make  all 
Senators’  bodies  sleep  out  in 
the  open  weather.  But  obvious- 
ly it  is  much  moi’e  expensive 

37 


to  keep  breeding  new  bodies 
than  build  a shelter  such  as 
this  one.  Even  taxpayers  can 
see  that.” 

The  Speaker’s  mind  echoed 
general  agreement  from  the 
Senators. 

“It  will  come  as  a surprise,” 
Pat  said  clearly,  “but  our  sys- 
tem believes  we  colonized 
yours.” 

This  met  polite  and  general 
laughter  in  which  the  Speaker 
joined. 

“Perhaps,”  he  said,  “you 
would  care  to  communicate  di- 
rect with  the  Senators  who 
were  in  charge  of  your  system 
during  the  developmental 
stages.  Will  the  Senators 
please  come  forward  for  con- 
tact?” 

Seven  of  the  minds  above 
the  floor  of  the  Senate  drifted 
over  to  touch  peripherally 
against  each  other  and  against 
Pat  and  Ered. 

“When  we  first  undertook 
that  project,”  one  or  all  of 
them  said,  “your  system  was 
entirely  unpopulated.  On  the 
third  planet,  we  found,  how- 
ever, roughly  humanoid  apes 
in  isolated  caves  and  by  selec- 
tive breeding  we  succeeded  in 
making  that  species  into  a 
housing  identical  with  those 
we  use  on  this  planet.  Unfor- 
tunately, only  the  less  stable 
minds  of  the  Galaxy  were 
prepared  to  live  quite  so  far 
out  and  we  eventually  lost 
touch.  Is  the  same  housing 
still  used?” 

“So  much  so,”  Pat  told 
38 


them,  “that  we  cannot  nor- 
mally detach  ourselves.” 

“You  mean  you  send  bodies 
from  place  to  place?” 

“Yes.  The  radio  signals  you 
received  were  from  a space- 
ship containg  men  in  their 
own  bodies.” 

“Remarkable.  Naturally, 
we  accept  your  statement. 
But  this  implies  considerable 
technical  skill — and  a prodig- 
ious disregard  for  the  taxpay- 
ers’ money.  You  mean  there 
were  actually  men  out  there 
in  bodies  sending  energy 
transmissions,  instead  of  vis- 
iting us  in  the  mind  from 
Earth?” 

“Yes.” 

“Remarkable.  Very  remark- 
able. Can  you  spare  the  time 
to  tell  us  more  about  this? 
We  can  accommodate  you 
with  a double  housing  or  sep- 
arate housing,  whichever  you 
prefer.” 

“May  I withdraw  to  consult 
with  my  colleague?”  Pat  ask- 
ed. 

“Of  course.  We  will  continue 
our  debate.” 

The  Senators  returned  to 
their  forms  and  the  Speaker, 
sinking  back  into  his  body, 
recalled  the  assembly  to  their 
discussion  of  agricultural 
problems. 

OVER  the  dome,  Pat  slipped 
inside  Fred  Williams’ 
mind  again.  They  thought  of 
the  enormous  space-ships  de- 
veloped over  many  centuries 
and  at  uncounted  cost  to  give 

JAMES  STAMERS 


men  favorable  odds  in  an  un- 
favorable environment.  And 
of  the  hazardous  shifting  of 
power  based  on  bomb-satel- 
lites, and  the  fence  upon  fence 
of  security  precautions  on 
which  Earth  and  the  Solar 
System  depended.  Or  rather, 
when  they  considered  it,  on 
which  their  local  population 
depended.  It  was  not  a prob- 
lem for  two  Divers  but  for  a 
team  of  specialists. 

They  returned  to  the 
Speaker. 

“We  would  like  to  consult 
with  the  original  Earth  Sen- 
ators again  and  perhaps  bor- 
row two  — housings  — for  a 
a short  while.” 

“With  the  greatest  pleas- 
ure.” 

The  Senators  concerned 
quitted  their  housings  and 
floated  across  the  assembly  to 
join  them.  They  all  rose  to- 
gether to  the  outside  of  the 
dome,  where  they  would  not 
disturb  the  debate  below. 

“One  of  the  questions,” 
Fred  said,  “is  what  happens 
if  we  died — ^by  accident,  for 
example — ^while  in  a borrow- 
ed housing.” 

“You  imply  a question  as 
to  what  happens  to  any  of 
your  people,  since  they  have 
lost  the  power  to  detach  them- 
selves, or  do  not  make  use  of 
it.” 

“Yes.” 

“Unfortunately,”  one  or  all 
of  the  Senators  replied,  “we  do 
not  know.  It  is  said  there  is 
a continual  production  of  new 


minds  in  the  universe,  which 
appear  here  and  there,  where- 
ever  there  are  suitable  hous- 
ings. Others  disagree  but  have 
no  real  answer.  If  we  lend  you 
housing  — a panther-style 
body  for  personal  racing  on 
the  grass  steppes,  say,  or  a 
vast  whale-style  body  for  en- 
joying some  of  our  oceans, 
and  so  on,  there  is  some  risk. 
Among  certain  cultures,  we 
find  a return  of  the  mind  to  a 
similar  vacant  housing.  In 
other  places,  we  have  found 
an  obscuration  of  the  mind. 
We  think  there  are  parallel 
universes  differing  from  this 
as  mind-form  differs  from 
substance.  And  we  believe 
each  mind  continues  in  these 
further  dimensions.  This 
would  be  practical  if  you  were 
unable  to  leave  a dying  hous- 
ing. Our  advice  is  not  to  get 
caught  in  any  accidents. 

“Should  it  be  advantageous 
to  you,  we  will  keep  housings 
ready  for  you  here.  One  male 
and  one  female,  of  course.  Ah 
— on  one  question  which  you 
did  not  ask — you  will  find  our 
guest  housings  are  a uniform 
breed  which  became  popular 
on  your  Planet  among  the 
Greeks  and  Romans  as  ideal 
godlike  forms,  shortly  before 
we  returned  here. 

“And  as  to  the  other  ques- 
tion you  have  not  asked — ^we 
never  interfere  with  local  cul- 
tures, for  the  greater  the  va- 
riety of  each,  the  greater  the 
enrichment  of  all.  Your  sys- 
tem is  entirely  safe;  we  pro- 

39 


THE  DIVERS 


pose  to  observe  it  more  closely 
from  now  on.  It  is  our  im- 
pression, however,  that  you 
would  be  wise  not  to  mention 
the  galactic  system  we  rep- 
resent, when  you  return  to 
your  Earth.  It  would  be  too 
upsetting  to  the  established 
pattern.  We  are  all  human 
beings,  but  we  have  solved 
the  same  problems  in  very  dif- 
ferent ways.” 

“We  have  not  solved  ours,” 
Fred  said. 

“Oh,  neither  have  we.  But 
at  least  the  few  of  us  here, 
including  yourselves,  at  any 
time  as  our  guests,  have 
achieved  what  you  would 
probably  call  immortality.” 

“We  are  free  to  accept  your 
invitation  at  any  time?” 

“Certainly.” 

“Then  we  will  report  that 
no  other  envoy  is  needed,” 
Pat  said  clearly. 

“That  would  be  beneficial 
indeed.” 

“And  may  we  send  you 
a very  limited  number  of 
friends?” 

“Your  guests  shall  be  our 
guests.  Again,  we  suggest  you 
limit  knowledge  of  us  so  far 
as  possible.” 

“We  are  called  Divers  be- 
cause we  can  leave  our  bodies. 
Only  Divers  could  visit  you 
in  this  way,  and  we  will  not 
send  any  others.” 

“Thank  you.  It  is  largely 
our  fault.  We  have  come 
across  traces  here  and  there 
of  other  colonies  which  we  as- 
sumed were  the  successful  re- 

40 


suit  of  past  experiments.  It 
occurs  to  us  now  that  several 
of  these  may  be  in  fact  body- 
bound  expeditions  from  your 
solar  system.  We  will  investi- 
gate and  correct  our  cata- 
logues.” 

“We  can  be  of  assistance 
there,”  Pat  answered. 

“Excellent.  We  wish  you 
Godspeed  and  a pleasant  re- 
turn.” 

The  nine  minds  released 
contact  and  moved  apart. 
Fred  felt  Pat’s  mind  slip  into 
his.  They  rose  off  the  dome 
and  increased  speed,  soaring 
into  the  sky  and  out,  above 
the  ring  of  planets. 

“Why  didn’t  we  borrow  a 
couple  of  bodies?”  Fred  asked. 

He  could  picture  himself 
strutting  elegantly  in  the  body 
of  a Greek  god,  with  Pat  to 
match  beside  him. 

“Please  stop  that  — we’re 
zigzagging  about.  You’re  new, 
Fred.  Every  Diver  goes 
through  the  same  routine — a 
pep-talk  from  the  President, 
Doctor  Sprinnell’s  little  tricks, 
your  first  Dive  all  over  the 
universe,  and  then  routine 
patrols.  What  you  don’t  know 
is  that  whenever  we  Divers 
come  into  contact  with  anoth- 
er race  or  another  form  of 
life,  we  are  invariably  offered 
gifts  of  some  sort.  Primitives 
sense  the  presence  of  a Diver 
and  put  on  a show,  lay  out 
food  and  their  treasures.  The 
more  advanced,  using  trained 
telepaths,  try  to  bribe  us. 

JAMES  STAMERS 


And  so  on,  without  exception.” 
“Okay,  so  I’m  new,  Pat.  So 
I don’t  know  the  pattern.  A 
few  days  ago  I was  a slob  in 
an  automation-parts  supply 
house  and  now  I’m  here  with 
you  at  the  back  end  of  the 
Milky  Way,  or  the  center, 
whichever  way  you  look  at  it. 
But  Doc  Spinner  made  some 
pretty  odd  cracks  to  me  about 
security  and  I don’t  like  the 
idea  of  being  spied  on  all  the 
time  back  on  Earth.” 

“No  Diver  does.  The  De- 
fense Council  put  us  in  bus- 
iness, but  now  they  are  afraid 
of  us,  in  a way.  We  can  go 
anywhere  and  see  anything. 
We  might  have  a look  at  their 
secret  installations  or  their 
private  files.  Then  we  would 
be  in  trouble.” 

“Well,  I didn’t  ask  to  come 
into  this.  But  now  that  I’m 
in  and  a Diver,  just  one  fancy 
move  by  Security  and  I’m  off 
to  get  another  body.  That 
sounds  odd,  doesn’t  it?  But  I 
mean  it.” 

“I’m  glad.” 

“Eh?” 

“I’m  very  glad,  Fred.  I 
wanted  to  see  how  you’d  take 
it.  I feel  the  same  way.  It’s 
true  we’re  always  offered 
presents,  but  immortality  is 
something  larger  than  a pres- 
ent. And  to  get  out  from 
under  the  thumb  of  the  Psis 
and  their  spying  is  something 
all  of  us  have  been  longing 
for.” 

“And  I’ll  tell  you  something 
else,  Pat.  From  now  on,  if  the 

THE  DIVERS 


other  Divers  agree,  we’ll  do 
what  we  want.  Oh,  the  Solar 
System  can  have  its  patrol- 
ling. I’ll  have  to  learn  how 
that’s  done  from  you.  We’ll 
tell  them  what  they  want  to 
know.  But  one  sign  of  inter- 
ference and  we’re  off,  and 
they  can  keep  the  bodies.  We 
won’t  tell  them  they  are  a 
backward  colony  that  has  for- 
gotten how  to  Dive.  But  we 
know  it.  We  won’t  tell  them 
the  rest  of  the  Galaxy  is  run 
from  the  center  back  in  Sag- 
ittarius by  humans  who  can 
Dive.  But  we  know  that  too. 
If  I thought  at  all  about  it,  I 
thought  we  were  freaks,  use- 
ful nuisances.  And  I didn’t 
mind  being  ordered  about.  But 
we’re  not  freaks,  Pat.  We’re 
the  normal  human  beings  that 
the  Senate  back  there  meant 
to  create.  It’s  the  Solar  Sys- 
tem that  is  lop-sided,  not  us.” 

“I’m  not  — overinfluencing 
you,  Fred?” 

“Hell,  of  course  you  are.  I 
can  hardly  think  of  you  with- 
out looping  around  a star. 
But  the  facts  are  the  same. 
And  from  today,  we’re  not 
Divers.  We’re  the  Free  Di- 
vers, housing  where  we  wish 
to,  seeing  what  we  want . . .” 

“And  protecting  the  Solar 
System,  Fred.” 

“Well — they’re  entitled  to 
that.  And  we’ll  keep  to  their 
security  regulations  for  our 
bodies  on  Earth,  if  it  makes 
them  happy.  We  can  afford 
to  give  a little  here  and 
there.” 


41 


They  shot  together  through 
the  nearest  T-Tauri  variable 
arch  and  zoomed  happily. 
After  a while,  they  returned 
to  the  rendezvous  off  the 
American  coast  on  Earth.  The 
other  Divei’s  were  waiting  for 
them. 

“It’s  a custom,’’  Pat  told 
him  as  they  approached  the 
nine  Divers,  hovering  in 
space,  “to  greet  you  as  a new 
Diver.” 

They  closed  together  as 
they  met,  within  Fred’s  larger 
shell.  He  told  them.  There 
were  no  doubts  among  their 
minds. 

“Sooner  or  later,”  Fred 
finished,  “one  of  us  was 
bound  to  meet  the  true  Galac- 
tics  we’ve  just  met.  It  hap- 
pened to  be  Pat  and  myself. 
I’m  new  and  don’t  know  much 
about  Diving,  but  I’ve  seen 
enough  to  know  that  from 
now  on  I’m  a Free  Diver.” 

“So  are  we  all,”  they  an- 
swered. 

Returning  across  Amer- 
ica in  the  one  shell,  they 
scattered  confusion  and  head- 
ache throughout  the  psi- 
watching  stations  in  their 
path  by  the  scramble  of  elev- 
en sets  of  thoughts.  Then  they 
separated  and  left  Fred  to  go 
down  to  his  body  while  they 
returned  to  theirs  in  the  dif- 
ferent places  Security  had  put 
them.  Pat  followed  him  down 
as  a precaution. 

This  time,  Fred  Williams’ 
body  fitted  his  mind  with  a 

42 


greater  feeling  of  strangeness 
but  less  muddling.  The  smal- 
ler consciousnesses  of  his 
body  did  not  obscure  his  per- 
ceptions; he  was  aware  of  it 
as  a housing  for  his  mind. 

He  looked  at  Dr.  Howard 
Sprinnell,  who  had  listened  to 
him  so  far  in  silence,  uncom- 
menting and  unmoved,  a mild, 
friendly  face  in  the  small 
medical  room. 

“So,  Fred.  I warned  you, 
Pat  warned  you.  You  go  out 
on  two  Dives,  a few  days  after 
discovering  that  such  things 
exist,  and  you  come  back  to 
give  me  an  ultimatum  for  the 
Solar  Government.  A lifetime 
here  in  the  drabbest,  almost 
medieval  surroundings  of  the 
city  and,  after  a few  days,  you 
come  back  announcing  you’re 
a Free  Diver,  owing  nothing 
to  anyone.  Is  that  right?  Do 
you  still  stick  to  that?” 

Fred  nodded. 

“You  realize  what  we  can 
do  to  you,  Fred?  Dammit,  on 
your  first  Dive  you  almost 
went  out  of  space-time  alto- 
gether, only  you  didn’t  know 
what  you  were  doing.  Do  you 
know  what  you’re  doing  now  ? 
Do  you  think  I’ve  spent  twen- 
ty years  searching  for  nega- 
tive Psis  for  government  ser- 
vice so  that  you  can  turn  them 
against  the  Solar  System?” 

“Hold  on.  Doc.  No  one  said 
anything  about  being  against 
the  Solar  System.  If  there’s 
work  to  be  done,  we’ll  do  it. 
But  in  our  own  way  and  with- 
out being  spied  on.” 

JAMES  STAMERS 


“Just  give  me  one  reason 
why  the  government  should 
trust  you,  with  the  entire  Se- 
curity system.” 

“Because,”  Fred  said  care- 
fully, “you  may  have  my  body, 
but  in  my  mind  I am  a Free 
Diver.” 

“And  nothing  anyone  can 
say  will  change  that,  eh?” 
“No.” 

“You  know,”  Dr.  Howard 
Sprinnell  said  reflectively, 
“you’re  talking  as  if  you  had 
another  body  cached  away 
somewhere.” 

“Whoever  heard  of  that?” 
“Lots  of  people,  Fred.  Voo- 
doo zombies,  certain  Mahay- 
ana  religious  leaders,  prehis- 
toric Egyptians — there’s  quite 
a well  documented  tradition. 
But  the  great  problem  has  al- 
ways been  to  find  a leader 
with  the  courage  to  do  it  sci- 
entifically and  in  the  inter- 
ests of  all  the  people,  not  just 
the  members  of  some  sect. 
Give  a man  the  universe  to 
play  in  and  he  doesn’t  mind 
a few  rules  as  long  as  he’s 
allowed  to  play.  Finding  neg- 
ative Psis  and  creating  th^e 
Divers  as  an  organized  official 
body  was  easy  compared  with 
the  task  of  completing  the  ex- 
periment— by  making  one  of 
them  revolt!  Nine  of  the  ten 
before  you  were  too  easily  sat- 
isfied. Diving  according  to  the 
rules  and  regulations  was 
enough  for  them.” 

“Who  was  the  tenth?” 

“Pat,  She  was  the  prettiest 
and  most  discontented.  I 


thought  I could  stir  up  some 
fire.” 

“You  did.” 

“Ah,  good.  I am  high-Psi, 
by  the  way.  I seem  to  feel 
she’s  somewhere  around  here. 
However  ...  I can  never  be  a 
Diver  myself,  but  years  ago 
I formed  the  theory  that  a lot 
of  phenomena  could  be  ex- 
plained by  minds  reaching  out 
beyond  their  bodies.  Now  be 
careful,  Fred.  I don’t  want  to 
know.  The  Security  Psis  are 
very  real  and  there  are  a lot 
of  things  I cannot  afford  to 
know.  I’m  a Solar  Govern- 
ment servant,  remember.  But 
it  seemed  to  me  there  might 
conceivably  be  a life-form 
somewhere  in  the  universe 
which  used  the  body  as  a ve- 
hicle for  its  convenience.  I 
hoped  one  day  the  Divers 
would  find  such  a life-form, 
and  if  I made  the  regulations 
stiff  enough  and  supplied  one 
or  two  other  irritations,  one 
Diver  might  decide  to  make 
the  jump,  to  revolt  and  stand 
on  his  own  feet.  Free  Divers, 
you  called  yourselves,  eh?  A 
good  name.  I don’t  want  to 
know  \^here  your  base — your 
other  base — is,  Fred.  I only 
want  to  know  there  is  a group 
of  people  willing  to  serve  the 
Solar  Government  regardless 
of  time,  theoretically  for  eter- 
nity— that’s  what  it  amounts 
to  when  you  work  it  out.  As 
I say.  I’m  just  a government 
servant.  And  thanks.  Free 
Diver.” 

He  held  out  his  hand  and 

43 


THE  DIVERS 


shook  Fred's.  “From  now  on, 
Fred,  you  can  all  come  and  go 
as  you  wish.  If  you  feel  like 
keeping  to  the  security  regu- 
lations, fine.  But  I’ll  make  it 
clear  to  the  Defense  Council 
that  there’s  nothing  they  can 
do  about  it  if  you  don’t.  Men 
who  don’t  mind  losing  their 
bodies  have  always  been  some- 
what beyond  the  power  of  a 
government.’’ 

“On  that  basis,  Doc,  I don’t 
mind  continuing  the  way  you 
planned.’’ 

“Laryngeal  transmitter, 
continue  your  cover-job  and 
the  rest?” 

“Don’t  see  why  not.” 

“Come  along  then.  You’re 
due  to  be  released  from  jail.” 

Fred  followed  the  doctor  in- 
to the  operating  room. 

He  remembered  the 

beer  this  time.  Elsie  lay 
back  on  her  bed,  drinking 
from  the  can,  one  of  her  scuffs 
dangling  from  a bare  toe. 

“The  trouble  with  you, 
Fred,  is  you  can’t  even  rob  an 
office.” 

“I  didn’t.” 

“That’s  what  I mean.  See? 
You  just  can’t  do  anything.” 
He  lay  back  on  his  own  ted 
and  looked  at  her.  There  were 
a lot  of  things  you  didn’t  mind 


putting  up  with,  voluntarily. 
You  married  her,  so  you’d 
look  after  her,  trudge  to  the 
shipping  room  to  work  and 
trudge  back.  The  tireder  you 
got,  the  better. 

For  evening  came  every 
day,  and  with  the  evening 
came  sleep  for  his  housing 
and  eight  hours  for  patrolling 
the  Galaxy.  And  beyond  the 
system,  out  beyond  the  dark 
lanes,  there  were  endless 
fonns  of  life  . . . and  the  two 
great  developments  of  men, 
one  stemming  from  the  other 
in  different  ways,  but  each  ex- 
panding, colonizing,  growing 
. . . all  with  problems  for  the 
Free  Divers  he  led. 

“Wouldja  get  me  another 
beer,  Fred?” 

“Sure.” 

He  remembered  to  slouch 
into  the  kitchen,  as  if  he  did 
not  care.  And  when  you  con- 
sidered it,  he  didn’t  care  at 
all.  This  was  one  path  of  hu- 
man developments  the  Sen- 
ators never  thought  of. 

“Trouble  with  you,  Fred,  is 
you’re  just  a negative  char- 
acter. You  weren’t  when  I 
married  you,  but  you  are 
now.” 

Well,  she  was  certainly  en- 
titled to  a beer  for  that. 

END 


There  is  a way  to  do  this  better  . . . find  it. 

Thomas  A.  Edison 


Dissolute 

Diplomat 

By  BOB  SHAW  & WALT  WILLIS 

After  you  finish  this  story 

try  doing  a blurb 

that  does  not  give  away  the  point. 

It  can’t  be  done! 


GRINGLEDOONK  lay  in  a 
comfortable  floor  dish,  ex- 
perimenting with  himself  out 
of  sheer  boredom.  From  three 
points  along  his  perimeter  he 
projected  slim  pseudopods,  in- 


tertwined them  for  a short 
distance  in  the  center,  then 
split  the  end  of  each  in  two 
and  looped  them  out  to  form 
six  little  hooks. 

Listlessly  he  solidified  the 


45 


edifice  and  extruded  an  eye  to 
examine  it.  It  did  not  look  like 
much. 

There  were  several  races  in 
the  Federation  who  covered 
their  bodies  with  fabrics,  and 
this  thing  he  had  made  might 
have  been  useful  to  one  of 
them,  but  not  to  anybody  civi- 
lized. More  bored  than  ever,  he 
commenced  the  slow  process 
of  dissolving  the  hardened 
pseudopods. 

A low  whistle  came  from 
the  entrance  of  the  tubeway 
in  the  palace  wall.  The  little 
circular  door  opened  and 
Mugg,  his  Minister  of  Home 
Affairs,  shot  out  onto  the  floor. 
He  lay  for  a moment  in  the 
bullet  shape  that  Gyoinks  used 
for  traveling  the  tubeway ; 
then  he  re-formed  and  flowed 
into  the  floor  dish  beside  Grin- 
gledoonk. 

When  he  had  stopped  rip- 
pling, Mugg  extruded  an  eye 
and,  on  seeing  the  peculiar 
shape  his  ruler  had  assumed, 
kept  popping  out  more  and 
bigger  eyes  to  get  a better 
view.  Gringledoonk  watched 
the  process  with  disgust.  No 
matter  how  often  he  was  told 
about  it,  Mugg  never  seemed 
to  realize  how  ill-mannered 
such  displays  of  curiosity 
were. 

“What,”  Mugg  finally  en- 
quired, “have  you  done  to 
yourself.  Your  Softness?” 

“Never  mind  that,”  Grin- 
gledoonk said  irritably.  “Why 
did  you  come  here  ? You  know 
this  is  my  rest  period.” 

46 


“It's  important,”  Mugg  re- 
plied. “A  spaceship  on  normal 
drive  has  entered  the  system 
and  is  heading  for  this  plan- 
et.” 

For  an  instant  Gringle- 
doonk lost  the  cool  green  color- 
ing that  befitted  his  position 
and  allowed  his  natural  mot- 
tled orange  to  show  through. 
“What?  What  sort  of  a space- 
ship?” 

“It  appears  to  be  a Terran 
ship.  Your  Fluidity.” 

‘“The  Treaty  does  not  allow 
Terran  ships  to  land  here,” 
Gringledoonk  said.  “This  is 
most  unexpected.  We’ll  have 
to  check  the  libraries  on  how 
to  receive  the  officers  of  a Ter- 
ran ship.” 

He  moved  out  of  his  dish, 
balancing  the  still  rigid  tripod 
with  difficulty,  and  into  the 
entrance  port  of  the  tubeway. 
The  soft,  warm  radiance  there 
helped  him  dissolve  and  reab- 
sorb the  cumbersome  exten- 
sion, and  he  vanished  into  the 
narrow  aperture  of  the  tube- 
way. 

After  years  of  inactivity, 
Gringledoonk,  Lord  and  Rep- 
resentative of  the  Gyoinks, 
was  back  in  business. 

Hal  PORTMAN  was  hold- 
ing a moderate  800C 
when  his  warp-drive  genera- 
tors gave  a low  sigh  and  van- 
ished into  some  unknown  di- 
mension. The  ancient  Morris 
Starcruiser  emerged  into  nor- 
mal space  with  a sickening 
jiggle. 

BOB  SHAW  & WALT  WILLIS 


On  checking  his  position, 
Portman  found  that  there  was 
a planet  called  Yoink  so  close, 
astronomically  speaking,  that 
he  could  have  spat  on  it.  He 
tapped  out  Yoink's  coordi- 
nates on  his  destination  selec- 
tor and  began  drinking  beer 
in  preparation. 

Two  days  and  thirty-two 
cans  of  beer  later,  the  Star- 
cruiser  bulleted  down  for  a 
landing. 

Wiping  white  froth  from 
his  bristly  upper  lip,  Portman 
opened  the  lock  and  went 
down  onto  springy  yellow 
turf.  He  found  himself  sur- 
rounded by  a varicolored 
crowd  of  beings  of  indetermi- 
nate shape  who  chittered  at 
him  excitedly.  He  could  not 
decide  whether  their  agitation 
was  due  to  the  sudden  appear- 
ance of  his  ship  or  the  fact 
that  it  seemed  to  have  crush- 
ed a number  of  their  plastic 
buildings  on  arrival. 

He  drew  his  sidearm  and 
shouted,  “Silence,  friends.  I 
am  a citizen  of — uh — Imperi- 
al Earth  and  I command  your 
obedience.  I want — ” 

One  of  the  waist-high  cones 
of  jelly  interrupted  him  by 
sprouting  an  enormous  mouth 
and  bellowing  something  about 
violations  of  the  Treaty.  Port- 
man  gave  the  little  alien  a 
short  burst  from  his  Colt  .045 
which  reduced  it  to  a pile  of 
crackling  cinders. 

“You’re  only  saying  that  be- 
cause you’re  jellos,”  he  joked 
hastily,  feeling  that  it  might 

DISSOLUTE  DIPLOMAT 


be  better  to  pass  the  incident 
off.  The  directory  had  stated 
that  the  Gyoinks  were  non- 
aggressive,  but  there  was  no 
point  in  not  acting  in  a friend- 
ly manner.  He  knew  about  the 
Treaty,  but  the  cargo  of  con- 
traband luminous  furs  that  he 
had  tucked  away  would  have 
caused  unwelcome  comment 
if  he  had  waited  for  an  AA 
repair  ship. 

“Now  listen,  friends,”  he 
repeated,  brandishing  the 
weapon.  “We’ll  get  along  as 
long  as  nobody  argues  or  tries 
to  get  funny.  My  ship  has 
broken  down.  Replace  the 
warp  generators  and  I’ll  be 
on  my  way.’’ 

“Imperial  Earth  will  be 
grateful,”  he  added  as  an 
afterthought.  This  diplomacy 
stuff  was  a cinch  for  a guy 
who  knew  how  to  handle  peo- 
ple and  things. 

SEVERAL  of  the  Gyoinks 
immediately  extruded 
stumpy  legs  and  waddled  up 
the  ramp  into  the  ship.  Others 
went  off  toward  a larger  dome- 
shaped building,  muttering 
something  about  going  for 
tools. 

Portman  went  into  the  ship 
and  obtained  a further  supply 
of  beer,  booting  aside  any  of 
the  Gyoinks  who  got  in  his 
way,  then  lay  down  on  the 
bright  turf  and  contentedly 
watched  the  work  progress. 
In  spite  of  the  fact  that  the 
Gyoinks  were  just  animated 
trifles,  he  had  to  admit  that 

47 


they  were  pretty  good  space- 
drive  mechanics. 

Later  in  the  afternoon  as 
Portman  sat  on  the  ramp, 
smoking  under  the  brilliantly 
pink  sky,  a Gyoink  approached 
from  the  direction  of  the  town 
on  the  horizon.  This  was  a 
large,  pale  green  Gyoink  who 
looked  unfamiliar  to  Portman. 
^ “What  do  you  want?  You’re 
disturbing  a representative  of 
Imperial  Earth.” 

“I  know,  I know,”  the 
Gyoink  replied  humbly.  “My 
name  is  Gringledoonk.” 

“Anything  to  the  Boston 
Gringledoonks?”  Portman 
queried  genially. 

“No,”  Gringledoonk  said, 
wincing  slightly.  “I  come  to 
apologize  for  the  conduct  of 
my  people  earlier.  When  I 
heard  that  you  were  here,  I 
came  from  the  Capital  to  make 
sure  you  would  receive  the 
proper  attention  due  to  a rep- 
resentative of — ” 

“Yeah,  yeah,  I should  think 
so,”  Portman  cut  in.  “One  of 
those  jellos  argued  with  me  to- 
day. Argued ! How  do  you  like 
that  ?”  He  took  the  cigar  from 
between  his  thick  lips  and 
pursed  them  in  disapproval. 

“Most  regrettable,”  the 
Gyoink  agreed.  “I  can  assure 
you  there  will  be  no  more  such 
incidents.  My  people  are  igno- 
rant of  the  formalities  in- 
volved in  the  reception  of  the 
captain  of  a Terran  ship.  For- 
tunately, our  libraries  contain 
something  about  the  traditions 

48 


of  the  great  Earth  space  fleets 
and,  from  now  on,  we  will  ob- 
serve those  traditions  to  the 
best  of  our  limited  ability.” 
“That’s  more  like  it,”  Port- 
man  said. 

IT  HAD  been  necessary  to 
dismantle  the  ship’s  power 
plant  and,  as  the  Yoink  nights 
were  chilly  and  the  installa- 
tion of  the  new  generatora 
would  not  be  completed  until 
the  morning,  Portman  was 
moved  into  one  of  the  little 
plastic  huts  about  a mile  from 
the  ship.  He  found  that  the 
Gyoinks  had  rigged  up  a ham- 
mock, of  all  things,  but  it  took 
him  only  a short  while  to  find 
the  knack  of  sleeping  in  it. 

In  the  morning  he  was 
wakened  by  the  sound  of  bells 
and  the  insistent  prodding  of 
a Gyoink  who  was  proffering 
a glass  of  brown  liquid  on  a 
small  tray.  The  Gyoink’s  shiny 
surface  had  become  bright 
blue.  Portman  demanded  to 
know  what  was  going  on. 

“Eight  bells,  sir,”  the  Gy- 
oink replied.  “Your  breakfast 
is  ready.”  There  w^as  a note  of 
eager  sincerity  in  the  Gyoink’s 
voice. 

Portman  stretched  luxuri- 
ously in  the  hammock,  took 
the  glass  and  found  that  the 
Gyoinks  had  contrived  to  pro- 
duce a pretty  fair  rum.  Grin- 
ning with  satisfaction,  he  got 
up  and  lumbered  out  of  the 
hut,  stooping  to  get  through 
the  low  door. 

Outside,  a flat  open  convey- 
BOB  SHAW  & WALT  WILLIS 


ance  on  four  wheels,  manned 
by  two  more  blue  Gyoinks,  was 
waiting.  It  looked  brand  new 
and  had  lifebelts  slung  along 
the  sides. 

“The  Chief  Engineer  re- 
ports that  your  ship  is  ready, 
sir,”  one  of  the  Gyoinks  said. 
“Step  aboard  and  we  will  take 
you  to  it,  sir.  Aye,  aye,  sir.” 

Portman  got  into  the  car 
and  sat  down.  As  he  was  being 
driven  the  short  distance  to 
his  ship,  he  found  himself  al- 
most wishing  that  he  was  not 
leaving  so  soon.  Once  the  jellos 
had  come  to  understand  that 
he  was  the  boss,  they  had  been 
all  right,  in  spite  of  being  such 
ugly  brutes. 

When  they  arrived  at  the 
battered  old  Starcruiser,  Port- 
man  hardly  recognized  it.  Its 
hull  was  shining  with  a rich 
brassy  brilliance  in  the  morn- 
ing sunlight.  Gringledoonk 
was  waiting  for  him  on  a little 
platform  at  the  foot  of  the 
ramp  up  to  the  airlock.  Other 
bright  blue  Gyoinks  stood  in 
quivering  rows  nearby. 

“Good  morning,  sir,”  Grin- 
gledoonk said,  his  voice 
charged  with  friendliness.  “I 
hope  that  the  launch  we  con- 
structed for  you  was  comfort- 
able.” 

“The  launch?  Oh,  yeah — 
very  smooth.  One  of  the  jellos 
said  the  ship  was  ready.  Is 
it?”  Portman  stepped  out  onto 
the  platform. 

“Everything  is  shipshape, 
sir,”  the  Gyoink  said.  “We  are 
doing  our  humble  best  to  do 

DISSOLUTE  DIPLOMAT 


everything  in  accordance 
with — ” 

“Yeah,  I know.  Skip  all  that 
stuff.  As  long  as  the  new  gen- 
erators are  in.  I’ll  be  satis- 
fied.” 

“There’s  just  one  more 
thing,  sir,”  Gringledoonk  said. 
The  ranks  of  Gyoinks  moved 
aside,  revealing  a shallow  de- 
pression in  the  platform,  in 
the  center  of  which  was  a cir- 
cular hole  about  six  inches  in 
diameter.  From  under  the  de- 
pression a plastic  tube  led  up 
the  ramp  and  into  the  ship. 

“What,  what  ?”  Portman 
snarled. 

“We  only  use  this  for  long 
distances,  but  our  library — ” 

“Skip  it,”  Portman  said. 

He  pushed  Gringledoonk 
aside  and  headed  for  the 
bottom  of  the  ramp  across  the 
dish-shaped  hollow.  Too  late 
he  noticed  that  there  was  a 
peculiar  radiance  hovering 
above  the  depression,  coming 
from  little  translucent  panels 
around  its  perimeter.  He  tried 
to  retreat. 

But  his  bones  had  softened 
too  rapidly  and  indeed  his  feet 
were  already  flowing  out  of 
his  shoes  onto  the  floor,  to  be 
joined  by  what  had  been  his 
legs  and  the  remainder  of  his 
unwashed  body.  He  stopped 
screaming  as  his  head  com- 
pleted its  ^acious  descent, 
and  his  staring  eyes  remained 
visible  only  for  a moment,  si- 
lently surveying  the  surface 
of  the  great  blob  which  he  had 

49 


so  unaccountably  become.  It 
liquified  still  further  and  the 
mortal  remains  of  Harold 
Portman  ran  out  through  the 
hole  in  the  basin  with  a regret- 
tably undignified  noise.  The 
plastic  pipe  became  dark  and 
murky  as  he  passed  up  it  into 
his  ship. 


“Just  a matter  of  tradi- 
tion,” Gringledoonk  explained 
proudly  to  the  onlookers.  “Our 
records  are  incomplete  about 
Terran  space  fleet  tradition, 
but  they  all  agree  on  one  thing 
— the  Captain  is  always  piped 
on  board.” 

END 


The  Plastics  Revolution 

Within  the  memory  of  most  people  now  alive,  plastics  have  bounded  into 
a leading  place  in  all  sorts  of  things  from  hosiery  to  construction  mate- 
rials, yet  their  potentialities  have  scarcely  been  explored.  Work  now  being 
done  in  Germany  and  Italy  may  replace  or  surpass  polyethylene,  the  head 
of  the  polymer  or  long-chain-molecule  family,  that  the  majority  of  famil- 
iar plastics  are  descended  from,  along  with  straight  chain  alcohols  and 
cyclic  compounds  with  up  to  sixteen  carbon  atoms. 

The  key  now  being  explored  is  catalysts  of  organo-metals,  such  as 
combinations  of  aluminum,  carbon  and  hydrogen,  and  titanium  and 
chlorine. 

Dibasic  acids  with  twelve  carbon  atoms  and  lactame  with  thirteen  are 
produced  by  the  cyclic  process,  promising  new  plastics  that  may  outdo 
anything  currently  on  the  market. 

The  organo-metallic  catalysts  make  possible  an  “almost  unbelievable” 
variety  of  chemical  reactions.  Ethylene,  for  example,  is  polymerized  into 
substances  of  as  much  as  several  million  molecular  weight  with  atmos- 
pheric pressure,  whereas  less  dense  substances  required  high  pressure. 
Among  other  qualities,  the  new  plastics,  used  in  tires,  may  increase  mileage 
up  to  120,000  miles  I 

The  new  tetraethyl  lead  process,  if  proved  practical,  should  reduce 
costs.  This  new  method,  when  added  to  gasoline  to  prevent  auto  engine 
knock,  has  also  been  made  possible  by  using  catalysts.  The  United  States 
alone  produces  300,000  tons  a year.  It  was  invented  in  1920  in  America, 
and  the  new  process  using  Ziegler  catalysts  reduces  the  need  of  so  much 
sodium  and  chlorine  as  in  the  old  process.  It  uses  the  temperature  of  boiling 
water  instead  of  six  to  seven  times  as  much  heat  and  about  half  as  much 
electrical  energy  is  used. 


Nuts  to  mid  talents!  Mine 


was  no  satisfaction,  never 
earned  me  a penny  — and 
now  it  had  me  fighting  for 


my  life  in...  THE  LITTLE  RED  BAG 


but  finding  only  a sea  of  clouds 
instead.  So  I returned  my  at- 
tention to  the  inside  of  the 
plane,  to  the  overstuffed  gray- 
haired woman  asleep  beside 
me,  to  the  basks  of  heads  in 
seats  before  me,  across  the 
aisle  to  other  heads,  and  down 
to  the  blonde. 

I had  seen  her  in  the  con- 
course and  at  the  gate,  a 
shapely  thing.  Now  she  had 
crossed  her  legs  and  I was 
privileged  to  view  a trim  an- 
kle and  calf,  and  her  profile 
as  she  stared  moodily  across 
the  aisle  and  out  a window 
where  there  was  nothing  to 
see. 

I slid  my  eyes  past  her  to 
others.  A crossword-puzzle 
worker,  a togetherness-type- 
magazine  reader. 

Inventory  completed,  I went 
back  to  looking  at  the  clouds, 
knowing  I should  be  thinking 
about  the  printing  order  I was 
going  to  Los  Angeles  for,  and 
not  wanting  to. 

So  I started  going  through 
the  purse  of  the  woman  next 
to  me.  Perhaps  that  sounds 
bad.  It  wasn’t.  I’d  been  doing 
it  for  years  and  nobody  ever 
complained. 

It  started  when  I was  a kid, 
this  business  of  being  able  to 
explore  the  insides  of  things 
like  purses  and  sealed  boxes 
and  locked  drawers  and — well, 
human  beings.  But  human  be- 
ings aren’t  worth  the  trouble. 
It’s  like  swimming  through 
spaghetti.  And  I’ve  got  to  stay 
away  from  electric  wires. 


They  hurt.  Now  don’t  ask  me 
how  they  hurt. 

Maybe  you  think  it’s  fun. 
For  the  most  part,  it  really 
isn’t.  I always  knew  what  was 
in  Christmas  presents  before  I 
unwrapped  them,  and  there- 
fore Christmas  was  always 
spoiled  for  me  as  a kid.  I can’t 
feel  the  color  of  anything,  just 
its  consistency.  An  apple 
senses  about  the  same  as  a po- 
tato, except  for  the  core  and 
the  stem.  I can’t  even  tell  if 
there’s  writing  on  a piece  of 
paper.  So  you  see  it  isn’t  much. 
Just  the  feel  of  shapes,  the 
hardnesses  and  softnesses.  But 
I’ve  learned  to  become  pretty 
good  at  guessing. 

Like  this  woman  next  to  me. 
She  had  a short,  cylindrical 
metal  object  in  her  purse  with 
waxlike  stuff  inside  it — a lip- 
stick. A round,  hard  object 
with  dust  inside — a compact. 
Handkerchief,  chewing  gum,  a 
small  book,  probably  an  ad- 
dress book,  money  in  a change 
purse — a few  bills  and  coins. 
Not  much  else. 

I was  a little  disappointed. 
I’ve  run  across  a gun  or  two  in 
my  time.  But  I never  say  any- 
thing. 

1 LEARNED  the  wisdom  of 
keeping  my  mouth  shut  in 
the  fourth  grade  when  Miss 
Winters,  a stern,  white-haired 
disciplinarian,  ordered  me  to 
eat  my  sack  lunch  in  the  class- 
room with  her  instead  of  out- 
side with  some  of  the  other 
kids.  This  was  the  punishment 


52 


JERRY  SOHL 


for  some  minor  infraction. 
Lunchtime  was  nearly  over 
and  we’d  both  finished  eating ; 
she  said  she’d  be  gone  for  a 
few  moments  and  that  I was  to 
erase  the  blackboard  during 
her  absence,  which  I dutifully 
did. 

Class  had  hardly  resumed 
when  she  started  looking 
around  the  desk  for  her  favo- 
rite mechanical  pencil,  asking 
if  any  of  us  had  seen  it,  and 
looking  straight  at  me.  I didn’t 
want  her  to  think  I had  taken 
it  while  she  was  out  of  the 
room,  so  I probed  the  contents 
of  her  purse,  which  she  always 
kept  in  the  upper  right  draw- 
er of  her  desk. 

“It’s  in  your  purse,”  I blurt- 
ed out. 

I was  sent  home  with  a 
stinging  note. 

Since  then  I’ve  kept  quiet. 
At  one  time  I assumed  every- 
body was  able  to  sense.  I’ve 
known  better  for  years.  Still, 
I wonder  how  many  other  peo- 
ple are  as  close-mouthed  about 
their  special  gift  as  I am  about 
mine. 

I used  to  think  that  some 
day  I’d  make  a lot  of  money 
out  of  it,  but  how?  I can’t 
read  thoughts.  I can’t  even  be 
sure  what  some  of  the  things 
1 sense  in  probing  really 
are. 

But  I’ve  learned  to  move 
things.  Ever  so  little.  A piece 
of  paper.  A feather.  Once  I 
stopped  one  of'  those  little 
glass-enclosed  light  or  heat- 
powered  devices  with  vanes 


you  see  now  and  then  in  a jew- 
eler’s window.  And  I can  stop 
clocks. 

Take  this  morning,  for  ex- 
ample. I had  set  my  alarm  for 
five-thirty  because  I had  to 
catch  the  seven  o’clock  plane 
at  San  Francisco  International 
Airport.  This  being  earlier 
than  I usually  get  up,  it  seems 
all  I did  during  the  night  was 
feel  my  way  past  the  escape- 
ment and  balance  wheel  to  see 
where  the  notch  for  the  alarm 
was.  The  last  time  I did  it 
there  was  just  the  merest 
fraction  of  an  inch  between 
the  pawl  and  the  notch.  So  I 
sighed  and  moved  to  the  bal- 
ance wheel  and  its  delicate 
ribbon  of  spiraling  steel.  I 
hung  onto  the  wheel,  exerting 
influence  to  decrease  the  re- 
storing torque. 

The  wheel  slowed  down  un- 
til there  was  no  more  ticking. 
It  took  quite  a bit  of  effort,  as 
it  always  does,  but  I did  it,  as 
I usually  do.  I can’t  stand  the 
alarm. 

When  I first  learned  to  do 
this,  I thought  I had  it  made.  I 
even  went  to  Las  Vegas  to  try 
my  hand,  so  to  speak,  with  the 
ratchets  and  pawls  and  cams 
and  springs  on  the  slot  ma- 
chines. But  there’s  nothing 
delicate  about  a slot  machine, 
and  the  spring  tensions  are  too 
strong.  I dropped  quite  a lot  of 
nickels  before  I finally  gave 
up. 

So  I’m  stuck  with  a talent 
I’ve  found  little  real  use  for. 
Except  that  it  amuses  me. 


THE  LITTLE  RED  BAG 


53 


Sometimes.  Not  like  this  time 
on  the  plane. 

The  woman  beside  me  stir- 
red, sat  up  suddenly  and  look- 
ed across  me  out  the  window. 
“Where  are  we  ?’’  she  asked  in 
a surprised  voice.  I told  her 
we  were  probably  a little 
north  of  Bakersfield.  She  said, 
“Oh,”  glanced  at  her  wrist- 
watch  and  sank  back  again. 

Soon  the  stewardesses  would 
bring  coffee  and  doughnuts 
around,  so  I contented  myself 
with  looking  at  the  clouds  and 
trying  to  think  about  Amos 
Magaffey,  who  was  purchas- 
ing agent  for  a Los  Angeles 
amusement  chain,  and  how  I 
was  going  to  convince  him  our 
printing  prices  were  maybe  a 
little  higher  but  the  quality 
and  service  were  better.  My 
mind  wandered  below  where  I 
was  sitting,  idly  moving  from 
one  piece  of  luggage  to  an- 
other, looking  for  my  beat-up 
suitcase.  I went  through  slips 
and  slippers,  lingerie  and 
laundry,  a jig  saw  puzzle  and 
a ukulele. 

I never  did  find  my  suitcase 
because  I found  the  bomb  first. 

The  bomb  was  in  a small 
bag — a woman’s  bag  judg- 
ing by  the  soft,  flimsy  things 
you’d  never  find  in  a man’s — 
and  I didn’t  know  it  was  a 
bomb  right  away.  I thought  it 
was  just  a clock,  one  of  those 
small,  quiet  alarms.  I was  go- 
ing to  pass  it  by  and  go  on,  but 
what  held  me  was  that  some- 
thing was  taped  to  it.  By  the 

54 


feel,  I knew  it  must  be  electri- 
cian’s tape.  Interested  and 
curious,  I explored  the  clock 
more  closely,  found  two  wires. 
One  went  to  a battery  and  the 
other  to  hard  round  cylinders 
taped  together.  The  hairs 
stood  up  at  the  base  of  my 
neck  when  I suddenly  realized 
what  it  was. 

The  clock’s  balance  wheel 
was  rocking  merrily.  Quickly 
I went  up  past  the  train  of 
gears  to  the  alarm  wheel.  If 
this  was  anything  like  my  own 
alarm  clock,  this  one  had 
something  like  ten  minutes  to 
go. 

It  was  forty  minutes  to 
Burbank  and  Lockheed  Air 
Terminal. 

My  mind  was  churning 
when  I turned  from  the  win- 
dow to  look  around  at  the  un- 
concerned passengers,  the 
woman  at  my  side  asleep 
again.  I thought:  Which  one 
of  these  . . . No,  none  of  them 
would  know  it  was  there.  I 
glanced  out  the  window  again ; 
clouds  were  still  in  the  way. 
We’d  be  leaving  the  valley  for 
the  mountain  range  north  of 
Los  Angeles  soon,  if  we  hadn’t 
left  it  already.  No  place  to 
land  the  plane  there. 

But  of  course  that  had  been 
the  plan ! 

My  heart  was  beating  in 
jackhammer  rhythm ; my 
mouth  was  dry  and  my  mind 
was  numb.  Tell  somebody 
about  the  bomb  before  it’s  too 
late ! No,  they’d  think  I put  it 
there.  Besides,  what  good 

JERRY  SOHL 


would  it  do?  There  would  be 
panic  and  they’d  never  get  the 
plane  down  in  time — if  they 
believed  me. 

“Sir.”  My  head  jerked 
around.  The  stewardess  stood 
in  the  aisle,  smiling,  extending 
a tray  to  me,  a brown  plastic 
tray  bearing  a small  paper  cup 
of  tomato  juice,  a cup  of  cof- 
fee, a cellophane-wrapped 
doughnut,  paper  spoon,  sugar 
and  dehydrated  cream  enve- 
lopes, and  a napkin. 

I goggled  at  her,  managed 
to  croak,  “No,  thanks.”  She 
gave  me  an  odd  look  and 
moved  along.  My  seatmate  had 
accepted  hers  and  was  tearing 
at  the  cellophane.  I couldn’t 
bear  to  watch  her. 

I closed  my  eyes,  forced  my 
mind  back  to  the  luggage  com- 
partment, spent  a frantic  mo- 
ment before  I found  the  bag 
again.  I had  to  stop  that  bal- 
ance wheel,  just  as  I stopped 
my  alarm  clock  every  morn- 
ing. I tried  to  close  everything 
off — the  throb  of  engines,  the 
rush  of  air,  the  woman  sip- 
ping coffee  noisily  beside  me — 
and  I went  into  the  clock  and 
surrounded  the  seesawing 
wheel.  When  it  went  forward, 
I pulled  it  back ; when  it  went 
back,  I pulled  it  forward.  I 
struggled  with  it,  and  it  was 
like  trying  to  work  with 
greasy  hands,  and  I was  afraid 
I wasn’t  going  to  be  able  to 
stop  it. 

Then,  little  by  little,  it  start- 
ed to  slow  its  beat.  But  I could 
not  afford  to  relax.  I pushed 


and  pulled  and  didn’t  dare  re- 
lease my  hold  until  it  came  to 
a dead  stop. 

“Anything  the  matter?” 

My  eyelids  flew  open  and  I 
looked  into  the  eyes  of  the 
woman  next  to  me.  There  was 
sugar  from  the  doughnut 
around  her  mouth  and  she  was 
still  chewing. 

“No,”  I said,  letting  out  my 
breath.  “I’m  all  right.” 

“You  were  moaning,  it 
sounded  like.  And  you  kept 
moving  your  head  back  and 
forth.” 

“Must  have  been  dream- 
ing,” I said  as  I rang  for  the 
stewardess.  When  she  came  I 
told  her  I’d  take  some  of  that 
coffee  now.  No,  nothing  else, 
just  coffee.  I didn’t  tell  her 
how  much  I needed  it.  I sat 
there  clammy  with  sweat  until 
she  returned.  Coffee  never 
tasted  so  good. 

All  right,  so  I had  stopped 
the  bomb’s  timer.  My 
mind  raced  ahead  to  the  land- 
ing. When  they  unloaded  the 
luggage,  the  balance  wheel 
would  start  again.  I wouldn’t 
be  able  to  stay  with  it,  keeping 
it  still.  I considered  telling  the 
authorities  as  soon  as  we  land- 
ed, or  maybe  calling  in  ahead, 
but  wouldn’t  that  just  bring 
suspicion,  questions.  Maybe  I 
could  convince  them  I could 
stop  a clock — ^but  not  before 
the  bomb  exploded.  And  then 
what?  My  secret  would  be  out 
and  my  life  would  be  changed. 
I’d  be  a man  not  to  be  trusted. 


THE  LimE  RED  BAG 


55 


a prying  man,  a man  literally 
with  gimlet  eyes. 

Mountain  crags  jutted 
through  the  clouds.  We  Were 
in  the  range  north  of  the  city. 
Here  and  there  were  clear 
spots  and  I could  see  roads  be- 
low, but  there  were  also  clouds 
far  above  us.  It  was  very  beau- 
tiful, but  it  was  also  very 
bumpy,  and  we  started  to  slip 
and  slide. 

To  my  horror  I found  that 
the  balance  wheel  was  rocking 
again.  Closing  my  eyes  and 
gritting  my  teeth,  I forced  my 
senses  to  the  wheel,  tugging 
and  pulling  and  shoving  and 
pushing  until  it  finally  stop- 
ped. 

A jab  in  the  shoulder.  I 
jumped,  startled. 

“Your  cup,”  my  seat  part- 
ner said,  pointing. 

I looked  down  at  the  coffee 
cup  I had  crushed  in  my 
hands.  Then  I looked  up  into 
the  eyes  of  the  stewardess.  I 
handed  it  to  her.  She  took  it 
without  a word  and  went 
away. 

“Were  you  really  asleep  that 
time  ?” 

“Not  really,”  I said.  I was 
tempted  to  tell  the  woman 
I was  subject  to  fits,  but  I 
didn’t. 

It  was  only  a few  minutes  to 
landing,  but  they  became  the 
longest  minutes  of  my  life  as 
time  after  time  I stopped  the 
rocking  wheel  when  the  plane 
dipped  and  bumped  to  a land- 
ing. 

Leaving  the  apron  with  the 
56 


other  passengers,  I tried  to 
walk  as  unconcernedly  as  they 
through  the  exit  gate.  I would 
have  liked  walking  through 
the  terminal  and  out  the  en- 
trance and  away,  but  I could 
not.  I had  my  suitcase  to  get, 
for  one  thing.  The  damned 
bomb  was  the  other.  So  I 
strolled  out  into  the  concourse 
again  to  look  at  the  plane  and 
watch  the  baggagemen  at 
work,  transferring  the  lug- 
gage to  two  airfield  carts. 
They  weren’t  as  careful  as  I 
would  have  been. 

It  was  impossible  to  tell 
from  this  distance  just  which 
bag  contained  the  bomb;  I 
could  hardly  identify  my  own 
scarred  suitcase.  The  assort- 
ment of  bags — a strange  con- 
glomeration of  sizes  and  colors 
— was  packed  in  some  places 
six  deep,  and  it  rolled  toward 
the  gate  where  I was  standing. 
I didn’t  know  whether  to  stay 
or  run,  imagining  the  balance 
wheel  now  happily  rocking 
again.  The  load  went  past  me 
down  a ramp  to  the  front  of 
the  air  terminal  where  the 
luggage  was  unloaded  and 
placed  in  a long  rack.  I went 
with  it. 

There  was  a flurry  of  ticket 
matching,  hands  grabbing  for 
suitcases,  and  a general  ex- 
odus on  the  part  of  my  fellow 
passengers,  too  fast  to  deter- 
mine who  had  got  the  one  with 
the  bomb.  Now  all  that  was 
left  was  the  attendant  and  I 
had  two  bags — my  own  batter- 
ed veteran  of  years,  and  a fine 

JERRY  SOHL 


new  red  overnight  case,  small 
enough  to  be  the  one. 

I lit  a cigarette,  reached  out. 
Inside  were  a woman’s  things 
and — a clock.  The  escapement 
was  clicking  vigorously. 

I didn’t  moan  this  time.  I 
just  closed  my  eyes,  stretched 
toward  and  grabbed  the  bal- 
ance wheel  I was  getting  to 
know  like  my  own.  I entered 
into  a union  with  it  so  strong 
that  after  I had  reduced  it  to 
immobility,  it  was  like  waking 
when  I opened  my  eyes. 

The  baggage  claim  attend- 
ant was  staring  at  me.  For 
only  a moment  I stared  back. 
Then  I quickly  reached  for  my 
baggage  check  and  presented 
it  to  him.  His  hand  hovered 
over  the  handle  of  the  little 
red  bag  and  I was  ready  to 
yell  at  him.  But  then,  match- 
ing numbers  on  the  tags  with 
his  eyes,  his  hand  grasped  the 
handle  of  my  own  suitcase  and 
pushed  it  toward  me. 

“Thanks,”  I said,  taking  it. 
I glanced  ever  so  casually  to- 
ward the  remaining  bag.  “One 
left  over,  eh?” 

“Yeah.”  He  was  so  bored  I 
was  tempted  to  tell  him  what 
was  in  it.  But  he  was  eying 
me  with  a “well-why-don’t- 
you-get-along?”  look. 

I said,  “What  happens  if 
nobody  claims  it?” 

“Take  it  inside.  Why?” 

He  was  getting  too  curious. 
“Oh,  I just  wondered,  that’s 
all.” 

I stepped  on  my  cigarette 
THE  LIHLE  RED  BAG 


and  walked  toward  the  air  ter- 
minal entrance  and  put  my 
suitcase  on  the  stone  steps 
there.  A redcap  came  hurrying 
over. 

“Cab?” 

I shook  my  head.  “Just  wait- 
ing.” 

Just  waiting  for  somebody 
to  pick  up  a bomb. 

I lit  another  cigarette  and 
glanced  now  and  then  toward 
the  baggage  claim  area.  The 
red  bag  was  still  there.  All 
sorts  of  theories  ran  through 
my  head  as  to  why  it  should 
still  be  there,  and  none  satis- 
fied me. 

I should  not  have  been 
there,  that  much  I knew;  I 
should  be  with  a man  named 
Amos  Magaffey  on  Sixth 
Street  at  ten  o’clock,  discuss- 
ing something  very  mundane, 
the  matter  of  a printing  order. 
But  what  could  I do?  If  I left 
the  airport,  the  attendant 
would  eventually  take  the  bag 
inside  and  there  would  be  an 
explosion,  and  I wouldn’t  be 
able  to  live  with  myself. 

No.  I had  to  stay  to  keep  the 
balance  wheel  stationary  until 
— until  what? 

A man  in  tan  gabardine, 
wearing  a police  cap  and 
badge,  walked  out  of  the  en- 
trance to  stand  on  the  stone 
steps  beside  me  while  he  put 
on  a pair  of  dark  glasses.  A 
member  of  the  airport  police 
detail.  I could  tell  him.  I could 
take  him  down  to  the  little  red 
bag  and  explain  the  whole 
thing.  Then  it  would  be  his 

57 


baby  and  I would  be  off  on  my 
own  business. 

But  he  moved  on  down  the 
steps,  nodded  at  the  redcap, 
and  started  across  the  street 
to  the  parking  area.  I could 
have  called  to  him,  “Hey,  offi- 
cer, let  me  tell  you  about  a 
bomb  in  a little  red  bag.”  But 
I didn’t.  I didn’t  because  I 
caught  a movement  at  the  bag- 
gage claim  counter  out  of  the 
side  of  my  eye. 

The  attendant  had  picked  up 
the  bag  and  was  walking  with 
it  up  the  ramp  to  the  rear  of 
the  air  terminal.  Picking  up 
my  own  suitcase,  I went  inside 
in  time  to  see  him  enter 
through  a side  door  and  de- 
posit the  bag  on  the  scales  at 
the  airline  desk  and  say  some- 
thing to  the  clerk.  The  clerk 
nodded  and  moved  the  bag  to 
the  rear  room. 

I could  visualize  the  balance 
wheel  once  again  rocking  like 
crazy.  How  many  minutes — 
or  seconds — were  left?  I was 
sweating  when  I moved  to  the 
counter,  and  it  wasn’t  because 
of  the  sunshine  I’d  been  soak- 
ing in.  I had  to  get  as  close  to 
the  bag  as  I could  if  I was  go- 
ing to  stop  the  clock  again. 

“Can  I help  you?”  the  clerk 
asked. 

“No.  I’m  waiting  for  some- 
one.” 

I turned  my  back  to  him, 
put  down  my  suitcase,  leaned 
against  the  counter  and  reach- 
ed out  for  the  wheel.  I found  I 
could  reach  the  device,  but  it 
was  far  away.  When  I tried  to 

^8 


dampen  it,  the  wheel  escaped 
my  grasp. 

“Do  you  have  my  suitcase?” 

I blinked  my  eyes  open  and 
looked  around.  The  blonde  in 
the  plane  stood  there  looking 
very  fresh  and  bright  and  un- 
concerned. In  her  right  hand 
she  had  a green  baggage  claim 
check. 

The  clerk  took  it,  nodded, 
and  in  a moment  brought  out 
the  overnight  case  and  set  it 
on  the  scales.  The  girl  thanked 
him,  picked  it  up,  glanced  at 
me  indiffei’ently,  and  then 
started  for  the  entrance  with 
it. 

“Just  a moment,”  I found 
myself  saying,  grabbing  my 
bag  and  hurrying  after  her. 

At  her  side  and  a little 
ahead  of  her,  I said,  “Lis- 
ten to  me.” 

She  looked  annoyed  and  in- 
creased her  stride  toward  the 
door. 

“It’s  a matter  of  life  or 
death,”  I said.  I wanted  to 
wrest  the  bag  from  her  and 
hurl  it  out  through  the  door- 
way into  the  street,  but  I re- 
strained myself. 

She  stopped  and  stared.  I 
noticed  a short,  fat  man  in  a 
rumpled  suitcoat  and  unpress- 
ed pants  staring,  too.  Ignoring 
him,  I said,  “Please  put  the 
bag  down.  Over  there.”  I indi- 
cated a spot  beside  a telephone 
booth  where  it  would  be  out  of 
the  way. 

She  didn’t  move.  She  just 
said,  “Why?” 


JERRY  SOHL 


“For  God’s  sake !’’  I took  the 
case.  She  offered  no  resistance. 

I put  her  bag  and  mine  next  to 
the  booth.  When  I turned 
around  she  was  standing  there 
looking  at  me  as  if  I had  gone 
out  of  my  mind.  Her  eyes  were 
blue  and  brown-flecked,  very 
pretty  eyes,  and  my  thought  at 
the  moment  was.  I’m  glad  the 
bomb  didn’t  go  off ; these  eyes 
wouldn’t  be  looking  at  me  or 
anything  else  right  now  if  it 
had. 

“I’ve  got  to  talk  to  you.  It’s 
very  important.” 

The  girl  said,  “Why?”  I was 
beginning  to  think  it  was  the 
only  word  she  knew.  At  the 
same  time  I was  wondering 
why  anyone  would  want  to  kill 
someone  so  lovely. 

“I’ll  explain  in  a moment. 
Please  stand  right  here  while 
I make  a telephone  call.”  I 
moved  toward  the  phone 
booth,  paused  and  said,  “And 
don’t  ask  me  why.” 

She  gave  me  a speculative 
look. 

I must  not  have  seemed 
a complete  idiot  because  she 
said,  “All  right,  but — ” 

I didn’t  listen  for  the  rest.  I 
went  into  the  booth,  closed  the 
door,  pretended  to  drop  a coin 
and  dial  a number.  But  all  the 
time  I was  in  there,  I was 
reaching  out  through  the  glass 
for  the  clock.  At  this  range  it 
wasn’t  difficult  to  stop  the  bal- 
ance wheel. 

Just  the  same,  when  I came 
out  I was  wringing  wet. 

“Now  will  you  please  tell  me 


what  this  is  all  about?”  she 
said  stiffly. 

“Gladly.  Let  me  buy  you  a 
cup  of  coffee  and  I’ll  explain.” 

She  glanced  at  the  bags.  I 
told  her  they’d  be  all  right.  We 
followed  the  short,  fat  man 
into  the  coffee  shop. 

Over  coffee  I explained  it  all 
to  her,  how  I had  this  extra- 
sensory ability,  how  she  was 
the  first  person  I had  ever  re- 
vealed it  to,  and  how  I had  dis- 
covered what  was  in  her  over- 
night bag. 

During  the  telling,  her  un- 
touched coffee  grew  a skin, 
her  face  grew  pale,  her  eyes 
grew  less  curious  and  more 
troubled.  There  were  tears 
there  when  I finished.  I asked 
her  who  put  the  bomb  in  her 
bag. 

“Joe  did,”  she  said  in  a tone- 
less voice,  not  looking  at  me 
any  more  but  staring  vacantly 
across  the  room.  “Joe  put  it 
there.”  Behind  her  eyes  she 
was  reliving  some  recent 
scene. 

“Who  is  Joe?” 

“My  husband.”  I thought 
she  was  going  to  really  bawl, 
but  she  got  control  again. 
“This  trip  was  his  idea,  my 
coming  down  here  to  visit  my 
sister.”  Her  smile  was  bleak. 
“I  see  now  why  he  wanted  to 
put  in  those  books.  I’d  finished 
packing  and  was  in  the  bath- 
room. He  said  he’d  put  in  some 
books  we’d  both  finished  read- 
ing— for  my  sister.  That’s 
when  he  must  have  put  the — 
put  it  in  there.” 


THE  LintE  RED  BAG 


59 


I said  gently,  “Why  would 
he  want  to  do  a thing  like 
that?” 

“I  don’t  know.”  She  shook 
her  head.  “I  just  don’t  know.” 
And  she  was  close  to  bawling 
again.  Then  she  recovered  and 
said,  “I’m  not  sure  I want  to 
know.”  I admired  her  for  say- 
ing it.  Joe  must  have  been 
crazy. 

“It’s  all  right  now?”  she 
asked. 

I nodded.  “A  long  as  we 
don’t  move  it.” 

I told  her  I didn’t  know  how 
much  more  time  there  was, 
that  I’d  been  thinking  it  over 
and  that  the  only  way  out 
seemed  to  be  to  tell  the  airport 
policeman.  After  I explained 
it  to  her,  the  girl — she  said 
her  name  was  Julia  Claremont 
— ^agreed  to  tell  him  she 
thought  there  was  a bomb  in 
her  bag,  that  she  had  noticed  a 
ticking  and  had  become  wor- 
ried because  she  knew  she 
hadn’t  packed  a clock.  It 
wasn’t  good,  but  it  would  have 
to  do. 

“We’ve  got  to  get  it  deac- 
tivated,” I said,  watching  the 
fat  man  pay  for  his  coffee  and 
leave.  “The  sooner  the  better.” 

I FINISHED  my  coffee  in 
one  gulp  and  went  to  pay 
the  bill  with  her.  I asked  her 
why  she  didn’t  claim  the  bag 
at  the  same  time  the  other 
people  had.  She  said  she  had 
called  her  sister  and  the  phone 
was  busy  for  a long  while. 
“She  was  supposed  to  meet 


me,  and  when  she  wasn’t  here, 
I got  worried.  She  said  she 
isn’t  feeling  well  and  asked  me 
to  take  a cab.”  She  smiled  a 
little.  It  was  a bright,  cheery 
thing.  I had  the  feeling  it  was 
all  for  me.  “That’s  where  I 
was  going  when  you  caught  up 
with  me.” 

It  had  become  a very  nice 
day.  But  the  bottom  dropped 
out  of  it  again  when  we  reach- 
ed the  lobby. 

The  two  bags  weren’t  there. 

I ran  to  the  entrance  and 
nearly  collided  with  the  red- 
cap. 

“See  anybody  go  out  of  here 
with  a little  red  bag  and  an  old 
battered  suitcase?” 

“Bag?  Suitcase?”  he  mum- 
bled. Then  he  became  excited. 
“Why,  a man  just  stepped  out 
of  here — ” He  turned  to  look 
down  the  street.  “That’s  him.” 

The  dumpy  man  I’d  seen 
was  walking  off;  Julia’s  bag 
in  his  right  hand,  mine  in  his 
left.  He  seemed  in  no  hurry. 

“Hey!”  I shouted,  starting 
toward  him. 

The  man  turned,  took  one 
look  at  me,  and  started  to  run. 
He  came  abreast  an  old  gray, 
mud-spattered  coupe,  ran 
around,  opened  the  door  and 
threw  both  bags  into  the  rear 
seat  as  he  got  in. 

The  car  was  a hundred  feet 
away  and  gathering  speed  by 
the  time  I reached  where  it 
had  been  parked,  I watched  it 
for  a moment,  then  walked 
back  to  the  entranceway 
where  Julia  was  standing  with 

JERRY  SOHL 


60 


the  redcap,  who  said,  “That  the  driver.  That  was  all  right, 
man  steal  them  suitcases?”  I didn’t  want  to  see  him.  I 
“That  he  did,”  I said,  didn’t  know  what  Julia  was 

Just  then  the  airport  police-  thinking, 
man  started  across  the  street  She  said,  “About  those 
from  the  parking  lot.  Redcap  bags,”  and  looked  at  me. 

said,  “Better  tell  him  about  The  officer  said,  “Yes, 

it,”  miss?” 

The  policeman  was  sympa-  “I — I don’t  care  about  mine, 

thetic  and  concerned.  He  said,  I didn’t  have  much  of  any- 
“We’d  better  get  over  to  the  thing  in  it.” 
office.”  “I  feel  the  same  way,”  I 

But  we  never  left  the  spot  said.  “Would  it  be  all  right  if 
because  an  explosion  some  we  didn’t  bother  to  report  it?” 
blocks  distant  shattered  the  “Well,”  the  policeman  said, 
air.  Julia’s  hand  grasped  my  “I  can’t  make  you  report  it.” 
arm.  Hard.  “I’d  rather  not  then,”  Julia 

“Jets,”  the  redcap  said,  ey-  said.  She  turned  to  me.  “I’d 
ing  the  sky.  like  some  air.  Can’t  we  walk  a 

“I  don’t  know,”  the  police-  little?” 
man  said.  “Didn’t  sound  much  “Sure,”  I said, 
like  a jet  to  me.”  We  started  down  the  street, 

We  stood  there,  I could  visu-  her  arm  in  mine,  as  the  air 

alize  the  wreckage  of  an  old  began  to  fill  with  the  distant 

gray  coupe  in  the  middle  of  a sounds  of  sirens, 
sti’eet,  but  I couldn’t  visualize  END 

STATEMENT  REQUIRED  BY  THE  ACT  OF  AUGUST  24,  1912,  AS  AMENDED  BY  THE 
ACTS  OF  MARCH  3,  1933,  AND  JULY  2.  1946  (Title  39,  United  States  Code,  Section  233) 
SHOWING  THE  OWNERSHIP.  MANAGEMENT,  AND  CIRCULATION  of  IF  WORLDS 
OF  SCIENCE  FIC'nON,  published  bi-monthly  at  New  York,  N.  Y.  for  October  1,  1969. 

1.  The  names  and  addresses  of  the  publisher,  editor,  managing  editor,  and  business  naan- 
agers  are:  Publisher,  Robert  M,  Guinn,  421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y.  ; Editor, 
H.  L.  (Sold,  421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y.  ; Managing  Editor,  none ; Business 
Manager,  none. 

2.  The  owner  is:  (If  owned  by  a corporation,  its  name  and  address  must  be  stated  and 
also  immediately  thereunder  the  names  and  addresses  of  stockholders  owning  or  holding 
1 percent  or  more  of  total  amount  of  stock.  If  not  owned  by  a corporation,  the  names  and 
addresses  of  the  individual  owners  must  be  given.  If  owned  by  a partnership  or  other  unin- 
corporated firm,  its  name  and  address,  as  well  as  that  of  each  individual  member,  must  be 
given.)  Digest  Productions  Corporation,  421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y.  Robert  M. 
Guinn  (sole  stockholder) . 

3.  The  known  bondholders,  mortgagees,  and  other  security  holders  owning  or  holding 
1 percent  or  more  of  total  amount  of  bonds,  mortgages,  or  other  securities  are:  (If  there  are 
none,  so  state.)  None, 

4.  Paragraphs  2 and  3 include,  in  cases  where  the  stockholder  or  security  holder  appears 
upon  the  books  of  the  company  as  trustee  or  in  any  other  fiduciary  relation,  the  name  of  the 
person  or  cot  poration  for  whom  such  trustee  is  acting ; also  the  statements  in  the  two  para- 
graphs .show  the  affiant’s  full  knowledge  and  belief  as  to  the  circumstanct*s  and  conditions 
under  which  stockholders  and  security  holders  who  do  not  appear  upon  the  books  of  the  com- 
pany as  trustees,  hold  stock  and  securities  in  a capacity  other  than  that  of  a bona  fide  owner. 

5.  The  average  number  of  copies  of  each  issue  of  this  publication  sold  or  distributed, 

through  the  mails  or  otherwise,  to  paid  subscribers  during  the  12  months  preceding  the  date 
shown  above  was:  (This  information  is  required  from  daily,  weekly,  semiweekly,  and  tri- 
weekly newspapers  only.)  

^ ROBERT  M.  GUINN,  Publisher. 

Sworn  to  and  subscribed  before  me  this  30th  day  of  September,  1959. 

JOAN  J.  DeMARIO,  Notary  Public. 

State  of  New  York,  No,  24-5978800.  Qualified  in  Kings  County.  Term  expires  March  30,  I960, 
[Seal] 


You  take  the 


give 


year 


IF  has  become  more  and  more  a factor  in  the  science  fiction 
field.  The  line-up  for  1960  already  includes  such  authors  as 
—Clifford  Simak,  Robert  Bloch,  Fred  Pohl,  Philip  Jose  Farmer, 
Ray  Russell  and  many  more  of  your  favorites,  that  are  cer- 
tainly favorites  of  the  person  you  plan  to  give  this  most 
welcome  gift.  A special  card  will  announce  your  gift  to  the 
lucky  recipient  and  each  issue  will  remind  him  of  your 
thoughtfulness. 

RUSH  YOUR  GIFT  SUBSCRIPTS  TO  US. 

(These  special  low  prices  are  good  until  December  1 5th,  1 959.) 

1 YEAR  dAA  Eoch  additional 

(6  issues)  Year  or 

1st  Subscription  ^ Subscription 


IF  Science  Fiction  • 421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.Y. 

Pltase  enter  Special  Gift  Subscriptions  to  tbo  following  and  sand  gift  card  announcements. 

I enclose 


Name 

...  _ Name 

Address... 

Address 

Clty....^ 

state 

City 

..  state  . 

1 year 

.2  years.. 

Price 

1 year 

2 years 

..  Price 

Sign  Card 



Sign  Card.. 

Name 

Name 

Address 

City 

1 year 

Sign  Card 

.2  years . 

State 

Price 

Address 

City 

1 year 

2 years 

..  State 

..  Price 



Sign  Card.. 

Name 

Address 

Name 

City 

State 

Address 

1 year 2 yearr Price City 

Sign  Card - 


State. 


They  went  somewhere  and  something  happened  to 


Hunched  tensely  over  the 
foot  of  the  bed,  Bradford 
Sanderson  stared  down  at  the 
unconscious  sergeant.  There 
was  a heavy  stillness  in  the 
hospital  room.  Outside,  beyond 


was  to  go  there 


the  window,  the  sun-splashed 
expanse  of  the  Army  medical 
base  stretched  away  toward 
the  glaring  beach  and  the 
shimmering  Gulf  waters  be- 
yond. 


64 


Last  Leap 


By  DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


them — and  the  one  way  to  find  out  where  and  what 


and  let  it  happen! 


The  door  opened  and  closed 
softly,  admitting  a lean  and 
erect  Medical  Corps  colonel. 

“Has  he  come  around  yet, 
Doctor?”  he  asked  in  an  un- 
easy whisper. 


Dr.  Sanderson  shook  his 
head.  “No,  but  he’s  sleeping 
lightly.  He’ll  be  awake  in  a 
minute.” 

“Think  you’ll  do  any  better 
with  this  one?”  The  colonel’s 


65 


voice  sharpened  to  an  appre- 
hensive edge. 

“I  intend  to  take  all  precau- 
tions, Dr.  Vickers.  I don’t 
think  we’ll  lose  McNaught.” 

“God,  I hope  not,”  Vickers 
said,  relieved  only  a little. 
“We’ve  already  got  the  Bu- 
reau breathing  down  our 
necks  over  the  first  two — ah 
— accidents.” 

“I’m  sure  we  have  nothing 
to  fear  this  time,”  said  San- 
derson. 

For  his  forty-eight  years 
and  despite  the  flecks  of  gray 
in  his  hair,  there  was  a pre- 
served air  of  youthfulness 
about  the  physicist.  Stocky 
and  in  obvious  good  trim,  ho 
presented  an  appearance  that 
belied  his  professional  status. 

The  door  opened  and  closed 
again,  as  softly  as  before,  and 
a woman  whose  dense  black 
hair  contrasted  her  Army 
nurse’s  uniform  came  and 
stood  between  the  two  men. 
Slightly  built  and  attractive, 
she  fixed  the  slumbering  ser- 
geant with  an  anxious  stare. 

Vickers  glanced  at  the  hypo- 
dermic syringe  in  her  hand. 
“Sodium  pentothal.  Miss  Con- 
ner ly?” 

She  nodded  without  looking 
at  him.  “Two  hundred  cc.” 

Drawing  in  a deep  breath, 
the  sergeant  rolled  over  and 
buried  his  head  luxuriously  in 
the  pillow.  The  movement, 
however,  did  little  to  dishevel 
his  bristly  blond  hair.  His  eyes 
flicked  open  and  he  stared  ab- 
stractedly at  the  others.  Then 


he  smiled  and  his  lips  parted 
to  form  a word. 

“Easy  now!”  Sanderson 
cautioned.  “Don’t  think  about 
anything!  Just  keep  your 
mind  blank!” 

All  expression  drained 
from  the  sergeant’s  face. 
His  naturally  ruddy  features 
blanched  imperceptibly,  as 
though  he  had  remembered 
something  of  appalling  con- 
sequences. 

Colonel  Vickers  and  Miss 
Connerly  moved  precautiously 
away  from  the  bed. 

“Did  it  take?”  McNaught 
asked,  sitting  up. 

“That’s  what  we’re  going  to 
find  out  now,”  Sanderson  re- 
plied. “And  that’s  all  we’re 
going  to  find  out.” 

Exploring  the  floor,  Mc- 
Naught’s  feet  found  and 
squirmed  into  his  slippers. 
Then  he  rose,  straightened  his 
pajama  blouse  and  reached  for 
his  robe.  He  was  a tall,  well- 
proportioned  man  and  his  ex- 
cessive size  was  evident  in  the 
skimpy  fit  of  the  hospital  gar- 
ments. 

“Take  it  slow,”  Sanderson 
soothed  again,  backing  off  be- 
fore the  sergeant.  “Just  do  as 
we  say — nothing  else.” 

McNaught  tightened  the 
robe  sash  and  offered  a smile 
that  was  intended  to  be  reas- 
suring. “If  you’re  thinking 
about  Watterman  and  Fish- 
er,” he  said  lightly,  “they’ll  be 
back.  They  just  took  French 
leave  and — ” 


66 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


“Blank,  Sergeant !”  San- 
derson cut  in.  “We  don’t  want 
you  thinking  of  anything  that 
might  make  you  pop  away  im- 
pulsively. Now — are  you  all 
set?” 

Miss  Connerly  strained  for- 
ward, her  intense  gray  eyes 
vigilant  with  restrained  ap- 
prehension. 

Vickers  glanced  uncertainly 
behind  him  and  eased  back. 

Sanderson  stepped  to  one 
side,  as  though  it  might  be 
necessary  to  get  out  of  the  ser- 
geant’s way.  “The  opposite 
comer  of  the  room — and 
that’s  all,”  he  directed. 
“Ready  Go!” 

Instantly  there  was  a double 
thunderclap  of  minor  inten- 
sity— like  two  distant  jets 
slipping  through  the  sound 
barrier — as  McNaught  disap- 
peared from  where  he  was 
standing  and  reappeared  sim- 
ultaneously in  the  designated 
corner. 

The  sergeant  turned  and 
faced  Sanderson  triumphant- 
ly. “It  works!” 

But  the  physicist  sprang 
across  the  room,  signaling  for 
Miss  Connerly  at  the  same 
time. 

“Let  him  have  the  injec- 
tion!” he  told  the  nurse. 
“Easy,  son.  Everything’s  go- 
ing to  be  all  right.  Just  don’t 
think!  Dr.  Vickers,  help  me 
bring  him  back  across  the 
room.” 

The  injection  took  effect  al- 
most immediately  and  it  re- 
quired the  efforts  of  both  men 


to  get  McNaught  comfortably 
positioned  in  bed. 

Sanderson  shook  his  head 
briskly,  trying  to  clear  the 
ringing  in  his  ears.  And  he 
wondered  whether  he  would 
ever  get  used  to  the  unexpect- 
ed explosions  that  resulted  as 
air  rushed  into  the  suddenly 
vacated  space  and  was  abrupt- 
ly expelled  from  the  newly 
occupied  one. 

Later  that  evening,  Vick- 
' ers  paced  nervously  in 
Sanderson’s  office  while  San- 
derson chronicled  the  day’s 
incidents  in  his  official  record 
book. 

Unsettled  by  the  colonel’s 
restlessness,  he  paused  and 
looked  up  irately.  “I  wouldn’t 
worry  too  much  about  Mc- 
Naught. He’s  going  to  do  all 
right.” 

“That’s  what  you  said  about 
Watterman  and  Fisher.” 

“But  the  sergeant  has  good 
control.  He  knows  the  mean- 
ing of  the  word  restraint.” 
Vickers  cast  him  an  uncon- 
vinced glance  and  continued 
pacing.  “That’s  the  way  it  was 
with  Watterman  and  Fisher — 
at  first.  They  went  slow.  They 
had  a lot  of  respect  for  tele- 
portation— until  they  started 
throwing  caution  to  the  wind 
and  went  popping  all  over  the 
place.” 

Sanderson  rose,  packing  his 
pipe  bowl  with  a crooked 
thumb.  “McNaught’s  fore- 
warned by  the  disappearances 
of  the  first  two  subjects.  You 

67 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


can  be  sure  he’s  going  to  be 
damned  careful.” 

Vickers  leaned  backward 
against  the  desk  and  folded  his 
arms,  while  the  physicist  lit 
his  pipe  and  raised  a thick 
white  cloud  of  fragrant  smoke 
between  them. 

“What  do  you  suppose  hap- 
pened to  Watterman  and  Fish- 
er?” the  colonel  asked  grimly. 

“That’s  what  McNaught  is 
going  to  help  us  find  out.” 

“Collision  with  something 
solid?” 

Sanderson  shook  his  head. 
“You  don’t  pass  through  any- 
thing en  route  from  one  place 
to  another.” 

“I  mean  in  the  remateriali- 
zation. Maybe  Watterman  and 
Fisher  popped  up  in  a space 
that  was  already  occupied.” 

“Impossible.  Watterman 
cleared  that  for  us  months 
ago.  He  proved  rematerializa- 
tion can  take  place  only  in 
gaseous  spaces  or  attenuated 
liquids.  He  even  tried  to  reap- 
pear within  a brick  wall.  The 
best  he  could  do  was  to  pop  out 
next  to  it.” 

Still,  Vickers  was  not  molli- 
fied. His  thin,  rough  hands  ri- 
gidly gripped  the  edge  of  the 
desk  behind  him  as  he  stood 
there  with  one  leg  crossed 
over  the  other.  He  shook  his 
bowed  head  regretfully  and 
the  light  from  the  cortical  ex- 
citation laboratory  in  the  next 
room  sent  glistening  high- 
lights dancing  across  his  slick 
scalp.  ' 

“Maybe  they  popped  off  to  a 


polar  region  and  froze  to 
death,”  he  speculated  sourly. 

“That;  too,  is  highly  unlike- 
ly. There’s  a lot  of  reflex 
action  involved.  Waterman, 
after  his  second  excitation,  did 
go  to  the  Arctic,  you’ll  remem- 
ber. He  was  only  there  about 
three  seconds — long  enough 
for  the  cold  to  begin  s^ping 
in — before  he  found  himself 
back  in  his  room.  Fisher  even 
tried  a surge  into  space,  with- 
out any  injury  at  all.  His  re- 
action to  a vacuum  was  so 
spontaneous  that  I don’t  im- 
agine he  spent  more  than  a 
hundredth  of  a second  out 
there.” 

Nodding  absently,  Vickers 
lighted  a cigarette  with  un- 
steady hands  while  Sanderson 
returned  to  his  record  book. 
But  the  physicist  only  sat 
there  staring  thoughtfully 
through  the  surface  of  the 
desk,  pen  poised  over  the  lined 
paper. 

WATTERMAN  had  gone 
first.  There  had  been  his 
initial  reaction  to  cortical  ex- 
citation — uncertainty,  per- 
haps even  a tinge  of  fear.  His 
leaps  during  the  first  day 
were  executed  with  a gingerly 
reluctance.  By  the  second  day, 
however,  he  had  overcome  all 
his  qualms.  And  before  the 
stimulated  frontal  region  of 
his  brain  had  returned  to  nor- 
mal at  the  end  of  the  third 
day,  he  had  materialized  in 
four  different  sections  of  the 
country. 


68 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


It  was  after  his  second  ex- 
posure to  the  multiple-fre- 
quency stimulus  a month  later, 
however,  that  he  had  lost  him- 
self in  an  orgy  of  teleportive 
experiences,  cropping  up  in  so 
many  places  throughout  the 
country  and  abroad  that  the 
story  had  to  be  released. 

Only  then  did  the  public  be- 
come aware  that,  under  direct 
subsidy  of  the  Bureau  of  Re- 
search, Bradford  Sanderson's 
previous  experiments  in  ex- 
citing telepathy  had  been  in- 
geniously expanded  to  include 
teleportive  ability.  It  was 
Watterman's  materialization 
at  the  United  States  Moon 
Base,  the  physicist  recalled, 
that  had  forced  the  Bureau  to 
release  the  findings  of  the  ex- 
periment in  order  to  avert 
panic. 

The  next  day — that  was  five 
months  ago,  Sanderson  recall- 
ed as  he  pulled  pensively  on 
his  pipe — Watterman  had  dis- 
appeared, literally,  complete- 
ly, permanently.  He  had  left 
behind  only  a vacuous  tran- 
quility in  the  hospital  room, 
ruffled  solely  by  rustling  cur- 
tains that  quietly  altered  the 
pattern  of  sunlight  on  the  floor 
as  they  swayed  with  the  Gulf 
breeze. 

With  Fisher,  it  had  been 
different.  Sanderson  had  ques- 
tioned his  selection  as  a volun- 
teer. Thin  and  fidgety,  he  had 
definitely  turned  out  to  be  the 
excitable  type.  And  exposure 
to  the  catalytic  frequencies 
had  only  heightened  his  ner- 


vousness to  the  extent  that 
before  he  disappeared  he  had 
even  shown  psychotic  ten- 
dencies. 

His  teleportive  leaps  had 
been  few  indeed  and  were  exe- 
cuted only  after  inordinate 
coaxing.  Only  once  during  his 
entire  phase  had  he  shown  any 
initiative.  That  was  on  his 
jump  into  empty  space.  But 
even  afterward — until  he  had 
vanished  permanently  from 
under  a shade  umbrella  on  the 
beach  several  hours  later — ^he 
had  disclaimed  any  intent  in 
the  feat.  Rather,  he  had  in- 
sisted that  it  was  the  result  of 
an  “auto-suggestive  impulse.” 

With  McNaught,  though,  it 
would  be  different,  Sanderson 
promised  himself.  The  ser- 
geant was  as  perfectly  balanc- 
ed, mentally,  as  any  person 
he  had  ever  known. 

'T  wonder,”  Vickers  said, 
stubbing  out  his  cigarette  in 
the  ash  tray,  “whether  Wat- 
terman and  Fisher  will  ever 
be  heard  from  again.” 

“I  like  to  think  they  will.” 
Sanderson  cupped  his  hands 
around  the  warmth  of  his  pipe 
bowl.  “I  tell  myself  that  in 
both  cases,  and  perhaps  coin- 
cidentally, they  were  stranded 
in  remote  areas  just  as  the  ef- 
fects of  the  stimulative  fre- 
quencies wore  off.” 

“That  could  have  been  the 
case  with  Watterman,”  the 
colonel  admitted.  “He  disap- 
peared toward  the  end  of  his 
second  three-day  period.  But 
Fisher  was  in  phase  less  than 

69 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


a day  and  a half  when  it  hap- 
pened to  him.” 

“Maybe  the  stimulation 
wasn’t  as  strong  in  Fisher’s 
case.” 

“Maybe,”  said  Sanderson. 

Vickers  turned  to  leave,  but 
paused  near  the  door.  “By  the 
way,  the  Under  Secretary  of 
Research  is  due  in  tomorrow 
morning.” 

“Peabody?  What  does  he 
want?” 

“Mainly  to  keep  abreast  of 
what’s  going  on.  If  we  lose 
McNaught,  he  probably  has 
orders  to  put  his  foot  down  on 
your  work.” 

“That’s  bad.  I didn’t  want 
any  interference  during  the 
sergeant’s  three-day  phase.  As 
a matter  of  fact,  I’d  planned 
to  have  him  spend  most  of  to- 
morrow on  the  beach.  That’ll 
help  keep  his  mind  occupied.” 

Vickers  shrugged.  “You’ll 
have  to  see  Peabody  first.” 

UNDER  SECRETARY  of 
Research  Sylvester  A. 
Peabody  was  impressive  both 
in  size  and  proclivity  to  impo- 
sition. The  adjectives  “Wash- 
ington” and  “bureaucratic” 
were  stamped  all  over  him — in 
the  intolerant  set  of  his  jaw, 
the  disdainful  sharpness  of  his 
eyes,  his  mannerism  of  wield- 
ing an  otherwise  nonfunc- 
tional pair  of  glasses  to  stress 
a point. 

He  had  taken  possession  of 
Sanderson’s  desk  by  the  next 
morning  and,  for  the  better 
part  of  an  hour,  had  thumbed 

70 


through  the  day-by-day  chro- 
nology on  all  the  experimental 
work. 

He  looked  up  abruptly.  “So 
now  it’s  Number  Three?” 

Annoyed  over  the  loss  of 
time,  Sanderson  said  nothing. 

“And  what  makes  you  think 
we’ll  fare  any  better  with  this 
new  subject?”  Peabody  asked. 

“For  one  thing,  I altered 
three  of  the  basic  frequen- 
cies,” the  physicist  explained 
wearily.  “There  may  be  a cor- 
relation between  some  of  the 
ultra-wave  forms  and  the  feel- 
ing of  a compulsion  to  tele- 
port.” 

The  undersecretary  rose 
and  thumped  his  knuckles 
with  the  spectacles.  “As  I un- 
derstand it,  both  Fisher  and 
Watterman  said  that  at  times 
they  felt  this  almost  uncon- 
trollable impulse  to — as  you 
say — ^make  a leap.” 

Sanderson  nodded.  “Watter- 
man found  himself  jumping 
on  several  occasions  when  he 
merely  thought  about  another 
location.” 

“And  you  believe  you’ve 
corrected  this  rashness  in 
McNaught?” 

“Sergeant  McNaught  went 
through  extensive  ti*aining 
and  thorough  conditioning  for 
two  months  before  exposure. 
I consider  him  well  insulated 
against  any  whimsical  use  of 
his  ability.” 

Peabody  struck  a pose  of 
thoughtfulness  as  he  stared 
out  the  window. 

Impatiently,  Sanderson 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


checked  his  watch.  It  was  al- 
most noon  and  he  had  thus  far 
managed  to  spend  only  two 
hours  with  the  new  subject. 
But  it  had  been  a most  re- 
warding two  hours.  Mc- 
Naught  had  executed  over  a 
dozen  controlled  leaps,  two  of 
them  covering  distances  of 
better  than  a mile.  And  if  the 
sergeant  had  felt  any  inner 
elation  over  the  experiences, 
he  had  not  shown  it.  Exhibit- 
ing only  a purely  impersonal 
approach  to  the  manifestation, 
he  hadn’t  taken  a single  impul- 
sive leap. 

But  if  Sanderson  was  going 
to  continue  with  his  planned 
program  of  sensible  indoctri- 
nation for  McNaught,  he  re- 
alized, he  would  have  to  break 
away  from  Peabody  soon.  For 
nearly  a third  of  the  ser- 
geant’s three-day  phase  had 
already  been  used  up  and  as 
yet  he  had  been  subjected  to 
nothing  but  a false,  laboratory 
environment. 

The  undersecretary  turned 
and  spoke  with  a precise, 
meaningful  inflection.  “If  you 
lose  this  third  subject,  San- 
derson, your  project  is  going 
to  be  indefinitely  abandoned.’’ 

“McNaught’s  secure.” 

“As  I understood  it,  so  were 
the  first  two.” 

“You’ll  have  to  admit  that 
it’s  possible  they  may  have 
simply  taken  French  leave — 
Watterman  because  he  was 
naturally  frivolous  and  Fisher 
because  he  was  afi’aid.” 

“That’s  just  the  point!” 


Peabody  banged  the  desk.  “Do 
you  realize  that  for  months 
now  security  has  been  sweat- 
ing? Don’t  you  see  what  it 
would  mean  if  the  details  of 
your  work  fell  into  hostile 
hands?” 

“It  can’t  happen.  Wherever 
they  go,  the  subjects  take  no 
knowledge  of  the  process  with 
them.” 

Sanderson  didn’t  man- 
age to  get  away  with  Ser- 
geant McNaught  and  Miss 
Connerly  until  almost  three 
that  afternoon.  But  that  was 
just  as  well,  he  conceded  as  he 
helped  unpack  the  chairs,  um- 
brella, lunch  basket  and  bra- 
zier at  the  beach.  The  hottest 
part  of  the  day  was  behind 
them  now  and  cool  offshore 
breezes  were  beginning  to 
moderate  the  tepid  glare  of 
white  sand  and  glistening 
water. 

Eventually,  the  physicist 
settled  down  in  one  of  the 
chairs,  fished  in  his  pockets 
for  his  pipe,  and  began  plan- 
ning a series  of  more  ambi- 
tious leaps  for  the  sergeant 
to  perform  later  that  after- 
noon. 

McNaught  shed  his  polo 
shirt  and  helped  the  nurse  off 
with  her  beach  robe. 

“Come  on,  Kate,”  he  chal- 
lenged. “I’ll  race  you  to  the 
water.” 

Sanderson  watched  the  cou- 
ple sprint  away  while  the  sun 
played  softly  against  their 
lithe  forms.  But  several  yards 

71 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


from  the  water  McNaught 
swerved  to  spare  the  architec- 
tural integrity  of  a deserted 
sand  castle,  lost  his  balance 
and  toppled.  Miss  Connerly, 
unmindful  of  the  sergeant’s 
mishap,  raced  on,  splashing 
through  the  shallow  water  and 
plunging  headlong  into  a 
fi'othy  breaker. 

At  once  there  was  a muf- 
fled double  explosion  as  Mc- 
Naught vanished  from  where 
he  had  sprawled  on  the  sand 
and  rematerialized  in  the  wa- 
ter beside  the  girl.  And,  ac- 
commodating his  impetuous 
entry,  the  water  shot  outward 
and  upward  in  a geyserlike 
spray. 

Sanderson  bolted  from  his 
chair  and  raced  across  the 
beach.  Scarcely  aware  that  he 
was  in  water  above  his  shoes, 
he  cupped  his  hands  and 
shouted,  “I  didn’t  tell  you  to 
leap!” 

“I  didn’t  either.”  McNaught 
displayed  a confused  frown. 
‘‘It  just  sort  of — happened.” 

Sanderson  stiffened.  Was 
this  a first  indication  of  capri- 
cious reaction?  Was  Mc- 
Naught losing  his  detached 
calmness?  Was  he  headed  the 
same  way  as  Watterman  and 
Fisher  ? 

‘‘You’d  better  come  on  in,” 
Sanderson  said. 

“I’m  sure  he’ll  be  all  right. 
Dr.  Sanderson,”  the  nurse  in- 
terceded. “It  wouldn’t  have 
happened  if  I hadn’t  encour- 
aged that  spurt  of  exertion.” 

Perhaps  she  was  right,  the 


physicist  granted  hopefully. 
After  all,  reaction  could  only 
be  expected  to  become  reflex- 
ive to  a certain  degree  during 
physical  activity. 

Still,  he  went  back  to  the 
station  wagon,  opened  the 
glove  compartment,  took  out 
the  hypodermic  syringe  case 
and  put  it  in  his  hip  pocket. 

Early  that  evening,  while 
Sanderson  was  fanning 
the  coals  in  the  brazier,  Mc- 
Naught and  Miss  Connerly 
returned  from  a twilight  walk 
along  the  beach. 

They  stood  on  the  other 
side  of  the  fire  for  a long 
while,  letting  the  lambent 
glow  cast  a mantle  of  ruddi- 
ness across  their  features. 

“I  think  we’re  making  ex- 
cellent headway,”  the  physi- 
cist enthused,  spearing  three 
wieners  with  a fork  and  sub- 
jecting them  to  the  heat  of  the 
coals.  “I  particularly  like  the 
way  you’re  showing  restraint. 
By  this  time  Watterman  was 
hopping  all  over  the  country.” 
With  satisfaction,  he 
thought  back  over  the  experi- 
ments he  had  put  McNaught 
through  late  that  afternoon. 
He  had  negotiated  leaps  to  the 
island,  to  a point  several  miles 
down  the  beach  and  to  Colonel 
Vickers’  office  and  back.  And, 
unlike  the  first  two  subjects, 
the  sergeant  had  still  shown 
no  further  tendency  toward 
impulsive  teleportation. 

Sanderson  looked  hastily 
over  at  the  couple,  realizing 


72 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


only  then  that  there  was  a 
tense'  silence  between  them. 
And  now  he  saw  that  their 
faces  were  strained  with  un- 
certain expressions. 

“It — ^happened  again,”  the 
girl  said  awkwardly. 

Sanderson  let  the  wieners 
drop  to  the  sand.  “Another 
involuntary  hop?  Where  to 
this  time?” 

“I  just  couldn’t  help  it,” 
McNaught  apologized.  “I  was 
thinking  about  home — on  the 
West  Coast.  We’ve  got  a beach 
just  like  this.  And  suddenly 
I was  standing  on  it.  I would 
not  even  have  known  the  dif- 
ference if  it  hadn’t  been  for 
the  fact  that  the  sun  was  still 
shining  over  there.” 

“That  settles  it!”  the  physi- 
cist exclaimed.  “Let’s  get  him 
back  to  the  base,  Kate.  He’s 
going  to  sit  out  the  I'est  of  his 
phase  with  a few  hundred  cc 
of  pentothal!” 

McNaught  gripped  Sander- 
son’s sleeve.  “I’ll  be  all  right. 
Let  me  stick  it  out — for  a few 
more  hours,  at  least.” 

“I  think  Dr.  Sanderson  is 
right,”  the  girl  said.  “It’s  best 
to  play  it  safe.”  She  went  over 
to  retrieve  her  robe. 

McNaught,  however,  only 
stood  staring  down  at  the 
glowing  coals.  A large  moth 
buzzed  against  his  face,  but 
even  that  failed  to  snap  him 
from  his  thoughts.  Sanderson 
reached  out  and  took  him  ur- 
gently by  the  arm. 

But  the  sergeant  pulled 
free,  brushing  the  insect  away 

THE  UST  LEAP 


at  the  same  time.  “No,  waitl 
I think—” 

He  paused  and  his  eyes  were 
vivid  with  sudden  apprehen- 
sion. “I  think  I know  what 
happened  to  Watterman  and 
Fisher!” 

The  physicist  laced  him 
with  a questioning  stare. 

McNaught  lurched  back. 
“No!”  he  shouted.  “Don’t  ask 
me!  I can’t  talk  about  it!” 

Sanderson  lunged  for  him. 
But  he  vanished,  reappeared 
a few  feet  away,  moonlight 
glistening  on  his  trembling 
shoulders. 

Kate  raced  toward  him  and 
he  disappeared  again,  materi- 
alizing this  time  close  to  the 
physicist.  And  Sanderson  was 
ready  with  the  hypodermic. 

The  next  morning  the  phys- 
icist’s dra'wn  face  showed 
the  effects  of  a sleepless  night 
as  he  called  down  for  coffee 
and  shaved  in  the  lavatory  ad- 
joining his  office. 

When  he  went  back  to  his 
desk,  Vickers  was  in  the  room, 
looking  haggard  and  nervous. 
The  colonel’s  tie  was  askew, 
and  around  his  bald  crown,  his 
peripheral  fringe  of  hair  was 
ragged,  like  the  leaves  of  a 
Roman  chaplet. 

He  dropped  into  a chair  op- 
posite the  desk.  “At  least  I got 
rid  of  Peabody.  He’s  gone  back 
to  Washington.” 

Sanderson  tensed.  “You  tell 
him  what  happened  ?” 

“Of  course  not.  I simply  ex- 
plained that  we  cut  the  experi- 


73 


ment  short  to  evaluate  what 
we’ve  observed  thus  far.” 

The  physicist  thrust  his 
hands  in  his  pockets  and  went 
to  the  window,  looked  out 
blindly,  turned  and  came  back, 
“I  don’t  understand  it.  I can’t 
imagine  what  unnerved  Mc- 
Naught  so  completely  last 
night.” 

“You  should  have  pressed 
him  for  an  explanation.” 
“No,”  Sanderson  disagreed. 
“I  think  that  might  have  been 
disastrous.  When  he  material- 
ized next  to  me — Klon’t  you 
see? — he  must  have  wanted 
that  injection.” 

Vickers  spread  his  hands. 
“What  do  we  do  now?” 

“Keep  him  under  sedation 
until  the  effects  of  the  fre- 
quency exposure  wear  off.  We 
only  have  a little  more  than 
a day  to  sit  it  out.  Then  I’m 
going  to  re-examine  every 
inch  of  theory.” 

He  went  over  to  his  desk, 
opened  the  record  book  and 
wrote  four  or  five  lines.  Then 
he  looked  up  as  Miss  Connerly 
entered  with  the  coffee  he  had 
requested. 

“I’m  glad  you’re  here, 
Kate,”  he  said,  relieved. 
“When  did  you  give  Mc- 
Naught  that  last  injection?  It 
was  three  o’clock,  wasn’t  it?” 
Pen  poised  over  the  next 
blank  line,  he  waited  for  her 
answer.  When  he  looked  up 
finally,  he  saw  only  dismay  on 
her  face. 

“I  thought — ” she  began. 
“Didn’t  you  say — I mean,  you 

74 


told  me  just  after  midnight 
that  the  other  nurse  would 
take  care  of  it,  didn’t  you?” 
Sanderson  sprang  up.  “I 
said  she  would  prepare  it ! She 
went  off  duty  at  two-thirty!” 
Lunging  for  the  door,  he 
brush^  against  her,  jolted  the 
tray  and  sent  coffee  sloshing 
over  the  brims  of  the  two 
cups.  Vickers  stayed  close  at 
his  heels  all  the  way  down  the 
corridor. 

McNaught’s  room  was  emp- 
ty. 

The  top  sheet  on  his  bed  had 
been  carelessly  thrown  back. 
An  overturned  glass  of  water, 
its  puddle  still  dripping  off  the 
edge  of  the  night  table’s  sur- 
face, suggested  that  he  had 
only  recently  awakened.  His 
robe  was  gone,  as  was  one  of 
his  slippers.  Sole  up,  the  other 
lay  halfway  between  the  bed 
and  the  reading  table. 

Sunlight  splotched  the  sin- 
gle sheet  of  writing  paper  on 
the  table.  With  an  unsteady 
hand,  Sanderson  picked  up  the 
scrawled  note : 

How  can  I warn  anybody 
without  even  thinking  about 
it?  The  urge  to  teleport  can 
sneak  up  on  you.  It  can  also 
be  an  oveipowering  compul- 
sion. But  how  can  I teU  you  ? 
How  can  1 keep  myself  from 
thinking  about  something, 
and  at  the  same  time  write 
about  what  it  is  I’m  not  sup- 
posed to  think  about?  I 
know  what  happened  to 
Watterman  and  Fisher. 
They  wen 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


The  writing  ended  abruptly, 
as  though  the  pen  had  been 
snatched  cleanly  up  and  away 
from  the  paper. 

IT  WAS  almost  midnight 
that  same  day  when  Vick- 
ers, having  searched  Sander- 
son’s quarters  and  the  hospital 
for  the  physicist,  tried  the 
laboratory  on  the  strength  of 
a hunch. 

In  the  doorway,  the  whining 
surge  of  energy  in  the  excita- 
tion circuits  drew  a startled 
breath  from  the  colonel.  He 
plunged  on  into  the  room,  rac- 
ing past  the  restless  genera- 
tors, past  the  towering  banks 
of  rectifiers  and  oscillators, 
past  the  ultra-frequency  con- 
verters. 

“You  fool!”  he  shouted  as 
he  covered  the  remaining  dis- 
tance to  the  excitation  chair 
and  began  snatching  elec- 
trodes from  the  band  that  cir- 
cled Sanderson’s  forehead. 

He  knocked  aside  the  final 
three  glowing  parabolic  reflec- 
tors. “You  damned  silly  fool! 
What  are  you  trying  to  do?” 
Sanderson  felt  no  immedi- 
ate effects  from  the  exposure, 
despite  the  fact  that  there  had 
been  no  anesthetic. 

“It  had  to  be  done,”  he  said 
evenly. 

“Why?  So  you  could  go  the 
same  way  Watterman  and 
Fisher  and  McNaught  went?” 
“I’ve  got  to  know  what  hap- 
pened to  them.” 

“It  doesn’t  make  any  differ- 
ence now.”  Vickers  appeared 


to  be  growing  even  more  per- 
turbed. “The  Bureau’s  going 
to  shut  down  the  project  any- 
way!” 

Sanderson  rose  and  passed 
a hand  over  his  forehead,  fin- 
gering the  impression  left  by 
the  electrode  band.  “That’s 
just  it.  They’ll  shut  us  down 
and  we’ll  never  know  what 
became  of  McNaught  and  the 
others.” 

“What  do  you  expect  to 
do?” 

“The  same  things  they  did, 
I guess,”  the  physicist  said, 
shrugging.  “I  don’t  suppose 
I’ll  have  any  trouble  duplicat- 
ing their  final  experience.” 

He  stared  at  a cleared  space 
in  the  opposite  corner  of  the 
laboratory.  And  even  before 
he  could  completely  summon 
the  intent  to  leap,  he  found 
himself  at  once  on  the  other 
side  of  the  room. 

Aghast,  Vickers  raced  after 
him.  “Sanderson — don’t!  You 
aren’t  even  conditioned 
against  impulsive  jumps!” 

“That’s  the  way  I want  it,” 
the  physicist  said  impassively. 
“All  the  preparations  we  went 
through  with  McNaught  did 
no  good.  He  still  hopped — 
three  times  that  we  know  of. 
So  maybe  I don’t  care  about 
self-restraint.” 

He  leaped  again,  this  time 
popping  up  in  the  doorway  to 
his  office. 

Hands  spread  in  a suppli- 
cating gesture.  Colonel  Vick- 
ers followed.  “Watterman  was 
not  interested  in  restraining 

75 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


himself.  He  leaped  as  much  as 
he  wanted.  And  he  finally  van- 
ished too.” 

“I  don’t  give  a hang  if  I do 
disappear.”  Sanderson  turned 
away.  “I’m  going  to  find  out 
where  those  others  went.  And 
the  only  way  to  do  it  is  to  take 
the  same  course  they  took  and 
see  what  happens.” 

He  flicked  out  of  sight  and 
ended  the  leap  in  the  corridor 
outside  his  office. 

«^ANDERSON!”  The  colo- 
nel’s  voice  came  excitedly 
from  within  the  room.  Then 
the  door  swung  open  and 
Vickers  burst  into  the  hall. 
"Call  this  crazy  thing  off! 
Look,  I have  an  idea.  In  tele- 
porting from  one  place  to  an- 
other, you  have  to  go  through 
something,  even  though  it 
seems  instantaneous.  Through 
some  other  plane  of  existence, 
perhaps.  And  maybe  when  you 
don’t  come  back — ^when  the 
others  didn’t  come  back — it 
was  because  they  got  stuck  in 
between!” 

Sanderson  turned  his  back. 
Immediately  the  corridor  was 
erased  from  his  vision,  only  to 
be  replaced  in  the  next  instant 
by  the  ponderous  railing  of  a 
concrete  bridge  and,  beyond, 
a river  whose  dark  waters 
sent  wisps  of  mist  into  the 
chill  air.  On  his  left,  the 
bridge  abutment  clung  to  the 
shore  of  the  lie  de  la  Cite  and, 
farther  in  the  distance,  the 
Cathedral  of  Notre  Dame’s 
great,  slender  spire  rose 

76 


against  the  pink-gray  dawn 
sky. 

A startled  Parisian,  wit- 
nessing the  materialization, 
shouted  a fervent  “Mon 
Dieu!”  and  promptly  got  his 
foot  caught  in  the  spokes  of 
his  bicycle  catapulting  over 
the  handle  bars. 

At  once  Sanderson  was  back 
in  the  hallway  with  Vickers, 
who  was  shouting  for  Miss 
Connerly. 

The  colonel  lunged  for  him 
but  missed  as  Sanderson  tele- 
ported to  a new  position  be- 
hind him. 

"For  God’s  sake!”  Vickers 
shouted.  “Stop  it — ^just  for  a 
minute,  anyway!  I have  an- 
other theory.  What  if  the  pro- 
tective reflex  doesn’t  always 
work?  Maybe  Fisher  was  just 
lucky  when  he  was  able  to  leap 
out  of  space  immediately ! 
Suppose  he  returned  to  space 
later — and  panicked  before  he 
remembered  he  could  jump 
back  to  safety!” 

A sudden  assault  of  violent 
suction  and  intense  cold 
sprang  in  on  Sanderson,  as 
though  he  had  been  snatched 
up  in  a giant’s  hand.  In  a 
shutterlike  glimpse,  he  was 
fleetingly  aware  of  a broad 
sweep  of  blackness,  spangled 
with  a myriad  brilliant  stars, 
of  a vast,  shadowy  surface 
hundreds  of  miles  below  that 
shone  softly  in  the  light  of  a 
full  moon. 

In  the  next  instant  he  was 
standing  on  the  beach  not  far 
from  the  spot  where  he  had 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


picnicked  with  McNaught  and 
Kate  the  day  before.  The  same 
moon  sent  its  light  down  to 
embrace  him  and  he  stood 
there  in  silent  concentration. 

The  last  leap,  he  realized, 
had  not  been  voluntary.  Vick- 
ers had  merely  spoken  about 
space  and,  on  the  strength  of 
that  suggestion,  Sanderson 
had  unintentionally  duplicated 
Fisher's  experience. 

So  it  had  been  spontaneous. 
So  what?  Maybe  that  was 
where  they  had  made  their 
mistake  all  along — in  thinking 
that  impulsive  teleportation 
must  be  rigorously  avoided. 
Maybe  he  should  let  himself 
go  completely — leap  whenever 
and  as  often  as  he  could,  with 
or  without  his  volition,  wher- 
ever his  fancy  led. 

Complete  surrender  to  the 
impulse,  wearing  himself  out 
in  wild  over  indulgence — that 
might  be  the  formula  for  es- 
tablishing teleportation  on  a 
totally  conscious  and  control- 
lable plane.  If  you  filled  a man 
with  food,  it  was  only  logical 
that  he  would  have  no  appe- 
tite, wasn't  it? 

Abruptly  he  was  back  in  the 
hospital  corridor.  Only  it  was 
empty  now. 

But  not  for  long. 

VICKERS  darted  out  from 
the  room  that  Fisher  had 
occupied.  ‘‘Miss  Conn — " 

He  spied  Sanderson, 
paused,  then  came  forward 
cautiously.  But  the  physicist 
had  already  seen  the  hypoder- 


mic syringe  v/hich  Vickers 
was  now  trying  to  hide  behind 
his  back. 

There  was  a furtive  sound 
in  the  other  direction  and 
Sanderson  spun  around.  Kate 
was  closing  in  on  him  from  the 
rear  with  another  hypoder- 
mic. 

But  the  visual  impression 
of  the  nurse  was  blotted  out 
and  immediately  replaced  by 
a blaze  of  lights  that  sparkled 
against  a background  of  glis- 
tening wet  buildings  and  drip- 
ping sky.  Then,  in  the  fierce 
glow  of  a lightning  bolt.  Times 
Square  stood  out  in  eerie 
white  clarity.  Hunched  under 
an  umbrella,  a man  and  wom- 
an in  formal  dress  brushed 
past  him  and  continued  on 
down  a Broadway  that  was  al- 
most deserted  in  the  thunder- 
storm. 

Leaping  to  New  York,  San- 
derson assured  himself,  had 
not  been  involuntary.  This 
time  he  had  predetermined  his 
destination. 

And  in  a quick  follow-up  to 
establish  the  self-impelled  na- 
ture of  his  movements,  he  tele- 
ported to  the  base  of  the 
Washington  Monument,  not- 
ing that  there  was  no  storm  in 
the  nation's  capital ; to  Fisher- 
man's Wharf  in  San  Fran- 
cisco, where  the  moon  was 
noticeably  lower  in  the  sky ; to 
State  Street  in  the  Chicago 
Loop,  which  he  left  as  soon  as 
he  felt  the  first  cold  drops  of 
rain. 

Then  suddenly  he  was  back 

77 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


in  the  quiet  of  Fisher’s  room 
in  the  hospital,  only  now  be- 
ginning to  feel  the  first  sensa- 
tions of  exuberance  over  his 
far-ranging  travels.  But  he 
repressed  it,  remembering  his 
resolve  to  reject  a sensation 
of  exhilaration.  If  he  was  to 
learn  what  had  happened  to 
Watterman,  Fisher  and  Mc- 
Naught,  and  return  to  tell 
about  it,  his  attitude  would 
have  to  be  one  of  scientific 
objectivity. 

With  a sudden  rebirth  of 
determination,  he  set  out 
again — to  a desolate  polar  ice 
field,  remaining  there  until  the 
severe  cold  pierced  his  cloth- 
ing like  dagger  points  of  fire 
— to  the  crest  of  the  Koolau 
Mountain  Range  on  Oahu, 
looking  down  first  on  sprawl- 
ing Honolulu  and  then  at  the 
sun  sinking  in  the  ocean  be- 
yond— to  London,  where  he 
stood  at  the  base  of  Lord  Nel- 
son’s Column  in  Trafalgar 
Square  and  watched  the  first 
faint  splashes  of  dawn  appear 
in  the  eastern  sky — to  a rug- 
ged peak  in  the  Rockies,  from 
which  he  enjoyed  an  enchant- 
ing view  of  the  artificial,  geo- 
metric brilliance  of  Denver. 

Exhausted,  finally,  he  let 
himself  return  to  the  hospital 
room  and  took  one  final  leap 
to  the  bed.  He  stretched  him- 
self across  its  tightly  drawn 
sheet  and  fell  quickly  asleep. 

CERTAIN  that  it  must  have 
been  at  least  half  an  eter- 
nity later,  Sanderson  finally 

78 


opened  his  eyes  and  turned  his 
face  away  from  the  bright 
sunlight  that  was  falling  on 
his  pillow. 

He  reached  over  and  rubbed 
his  arm,  realizing  at  once  that 
it  was  sore  from  a number  of 
needle  punctures  over  a con- 
siderable period  of  time. 

He  had  thrown  himself 
across  the  bed  fully  dressed, 
but  he  was  now  in  a hospital 
gown  and  lay  under  the  sheet. 
Someone,  perhaps  as  a result 
of  anxious  waiting,  had  kept 
the  desk  calendar  up  to  date. 
And  he  noted,  as  he  had  pre- 
viously suspected,  that  it  was 
not  the  day  after  his  exposure 
to  the  ultra-frequency  excita- 
tion, but  rather  three  days 
later. 

Still  groggy,  he  reached 
over  to  the  night  table  and 
poured  himself  a drink  of  wa- 
ter. Then,  trying  to  keep  his 
mind  on  immediate  considera- 
tions, he  sat  up. 

Colonel  Vickers  strode 
briskly  into  the  room  and 
grinned  when  he  saw  Sander- 
son awake.  “It’s  about  time 
you  came  around.” 

“I  suppose  you  think  I 
ought  to  thank  you  for  pulling 
the  rug  out  from  under  me  the 
other  night,”  grumbled  San- 
derson. 

Vickers  shrugged.  “Doesn't; 
matter.” 

“Suppose  I’m  not  cured?” 
Sanderson  suggested  warily. 
“What  if  I decide  to  put  my- 
self through  another  excita- 
tion treatment?” 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


“That  doesn’t  matter  either 
— ^what  you  decide,  I mean. 
Peabody’s  been  back.  He  or- 
dered the  laboratory  appara- 
tus dismantled.” 

“And  has  it  been  ?”  the 
physicist  asked. 

Vickers  nodded,  giving  no 
indication  that  he  had  detected 
the  note  of  amusement  in  San- 
derson’s voice. 

He  came  over  and  gripped 
Sanderson’s  shoulder.  “I  know 
you’re  pretty  wobbly,  so  take 
it  easy.  Get  up  and  around 
whenever  you  think  you’re  up 
to  it.  I’ll  have  a light  breakfast 
sent  in  as  a starter.” 

After  the  colonel  had  gone, 
Sanderson  allowed  himself  a 
smug  smile.  It  had  all  happen- 
ed as  he  had  planned.  First  the 
exhausting  workout  during 
his  initial  couple  of  hqurs  of 
teleporting.  Then  the  long  rest 
with  its  total  lack  of  mental 
activity  to  allow  time  for  him 
to  become  psychically  attuned 
to  the  new  ability  without  any 
further  chance  of  overdoing 
it. 

And  now  here  he  was — con- 
scious and  fresh  and  ready  to 
embark  on  the  second  stage  of 
his  plan  to  learn  what  had 
happened  to  the  other  three 
subjects.  He  wondered  how 
long  it  would  be  before  Vick- 
ers found  out  he  had  given 
himself  a strong  enough  ex- 
posure to  the  ultra-frequen- 
cies to  insure  a six-day  tele- 
portive  period  instead  of  the 
usual  three. 

But  he  was  not  ready  for 


any  more  leaps  now.  He  want- 
ed time  to  think — ^to  evaluate 
his  experiences  and  attitude, 
to  compare  them  with  those  of 
Watterman  and  Fisher  and 
McNaught.  Then  he  would  ap- 
ply logic  to  the  overall  phe- 
nomenon and  see  whether 
some  obscure  explanation  of 
the  disappearances  wouldn’t 
suggest  itself. 

Eventually,  an  orderly 
brought  in  the  breakfast  tray 
with  its  tomato  juice,  soft- 
boiled  eggs,  toast  and  coffee, 
and  Sanderson  dived  vora- 
ciously into  the  meal. 

After  he  had  finished,  he 
complimented  himself  on 
the  fact  that  he  had  not  tele- 
ported involuntarily  since  his 
awakening.  And  this  strength- 
ened the  hope  that  his  theory 
had  been  correct — that  by  al- 
lowing himself  free  rein  with 
both  deliberate  and  impulsive 
teleportation,  he  had  exhaust- 
ed his  inclination  to  uninten- 
tional leaping. 

He  pushed  the  tray  aside, 
put  on  his  robe  and  slippers 
and  walked  over  to  the  win- 
dow. And  he  stood  there  star- 
ing out  through  the  brilliant 
morning  glare  at  the  handful 
of  patients  in  deck  chairs  who 
were  drinking  in  the  sunlight 
on  the  convalescent  porch. 

McNaught,  he  remembered 
quite  clearly  now,  had  solved 
the  enigma.  But  in  trying  to 
get  the  warning  across,  he 
had  somehow  only  hastened 
his  final  disappearance. 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


79 


Abruptly  Sanderson  was 
thinking  back  to  the  night  be- 
fore the  sergeant  had  penned 
his  last  frenzied  words — to 
the  beach  scene  in  which  the 
youth  had  practically  gone 
berserk  and  had  begged  not  to 
be  pressed  for  his  theory  on 
what  had  happened  to  Watter- 
man  and  Fisher. 

Something — something  that 
had  occurred  just  before  then, 
or  perhaps  it  was  merely 
something  he  had  thought 
about — ^must  have  inspired 
the  sergeant’s  comprehension. 

Sanderson  reached  desper- 
ately into  his  memory  of  that 
night,  trying  to  recall  in  detail 
what  McNaught  had  said  and 
done.  But  it  was  almost  as 
though  his  mind  were  a blank. 
He  was  trying  too  hard,  he 
supposed.  And  he  longed  for 
a cigarette  so  he  could  relieve 
his  mind  momentarily  of  the 
self-ipflicted  ordeal. 

Instantly,  he  was  standing 
before  the  night  table  and 
looking  down  at  his  pack  of 
cigarettes.  And  his  hope  and 
confidence  were  immediately 
shattered.  He  hadn’t,  after  all, 
succeeded  in  quelling  involun- 
tary teleportation.  He  was  no 
better  off,  he  sensed,  than  the 
other  three  had  been  before 
their  disappearances. 

He  felt  a persistent  desper- 
ation closing  in  on  him.  It  was 
quite  possible,  he  realized 
dismally,  that  he  might  soon 
face  the  necessity  of  solving 
the  puzzle  as  the  sole  means  of 
saving  himself. 


The  window  of  an  automo- 
bile, driving  along  the  road  in 
front  of  the  hospital,  flashed 
an  intense  reflection  into  the 
room.  Sanderson  shielded  his 
eyes  against  the  sudden  burst 
of  light. 

And  abruptly  he  was  think- 
ing of  McNaught  again — on 
the  beach,  bending  over  the 
hot  coals,  insensitive  to  the 
fluttering  of  a moth  in  his 
face,  finally  becoming  aware 
of  the  insect  and  then  curious- 
ly following  its  swirling  flight 
around  the  brazier. 

Sanderson  fell  back  against 
the  bed,  astonished  and  terri- 
fied. 

Good  God ! It  wasn’t — it 
couldn't  be — 

Not  that! 

Even  as  his  thoughts  turned 
entranced  toward  the  concept, 
he  lashed  them  down  with  a 
frantic  surge  of  resistance. 
He  wouldn’t  think  about  it! 
The  mere  approach  of  the 
idea  to  his  consciousness 
would  mean  the  end.  Yet  he 
knew  that  ultimately  it  would 
be  impossible  to  keep  the  hyp- 
notically compelling  thought 
from  his  mind. 

He  forced  his  concentration 
into  another  channel — to  Mc- 
Naught’s  note  that  had  hope- 
lessly asked : 

. . , How  can  I keep  myself 
from  thinking  about  some- 
thing and,  at  the  same  time, 
write  about  what  it  is  Vm 
not  supposed  to  think 
about?  , . . 


80 


DANIEL  F.  GALOUYE 


There  was  only  despair  in 
the  realization  that  now  he, 
too,  faced  the  same  paradoxi- 
cal predicament.  Not  that  he 
intended  writing  a warning; 
that  wasn’t  necessary,  since 
there  would  be  no  more  exper- 
imental subjects.  But  he 
would  have  to  find  a way  of 
getting  a message  across  if  he 
was  going  to  save  himself. 

ONCE  more,  the  forbidden 
thought  assailed  the 
fringe  of  his  consciousness 
and  he  barely  succeeded  in 
driving  it  back  into  obscurity 
again.  But  how  long  could  he 
keep  it  up  ? 

He  stood  paralyzed  beside 
the  bed,  afraid  that  even  the 
slightest  movement  would 
somehow  trip  the  trigger  that 
was  hidden  so  close  to  the  sur- 
face of  his  thought  stream. 

If  he  could  only  find  some 
way  of  letting  them  know  he 
was  in  danger!  Naturally,  he 
wouldn’t  be  able  to  say  what 
the  peril  was.  For  he  would 
have  to  bring  it  to  the  surface 
of  his  mind  first.  And  that,  in 
itself,  would  be  fatal. 

But  if  they  knew  he  was 
still  in  the  teleportive  phase, 
and  if  they  saw  the  perspira- 
tion on  his  face  and  his  ex- 
pression of  horror,  then  they 
would  certainly  realize  the 
immediate  need  for  sedation. 

One  simple  sentence  would 
do  it.  And  he  could  pen  that 
message  without  skirting  too 
close  to  the  forbidden  thought. 
Cautiously,  he  made  his  way 


to  the  writing  table.  As 
though  he  were  sitting  on  an 
explosive  that  might  go  otf 
with  any  one  of  his  next  move- 
ments, he  gingerly  wrote : 

I exposed  myself  for  a six- 

day  period! 

The  door  opened  and  he 
turned  slowly  to  watch  Kate 
Connerly  enter.  He  waved  the 
sheet  of  paper  so  that  she 
might  see  it  and  come  read 
what  he  had  written.  He 
would  have  shouted  the  mes- 
sage, but  just  then  he  was 
frantically  fighting  off  an  im- 
pulse to  open  his  mind  to  the 
thought  that  would  send  him 
on  his  last  impulsive  leap. 

He  tried  to  make  a noise  in 
his  throat.  But  nothing  came 
out. 

He  stared  terrified  at  the 
chair  and  the  blanket  that  was 
draped  across  her  other  arm 
and  he  wanted  to  shout:  Not 
that!  Not  that! 

But  even  thinking  about  the 
protest  invited  a return  of  the 
disastrous  thought. 

She  took  a quick  glance  in 
his  direction,  not  really  seeing 
enough  to  sense  that  some- 
thing was  wrong,  and  began 
' wrestling  the  chair  again. 

And  even  before  she  said 
them,  he  knew  that  she  would 
speak  the  fatal  suggestive 
words : 

“It’s  such  a beautiful  day 
outside.  Dr.  Sanderson.  You’re 
going  to  go  bask  in  the  sun.” 

END 


THE  LAST  LEAP 


81 


Worlds  of  if 

Book  Reviews  by  Frederik  Pohl 


TWO  of  the  most  complicat- 
ed brains  recently  applied 
to  science  fiction  are  to  be 
found  in  the  skulls  of  Robert 
A.  W.  Lowndes  and  James 
Blish.  Blish  in  his  own  right 
has  produced  a dozen  science 
fiction  books,  most  good,  some 
outstanding.  If  Lowndes  has 
been  less  prolific,  it  is  because 
he  has  spent  the  last  twenty 
years  editing  science  fiction 
(and  other)  magazines,  thus 
putting  most  of  his  creative 
thought  into  other  people’s 
stories. 

In  their  first  collaboi'ation 
novel.  The  Duplicated  Man 
(Avalon),  these  two  have 
brewed  such  a mash  of  inven- 
tion and  imagination  as  has 
not  been  seen  since  van  Vogt. 
The  distillate  is  raw,  but  it  is 
dizzying  and  sometimes  very 
sweet.  We  have  every  reason 
to  believe  that  Blish-Lowndes 
wrote  this  novel  with  tongues 
in  cheek;  certainly  at  least  a 
part  of  their  intention  was  to 
caricature  the  smirking  stick 
figures  which  so  impossibly 
triumph  in  a typical  van  Vogt 
work  (which  are — has  anyone 
noticed  ? — the  same  soulless, 
pointless  totems  as  populate 
the  works  of  Ayn  Rand).  In 
this  they  succeeded.  But  they 

82 


did  more.  They  produced  a 
novel. 

Their  central  character  is 
Paul  Danton.  He  is  the  Dupli- 
cated Man.  Blish  and  Lowndes 
describe  him  as  a cardboard 
figure : he  is  a dedicated  revo- 
lutionary but  a totally  ineffec- 
tive one;  he  hates  the  world 
state,  but  can  find  no  better 
tactic  to  use  against  it  than 
joining  an  underground  con- 
spiracy which  has  yet  to 
achieve  its  first  success  of  any 
kind.  This  doesn’t  matter. 
Blish-Lowndes  need  Danton 
only  to  serve  as  a canvas  on 
whom  they  can  paint  half  a 
dozen  other  characters,  each 
part  Danton  and  part  someone 
else.  The  interplay  of  the  sev- 
en duplicated  Dantons  is  one 
of  the  great  merits  of  the 
book. 

The  action  of  the  story  con- 
cerns (among  much  else)  a 
sort  of  planned  cold  war  be- 
tween Earth  and  Venus,  a war 
that  is  based  on  deception  and 
sustained  by  fraud.  The  rul- 
ing bodies  of  each  planet  are 
all  working  at  cross  purposes, 
each  individual  councilor  try- 
ing to  achieve  his  own  cryptic 
aims,  both  groups  honey- 
combed with  espionage  and 
riddled  with  disloyalty.  There 


is  always  an  overt  purpose 
(irrelevant)  and  a real  pur- 
pose (concealed)  for  every 
act.  When  the  interplanetary 
war  finally  hots  up,  it  is  wag- 
ed with  nearly  Nexialist  strat- 
egy. Floods  of  nuclear  missiles 
are  mere  diversions.  The  ulti- 
mate victorious  stroke  consists 
of  rolling  an  empty  barrel 
down  a long  flight  of  stairs. 

The  Duplicated  Man  is 
a fantastically  complicated 
book.  In  inept  hands,  it  would 
be  utterly  tiresome.  In  the 
hands  of  Blish  and  Lowndes, 
it  is — ^amazingly! — clear,  logi- 
cal and  gripping.  It  possesses 
cascades  of  inventive  detail, 
big  (the  marvelous  immortal, 
Geoffrey  Thomas)  and  little 
(the  characteristic  smudged 
lips  of  the  Venusians,  caused 
by  the  folk  belief  that  ball- 
point pens  write  better  under 
water).  It  is  a rewarding 
work.  In  the  age  of  the  Dis- 
posable Science  Fiction  Novel, 
designed  like  Kleenex  to  be 
used  once  and  thrown  away. 
The  Duplicated  Man  is  a story 
which  improves  with  re-read- 
ing. Astonishing,  but  there  it 
is. 

ARTHUR  C.  CLARKE  has 
a sharp  mind  and  a disci- 
plined typewriter  and  his 
stories  of  space  exploration 
have  that  rare  and  satisfying 
quality,  the  feel  of  being  the 
authentic  reminiscences  of  an 
Old  Space  Dog.  In  The  Chal- 
lenge of  the  Space  Ship  (Har- 
per), he  is  permitted  to  cast 


off  the  fiction  format  and  pre- 
sent some  two  hundred  pages 
of  pure  fact  and  speculation — 
why  aliens  haven’t  come  to 
Earth,  and  what  a summer- 
resort  satellite  may  be  like; 
whether  climate  control  is 
feasible,  and  how  to  travel  be- 
tween the  stars. 

What  is  good  about  these 
essays  is  very,  very  good. 
When  he  speaks  of  wartime 
radar  and  of  “FIDO”  (the 
R.A.F.  fog-dispersal  system 
used  to  get  bombers  safely 
down  from  the  thick  British 
skies),  we  all  can  afford  to  lis- 
ten. He  was  on  the  spot.  He 
has  had  five  sightings  of 
UFOs  himself;  in  explaining 
them,  he  explains  away  nearly 
all  of  the  case  the  flying- 
saucerites  have  so  laboriously 
built  up.  Where  he  writes  of 
the  probable  shape  of  a sleep- 
ing compartment  on  a Mars- 
bound  rocket,  he  is  discussing 
a subject  to  which  he  has 
given  much  thought  and  a 
great  deal  of  study.  His  guess 
is  still  only  a guess,  but  it  has 
become  the  informed  guess  of 
an  expert. 

There  are  ten  or  twelve 
pieces  as  good  as  these  in  The 
Challenge  of  the  Space  Ship. 
Unfortunately  there  are  also 
ten  or  twelve  others.  In  “The 
Men  on  the  Moon,”  Clarke 
identifies  for  us  several  dozen 
historical  figures  after  whom 
lunar  craters  have  been 
named ; surely  this  is  only  tep- 
idly exciting  to  anyone.  In 
“The  Star  of  the  Magi,”  he 


83 


tries  to  explain  the  Star  that 
led  the  wise  men  to  Bethlehem 
and  arrives  at  the  conclusion 
that  it  was  a supernova 
(which  it  surely  was  not.  If 
the  star-gazers  of  Egypt, 
China  and  India  had  somehow 
missed  it,  those  of  Rome 
would  not.  We  know  that  one 
of  Rome’s  greatest  astrolo- 
gers, Thrasyllus,  was  in  Asia 
Minor  at  the  time) . In  “Ques- 
tion Time,”  the  subject  for 
discussion  is  not  science  at  all 
but  that  quite  different  topic, 
the  problems  of  lecturing  on 
science.  The  final  piece  in  the 
book,  “Of  Space  and  the 
Spirit,”  is  a diffuse  gather-all 
which  touches  on  everything 
and  covers  nothing. 

These  sections,  and  one  or 
two  others,  are  the  dross  in 
The  Challenge  of  the  Space 
Ship.  They  do  not  dim  the  lus- 
ter of  the  gold  that  appears 
elsewhere  in  the  book,  but 
they  make  one  wish  that  the 
publisher  had  been  a more  se- 
lective miner. 

A MORE  rewarding  Clarke — 
and  probably  the  biggest  sci- 
ence fiction  book  of  recent 
years — is  his  Across  the  Sea 
of  Stars  (Harcourt,  Brace), 
which  contains  eighteen  short 
stories  and  two  complete  nov- 
els, or  rather  more  than  the 
wordage  of  three  ordinary 
books,  in  one  binding  and  at 
one  single  price.  This  is  a bar- 
gain. 

It  is  also  a first-rate  in- 
troduction to  Clarke’s  work,  if 

84 


the  reader  who  needs  one  hap- 
pens to  exist. 

The  novels  are  Earthlight 
(a  peculiarly  plausible  inter- 
planetary war  between  Earth 
and  its  scatter  of  solar  colo- 
nies) and  Childhood’s  End 
(concerning’  the  supercession 
of  the  human  race  by  its  own 
evolved  children).  "The  short 
stories  do  not  include  all  of 
Clarke’s  best— “The  Nine  Bil- 
lion Names  of  God”  is  miss- 
ing, and  so  is  “The  Star” — but 
they  show  his  ways  and  moods. 
Arthur  Clarke  finds  it  irritat- 
ing to  be  told  that  “Rescue 
Party”  is  his  best  story  be- 
cause it  was  his  very  first. 
Therefore  that  fact  will  not 
be  commented  upon  at  this 
time,  but  it  is  here,  and  it  is 
a magnificent  yarn,  and  there 
are  many  others  very  nearly 
as  good. 

DAMON  KNIGHT  possesses 
wit  and  invention,  and  dis- 
plays both  in  Masters  of  Evo- 
lution, as  his  book  publishers 
(Ace)  have  retitled  his  old 
Galaxy  novella.  City  folk  and 
country  folk  hate  each  other 
and  no  longer  have  any  peace- 
able contact  with  each  other. 
So  as  not  to  confuse  the  read- 
er with  on-the-other-hands, 
Knight  has  made  it  a premise 
that  there  is  nothing  useful, 
good  or  desirable  about  any 
machine — any  machine — and 
the  only  satisfactory  way  of 
life  for  humanity  is  biological. 

To  document  it,  Knight 
has  invented  some  splendidly 


evolved  plants  and  animals — 
parrot  sort  of  things  for  stor- 
ing data  and  transmitting 
messages,  ferriferous  bushes 
whose  fruits  are  Bowie  knives, 
etc.  The  merely  technological 
cities  get  the  worst  of  it,  but 
Knight  convinces  you  that  to 
put  them  out  of  their  misery  is 
entirely  a kindnes,  as  he  de- 
scribes the  crushing  load  of 
absolutely  essential  labor-sav- 
ing devices  that  each  city 
dweller  must  drag  about.  This 
one  is  fun. 

THE  OTHER  half  of  the  dou- 
ble volume  is  Fire  in  the  Heav- 
ens, in  which  George  0.  Smith 
rids  nuclear  physics  of  that 
pesky  little  problem,  the  neu- 
trino. There  isn’t  any  neu- 
trino, Smith  says.  What  made 
physicists  think  there  was 
such  a thing  is  the  previously 
undiscovered  fact  that  every 
time  ener^  is  expended,  a lit- 
tle bit  of  it  drains  off  to  make 
trouble  in  the  Sun.  That  is 
how  stars  go  nova,  and  that’s 
what  our  heroes  have  to  pre- 
vent in  Fire  in  the  Heavens. 

Smith  has  written  a lot  of 
science  fiction  stories  very  like 
this  one.  As  he  is  an  engineer 
by  profession,  his  gadgets 
give  the  enjoyable  illusion  of 
working,  which  is  a plus.  Still, 
because  he  concentrates  on 
the  gadgetry  to  the  exclusion 
of  the  development  of  the 
characters,  this  is  a very  se- 
rious minus.  Not  only  by 
gadgetry  but  by  cocktail-hour 
dialogue  and  by  action,  the 


reader  is  entertained,  but  he 
is  almost  never  made  to  feel. 

What’s  wrong  with  that? 
Why,  nothing  much,  but  it  is 
a surprise  all  the  same  to  find 
that  after  two  decades  George 
0.  Smith  can  surprise  us  with 
as  warm  and  moving  a story 
as  another  new  book  under  his 
byline.  The  Fourth  R (Ballan- 
tine) . 

In  The  Fourth  R,  Smith 
turns  his  back  on  gum-chew- 
ing electronic  technicians  and 
dauntless  space  voyages.  His 
hero  is  a boy,  Jimmy  Holden. 
Jimmy  was  conceived  and 
brought  to  birth  because  his 
parents,  both  scientists,  need- 
ed a child  for  their  researches 
into  mechanical  education. 
Their  researches  succeeded, 
but  the  parents  died  abruptly, 
leaving  young  Jimmy,  six 
years  old,  with  an  adult  edu- 
cation but  a child’s  brain,  a 
world  of  knowledge  but  a 
body  just  four  feet  tall. 
Worse,  Jimmy  is  utterly  alone. 
He  dares  confide  in  no  one, 
and  he  dares  not  stay  with  his 
guardian — whose  interest  in 
the  mechanical  educator  was 
extreme,  and  dangerous. 

Smith  has  written  Jimmy’s 
story  with  inventiveness  and 
thought,  and,  above  all,  with 
sympathetic  understanding  of 
young  Jimmy  Holden.  It  is  a 
splendid  job.  The  person  who 
doesn’t  much  like  science  fic- 
tion will  enjoy  this  book,  and 
so  will  the  person  who  does. 

Prolific  Smith  has  still  an- 
other book  for  us  this  month 


85 


— and  still  another  publisher. 
Path  of  Unreason  comes  out 
under  the  Gnome  Press  im- 
print, James  Forrest  Carroll, 
Smith’s  bero,  is  either  a cata- 
tonic suffering  from  overwork 
and  deep-seated  psychic  flaws, 
or  the  victim  of  a plot  on  the 
part  of  alien  invaders  of 
Earth.  Either  premise  might 
make  a useful  and  entertain- 
ing book,  but  as  Smith  has 
meticulously  refused  to  dis- 
tinguish between  the  lady  and 
the  tiger  for  185  pages,  and 
thumbs  his  nose  at  our  igno- 
rance in  an  epilogue,  the  effect 
is  more  mystifying  than 
amusing. 

ADAM  CHASE’S  The  Golden 
Ape  (Avalon)  concerns  a pe- 
culiar young  giant  who  com- 
mutes between  worlds,  fight- 
ing duels  like  a very  John  Car- 
ter and  rescuing  a girl  very 
like  Dejah  Thoris  from  quite 
Barsoomian  perils.  It  has  a 
great  deal  of  action  and  color, 
but  it  also  has  a great  deal  of 
tripe.  Hank  Searls’s  first 
novel.  The  Big  X (Harper) , is 
a first-rate,  fast-moving,  tech- 
nically reliable  story  of  a test 
pilot  flying  the  last-but-one 
ancestor  of  the  spaceship.  The 
Big  X is  science  fiction,  but 
only  just;  in  another  year  or 
so,  it  will  be  history.  Yet  it 
contains  more  of  the  challenge 
of  the  unknown  than  any 
dozen  routine  intergalactic 
blood-baths. 

In  The  Stars  Are  Too  High 
(Random  House),  Agnew  H. 

86 


Bahnson,  Jr.,  proposes  a se- 
cretly built  spaceship  which 
its  inventors  use  to  pretend 
the  Earth  is  being  explored  by 
aliens,  so  as  to  unite  mankind 
and  end  war.  This  theme  has 
been  so  well  explored  by  oth- 
ers, principally  Theodore 
Sturgeon,  that  only  great  skill 
and  inventive  detail  could  jus- 
tify another  handling.  These 
elements  do  not  occur  in  The 
Stars  Are  Too  High.  It  is  an 
inferior  book;  what’s  worse, 
its  publishers  have  claimed  for 
it  the  status  of  a classic,  which 
is  disgraceful. 

Bombs  in  Orbit,  by  Jeff 
Sutton,  is  an  Ace  original 
concerning  a Russian  hydro- 
gen-bomb satellite  project  and 
an  American  rocket  pilot’s 
fight  to  nullify  it.  Sometimes 
the  reasoning  is  thin,  but  most 
of  the  detail  is  excellent,  the 
suspense  is  lushly  troweled  on 
and  the  pace  never  lets  up. 

Murray  Leinster  quietly 
goes  on  and  on  writing  first- 
rate  science  fiction  stories,  as 
he  has  done  since  1926.  (If  he 
did  not  appear  in  a science 
fiction  magazine  befoi’e  that 
year,  it  is  only  because  there 
was  no  science  fiction  maga- 
zine to  appear  in.)  Apparently 
he  will  go  on  forever.  This  is 
an  attractive  prospect.  In 
Monsters  and  Such  (Avon) , 
an  unprepossessing  title  has 
been  given  to  a fine  collection 
of  his  more  recent  stories. 
Only  “Proxima  Centuari” 
(1935)  goes  back  more  than  a 
decade,  but  it  is  well  worth 


reviving;  and  all  the  others  in 
the  book  are  worth  keeping 
alive  indefinitely. 

Jerry  Sohl  has  two  novels 
for  us  at  once.  The  first  is  a 
reprint  of  his  Rinehart  novel, 
The  Transcendent  Man  (Ban- 
tam) , which  lets  us  in  on  the 
well-kept  secret  of  Man’s  rap- 
id evolutionary  rise.  Capel- 
lans  are  behind  it.  They  drive 
us  upward,  for  they  live  on 
our  brain  power ; unfortunate- 
ly, they  are  about  to  leave  us 
and  we  will  then  rapidly  re- 
vert to  the  animal.  Sohl’s  hero 
must  decide  what  to  do  about 
all  this. 

In  One  Against  Herculum 
(Ace),  Sohl  invents  for  us  a 
future  city-colony  in  which 
crime  and  violence  are  kept 
under  control  by  licensing  the 
privilege  of  criminal  activity. 
The  idea  has  its  merits,  but 
Sohl  has  made  almost  no  use 
of  it,  preferring  to  drop  that 
notion  and  get  on  with  another 
underground  revolt  against  a 
dictatorial  state,  and  so  the 
story  quickly  confines  itself 
to  routine  shoot-and-be-shot. 
This  is  a double  volume,  of 
which  the  flip  side  is  Secret 
of  the  Lost  Race,  by  Andre 
Norton,  a competent  time- 
killer  concerning  evil  exploit- 
ers of  a frontier  planet.  Our 
hero  (who,  you  will  hardly 
fail  to  guess,  turns  out  to  be 
one  of  the  Lost  Race  himself) 
sets  everything  straight  in  a 
few  knockdown  brawls. 

Miss  Norton  also  offers 
The  Beast  Master  (Harcourt, 


Brace),  which  gives  us  a de- 
molished Earth  and  a dis- 
persed handful  of  humans 
scattered  among  the  non-hu- 
man  civilized  planets  of  the 
Galaxy.  Her  hero  is  a Navajo 
who,  in  the  war  that  destroy- 
ed Earth,  was  a commando 
leader  of  a squad  of  animals 
trained  to  help  wage  war. 

In  Seed  of  Light  (Ballan- 
tine),  Edmund  Cooper  spans 
many  centuries  and  many 
light-years  and  yet  manages 
to  maintain  a continuity  of 
narrative  while,  generation 
after  generation,  his  charac- 
ters are  born,  grow  and  die. 
Earth  is  self-destroyed ; only 
ten  humans  survive,  in  a 
rocket  headed  for  a hoped-for 
planet  of  Alpha  Centauri.  But 
Alpha  Centauri  is  barren ; the 
ship  wheels  around  it  and 
heads  for  Sirius.  If  there  is 
no  planet  circling  Sirius,  they 
will  try  Procyon;  if  not  Pro- 
cyon,  then  Vega  . . . then  Al- 
tair  . . . The  handful  of  men, 
women  and  babies  in  the  ship 
are  all  of  humanity,  and  they 
will  not  let  themselves  be  de- 
stroyed. 

Talbot  Mundy’s  celebrated 
series  concerning  the  adven- 
tures of  Prince  Tros  aren’t 
really  science  fiction,  but  they 
are  fun.  In  Tros  of  Samo- 
thrace  (Fantasy  Classic  Li- 
brary), the  prince  battles 
Norsemen,  pre-Roman  Brit- 
ons and  Julius  Caesar.  In 
Purple  Pirate,  he  tackles  Cleo- 
patra in  intrigue,  her  sister 
in  love,  and  Mark  Antony  in 

87 


battle.  Tros  is  always  exciting. 
What’s  more,  Mundy  always 
does  his  homework — if  his 
historical  facts  are  sometimes 
false,  it  is  because  of  license, 
not  ignorance. 

Robot  Hunt  (Avalon),  by 
Roger  Lee  Vernon,  opens  into 
the  middle  of  a complicated 
and  pulse-stirring  spy  hunt  in 
a future  Paris.  It  is  pure  Key- 
stone Kops  chase,  but  it  suc- 
ceeds in  catching  the  interest 
at  once  and  the  pace  is  sus- 
tained to  the  very  end.  Vernon 
conceives  an  Earth  in  which 
each  sovereign  nation  has  its 
shield  of  impenetrable  force 
screens,  thus  neutralizing  all 
weapons  and  ending  war  for- 
ever— until  someone  discov- 
ers a way  through  the  screens. 
Then,  of  course,  the  whole 
bloody  fuss  starts  all  over 
again.  Robot  Hunt  is  compos- 
ed of  ingredients  which  have 
produced  dozens  of  the  worst 
literary  clinkers  of  our  times, 
but  Vernon  stirs  in  thought. 

In  Starman’s  Quest 
(Gnome),  Robert  Silverberg 
proposes  to  entertain  the  teen- 
age audience  with  a story 
about  a 300-year-old  hero 
coeval  with  his  readers.  (He 
has  spent  most  of  his  life  in 
near-light-speed  space  travel. 
Under  relativity  law,  his  ob- 
jective-time age  is  only  seven- 
teen.) Silverberg  no  sooner 
settles  on  this  theme  than  he 
abandons  it  in  favor  of  a 
travelogue  on  an  implausible 
future  Earth,  populated  by 
unlikely  nuts. 


Gnome  also  gives  us  The 
Dawning  Light  by  Robert 
Randall,  a sequel  to  The 
Shrouded  Planet.  There  are 
strange  sights  and  events,  but 
you  must  not  linger  to  exam- 
ine them,  for  the  skin  of  solid 
plot  and  thought  that  sustains 
the  story  is  only  millimeters 
thick,  and  if  you  pause  to  re- 
flect, you  will  plunge  through 
the  crust. 

For  the  younger  ones,  Clif- 
ford B.  Hicks’s  First  Boy  on 
the  Moon  (Winston)  under- 
takes to  initiate  children  from 
eight  to  ten  into  the  excite- 
ment of  interplanetary  travel. 
A boy  named  Mike  and  a boy 
named  Mud  stow  away  on  a 
rocket  piloted  by  Mike’s  dad- 
dy; and,  winked  at  by  an 
utterly  incredible  space-sta- 
tion commander,  are  allowed 
to  participate  in  the  first 
lunar  landing.  Being  very 
young,  they  may  not  be  very 
critical,  so  the  worn  and  rudi- 
mentary plot  may  get  by. 

Readers  who  wish  to  con- 
trast practice  with  theory  in 
the  case  of  the  undersigned 
may  wish  to  avail  themselves 
of  two  new  Ballantine  titles: 
Wolf  bane  (a  novel,  in  collab- 
oration with  the  late  C.  M. 
Kornbluth)  and  Tomorrow 
Times  Seven  (a  collection  of 
short  stories) . In  a field  where 
a reviewer  is  a writer  is  an 
editor  is  a fan,  the  author  con- 
siders himself  mighty  bi-ave 
in  speaking  so  forthrightly  of 
the  work  of  his  colleagues. 

END 


88 


To  Each  His  Own 

By  JACK  SHARKEY 


A world  ideal  for  life  will  have  life  on  it — 


but  don’t  expect  ideal  life! 


ON  SEPTEMBER  the  24th, 
1965,  the  Venusian  space- 
ship Investigator  floated  gent- 
ly to  Earth  in  Times  Square. 

The  sleek  metal  belly  of  the 
ship  touched  feather-light  up- 
on the  asphalt  “X”  of  Broad- 
way and  Seventh  Avenue,  and 
stubby  stabilizing  legs  extend- 
ed from  ports  along  the  sides 
of  the  hull,  bracing  the  ship’s 
mass  against  dangerous  roll- 
ing, leaving  it  hulking  there 
like  some  metallic  beetle  at 
rest. 

The  sun  was  almost  directly 
overhead,  sending  yellow-gold 
serpentine  glints  wriggling  on 
the  gleaming  surface  of  the 
ship.  After  the  ve^  slight 
thumping  as  the  ship  settled 
into  place,  there  was  no  sound 
throughout  the  nearby  streets 
of  New  York. 

Absent  was  the  noise  of 
traffic,  the  hubbub  of  voices. 


the  hurry-scurry  of  pedes- 
trians. Nothing  but  heavy  op- 
pressive silence  everywhere 
outside  the  body  of  the  ship. 
No  apprehensive  eye  appear^ 
at  a window  to  stare  at  the 
visitor  from  the  nearest  plan- 
et. No  telephone  was  picked  up 
in  nervous  haste  to  warn  the 
authorities  of  the  possible 
menace  to  the  peoples  of 
Earth.  Just  the  silence  and  the 
dancing  sunlight. 

Inside  the  spaceship,  there 
was  swift,  practiced  activity. 

The  Venusians  were  a pick- 
ed, trained  crew.  This,  the 
first  contact  with  the  third 
planet,  called  for  quick  reac- 
tion, accurate  evaluation,  and 
competent  decision. 

Each  of  the  five  aboard  had 
a job  to  do  immediately  upon 
landing.  With  no  conversation, 
they  were  all  at  their  tasks.  It 
was  an  operation  they’d  prac- 

89 


ticed  many  times  over,  back  at 
their  home  base  on  Venus. 
They  were  sick  of  the  thing 
even  before  being  sent  to 
Earth.  But  their  training  had 
paid  well,  for  now  their  mo- 
tions were  automatic,  each 
separate  action  swift,  sure  and 
precise. 

Gwann,  the  pilot,  his  heavy- 
lidded  eyes  narrowed  with  the 
intensity  of  concentration, 
checked  and  re-checked  his  in- 
struments and  gauges.  His 
nimble  three-digited  hands, 
with  their  long,  flat  palms, 
flickered  from  button  to 
switch  to  dial.  He  locked  the 
stabilizing  legs  into  position, 
once  each  leg  had  made  its 
contact  securely  with  the  sur- 
face outside.  He  dampered  the 
power  of  the  interplanetary 
drive,  leaving  its  deadly  ema- 
nations at  a low,  and  therefore 
safe,  degree  of  pulsation.  He 
checked  the  release  valves  of 
the  individual  skimmers,  mak- 
ing certain  at  the  same  time 
that,  should  the  atmosphere 
outside  be  hostile  to  Venusian 
breathing,  the  tanks  were  fill- 
ed and  the  cockpit  seals  were 
tight  and  break-free. 

DROG,  the  navigator,  used 
compass,  ruler  and  stylus 
upon  the  scant,  almost  rudi- 
mentary Earth  map,  to  deter- 
mine the  exact  point  of  contact 
with  the  third  planet.  Venu- 
sian telescopes  were  able  to 
see — very  indistinctly — conti- 
nental outlines  at  the  twenty- 
million-mile  distance  to  their 

90 


neighbor  planet.  But  the  foggy 
overhang  that  shrouded  their 
home  planet  had  made  sharp 
topographical  drawing  well- 
nigh  impossible. 

Volval,  as  Drog  passed  him 
the  information,  relayed  the 
findings  by  light-beam  back  to 
their  home  base.  The  geo- 
graphical location,  coded  into 
the  tight  beam,  sped  outward 
from  the  surface  of  Earth  to- 
ward Venus,  where  it  would 
not  be  received  for  at  least  a 
minute  and  a half.  Volval,  hav- 
ing transmitted  the  data, 
waited  impatiently  while  the 
Venusian  biochemist  tested 
the  outside  surface  against 
their  leaving  the  ship. 

Jorik,  the  biochemist,  re- 
volved the  small  metal  “cage” 
with  its  quivering,  burbling 
Venusian  life-forms  on  it  back 
into  the  space  over  his  work- 
table. The  animals  seemed  un- 
harmed by  their  exposure  to 
the  alien  planet,  but  he  began 
more  definitive  tests  upon  the 
samplings  of  atmosphere  and 
soil  and  vegetation  brought 
back  by  a tiny  robo-skimmer 
that  had  searched  throughout 
a three-mile  radius  of  the  ship 
immediately  after  the  landing, 
and  had  returned  by  homing 
beam  to  its  tiny  access  port 
in  the  thick  metal  side  of  the 
ship. 

While  Volval  waited  in  in- 
creasing irritation,  and  Jorik 
ran  his  tests,  Klendro,  the 
most  expendable  member  of 
the  expedition,  studied  his 
speech  over  and  over,  his 

JACK  SHARKEY 


three-valved  heart  squirting 
its  watery  blood  through  his 
tiny,  hairlike  arteries  and 
veins. 

Klendro  was  almost  a so- 
cial outcast  with  these  oth- 
ers, these  real  spacemen, 
though  his  job,  he  felt,  was  the 
most  important.  Klendro  was 
the  Venusian  ambassador  to 
the  governments  of  Earth.  He 
went  over  his  speech  again, 
hoping  that  the  Earth  broad- 
casts picked  up  now  and  then 
on  Venus  had  been  accurate 
enough  for  the  Venusian  lin- 
guists to  write  him  a speech 
that  wouldn’t  embarrass  the 
Earth  people  by  its  inane  mis- 
uses of  their  tongue. 

Broadcasts  had  indicated 
that  the  major  powers  on 
Earth  were  the  United  States 
— whatever  those  were — of 
America  and  Soviet  Russia. 
The  Russian  broadcasts,  how- 
ever, being  nothing  more  than 
a series  of  eulogies  declaring 
the  happiness  of  life  in  Russia, 
had  been  too  lacking  in 
breadth  to  give  the  linguists 
much  to  work  on.  They  had 
therefore  chosen  English  as 
the  tongue  in  which  Klendro 
was  to  make  his  speech. 

He  lifted  the  scroll  once 
more  and  began  reading  his 
speech  half  aloud,  having  a 
bit  of  trouble,  as  usual,  in  con- 
trolling the  square-tipped  sur- 
face of  his  tongue  in  forming 
the  unfamiliar  syllables. 

“Pipple  of  Arth,”  he  said, 
slowly  and  with  much  effort, 
“it  is  with  grett  plazzer  that 

TO  EACH  HIS  OWN 


we  mek  this,  tha  farst  contact 
with  arr  nebber  planet.  We 
are  from  tha  second  planet 
from  yer — or  mebbe  Uh  shudd 
seh  arr — sun.  Tha  planet  you 
knaw  as  Venus.  We  feel  that 
we  can  share  with  arr  nebber 
planet  the  fronts  of  arr — of 
arr — ” Klendro  braced  him- 
self, then  forced  out  awkward- 
ly, “moot-yoo-ull  sa-yan-tific 
ri-sarch . . .” 

He  refolded  the  long  coil  of 
the  scroll  and  stuffed  it  into 
his  belt-sack.  Well,  he  told 
himself,  for  better  or  worse. 
I’ve  got  to  give  this  speech. 
He  wished  he  were  anywhere 
but  here. 

SOME  of  the  broadcasts  had 
indicated  a certain  bellig- 
erency in  the  inhabitants  of 
this  alien  planet.  He  wondered, 
with  a kind  of  sick  fright,  if 
he  would  ever  have  the  oppor- 
tunity to  deliver  the  speech, 
even  badly.  Some  of  the  more 
esoteric  phrasings  of  the 
Earth  broadcasts  had  eluded 
the  interpretations  of  the  Ve- 
nusian linguists.  One  of  the 
more  recurrent  phrases  was  a 
“slug  in  the  guts.”  They  were 
not  sure  exactly  what  this  en- 
tailed, but,  from  the  context, 
the  linguists  were  certain  that 
it  was  something  dire,  possibly 
fatal. 

Klendro  was  a very  unhap- 
py Venusian. 

“Volval!”  Klendro  heard 
Drog  cry  out.  “Did  you  send 
that  stuff?” 

“Yes,”  the  light-beam  oper- 

91 


ator  called  back.  “I’m  waiting 
an  Jorik  now.” 

“All  set  here,”  called  Jorik, 
coming  into  Volval’s  compart- 
ment, followed  by  Gwann. 
“The  atmosphere  is  breath- 
able. A little  heavy  on  the  oxy- 
gen and  light  on  the  carbon 
dioxide,  but  that  was  expected 
before  we  took  off.  If  we  take 
deep  inhales  and  periodic  radi- 
ation, we  should  be  all  right.” 
“Fine,”  said  Gwann,  the 
pilot  and  leader,  as  Klendro 
came  into  the  room  with  the 
others.  “Better  keep  your  guns 
loose  in  their  holsters,  though. 
You  know  what  they’ve  told  us 
about  the  Earthmen.” 

“Hot-headed.”  Volval  nod- 
ded. 

“Will  we  take  the  skim- 
mers?” asked  Jorik.  “Or  do 
you  think  the  Earthmen  would 
prefer  being  met  without  the 
barrier-screens  around  us  ?” 
"They’d  prefer  it,  all  right !” 
said  Drog.  “However,  in  my 
opinion — ” 

“We’re  going  to  have  to 
chance  it  sooner  or  later  with- 
out the  screens,”  said  Gwann. 
“The  batteries  in  the  skim- 
mers won’t  last  forever.  We 
might  as  well  go  out  there  as 
we  are.” 

“Who  goes  first?”  asked 
Jorik. 

“Well,”  Gwann  shrugged, 
“if  the  crowds  look  hostile,  I 
should  go,  as  your  leader.  If 
they  seem  merely  curious, 
then  it’s  up  to  Klendro,  as  our 
ambassador,  to  make  his 
speech.” 


Jorik  frowned.  “Now,  wait, 
Gwann.  Perhaps  I ought  to  tell 
you.  The  sight  records  on  the 
robo-skimmer  showed  no  evi- 
dence of  Earthmen  outside  the 
ship.” 

“That’s  ridiculous,”  said 
Gwann,  his  eyes  flashing.  “Ve- 
nus reports  this  city  is  one  of 
the  most  populous.” 

Jorik  smiled  wryly.  “Then 
the  populace  certainly  ducked 
out  of  sight  quickly  when  they 
saw  the  robo-skimmer  com- 
ing.” 

Gwann  seemed  on  the  point 
of  making  a sharp  retort,  and 
instead  turned  away  toward 
the  exit  lock.  “Since  things 
seem  suspicious.  I’d  best  go 
first.” 

“Sir,”  said  Volval,  laying  a 
hand  upon  his  leader’s  arm. 

“Yes?”  queried  Gwann, 
pausing. 

“Good  luck,  sir,”  Volval  fal- 
tered, drawing  his  hand  back. 

“Thanks,”  said  Gwann,  not 
unkindly.  “For  Venus,”  he 
added. 

“For  Venus,”  the  others 
echoed. 

Gwann  released  the  safety 
lock  on  the  circular  metal  door 
and  turned  the  valve  handle. 
Slowly,  the  door  recessed  itself 
in  the  metal  pocket  in  the 
ship’s  wall,  and  Gwann  went 
out  into  the  yellow  glow  of  the 
sunlight  glittering  in  Times 
Square. 

The  sun  was  glowing  crim- 
son on  the  horizon  when 
the  five  Venusians  met  once 


92 


JACK  SHARKEY 


more  at  the  door  of  their  ship. 

“Nothing — no  clue,  no  peo- 
ple,” said  Jorik,  his  face  wrin- 
kled with  puzzlement.  “I  can’t 
understand  it.” 

“Perhaps  some  holo- 
caust . . . ?”  Volval  began 
weakly. 

“Or  a war?”  Drog  hinted 
gravely. 

“Impossible!”  said  Gwann, 
leaning  against  one  of  the  legs 
of  the  gigantic  ship.  “There 
is  a conspicuous  absence  of 
anything  that  might  be  con- 
strued as  a weapon  of  war. 
There  are  no  bodies  in  the 
buildings  or  in  the  streets.  No 
wreckage  anywhere.” 

“Perhaps  they  have  been 
frightened  by  our  appearance 
and  have  gone  into  hiding?” 
asked  Klendro,  fingering  the 
edge  of  his  now  futile  scroll 
where  it  protruded  from  his 
belt-sack. 

“Nonsense,”  said  their  lead- 
er. “From  all  we’ve  learned  of 
the  Earthmen,  fright  would 
only  make  them  aggressive. 
They  would  not  have  hidden 
from  us ; they’d  have  tried  to 
shoot  us  down  when  we 
emerged  from  the  ship.” 

“There  was  one  thing  . . .” 
said  Jorik  slowly.  “I  almost 
did  not  see  it,  but  its  shadow 
passed  close  by  me  on  the  side 
of  one  of  the  buildings,  and  I 
looked  up  barely  in  time  to  get 
a glimpse  of  it  before  it  van- 
ished.” 

“What  was  it  like?”  asked 
Gwann  quickly. 

“Some  sort  of  animal,  prob- 


ably carnivorous,”  said  Jorik. 
“I  cannot  be  certain,  of  course, 
but  1 saw  a mouth  with  teeth 
bespeaking  flesh-eating.  Quite 
a — ” he  repressed  a shudder — 
“quite  a large  mouth.” 

“Strange,”  said  Gwann. 
“Exceedingly  strange.  You 
saw  only  the  one?” 

Jorik  nodded. 

“Well,”  said  Gwann,  “one 
carnivore  cannot  have  ac- 
counted for  a population  that 
runs  into  the  millions.  Besides, 
the  Earthmen  would  be  able  to 
deal  with  mere  animal  life.” 

Klendro  remembered  the 
“slug  in  the  guts”  and 
blanched. 

“What  should  we  do,  sir?” 
asked  Volval.  “Our  orders 
were  to  make  peaceful  contact 
with  the  Earthmen.  If  there 
are  no  Earthmen — ?” 

“Calm  yourself,  Volval.” 
Gwann  smiled,  patting  the 
younger  man  upon  the  shoul- 
der. *‘If  there  are  Earthmen 
to  contact,  we’ll  make  that 
contact.  I have  an  idea.” 
“What,  sir?”  asked  Drog. 
“We  shall  each  take  one  of 
the  skimmers  and  investigate 
the  surface  of  the  planet.  Now, 
while  our  maps  are  incom- 
plete, I feel  that  Drog  can 
draw  us  up  competent  enough 
maps  to  guide  us  over  the  sur- 
face of  Earth.” 

“I  can  try,  sir,”  said  Drog. 
“We’ll  meet  back  here  at  the 
ship  in  five  days,”  said  Gwann. 
“All  of  you  take  along  enough 
supplies  for  five  days,  plus  an 

93 


TO  EACH  HIS  OWN 


extra  day’s  rations  in  case  of 
emergency.  The  homing  beam 
on  our  ship  will  bring  you 
safely  back  if  you  get  lost.” 
'‘One  thing,  sir,”  said  Jorik, 
his  brow  creased  in  a frown. 
"We’d  best  all  take  along  extra 
ammunition  for  the  guns.” 
"The  carnivores?” 

The  biochemist  nodded. 
"Where  there’s  one,  there  are 
bound  to  be  others.  That  one 
I saw  was  large  enough  to  bite 
a chunk  out  of  a skimmer.” 
Klendro,  pale  already,  lost 
more  color. 

Each  was  assigned  a conti- 
nent to  check.  Of  the  two 
extra  continents,  Drog  took 
one,  and  Gwann  the  other,  the 
consensus  being  that  the  pilot 
and  navigator  could  better  cov- 
er extra  territory  than  the 
others,  who  were  less  used  to 
piloting  the  sleek  skimmers. 

Volval  was  to  go  to  the 
Europe  - Asia  land  mass, 
Gwann  to  Africa  and  Antarc- 
tica, Klendro  to  Australia, 
Jorik  to  South  America,  and 
Drog  to  Arctica,  after  first 
checking  over  the  North 
American  Continent  on  which 
they  had  landed. 

"Something  exceedingly 
strange,”  said  Jorik,  before 
they  separated,  "about  the 
consolidation  of  their  civiliza- 
tion. So  much  wasted  land 
area.” 

"The  sooner  I get  back  to 
Venus,  the  happier  I’ll  be,” 
said  Gwann,  keeping  his  voice 
down  so  that  only  Jorik,  the 

94 


biochemist,  could  hear  him, 
"This  place  is  eerie.  It’s — it’s 
like  a ghost  planet.” 

"And  there’s  something 
wrong  about  the  buildings. 
They  are  abominably  ineffi- 
cient. I can  barely  conceive  the 
uses  of  some  of  the  artifacts.” 
"Maybe,”  said  Gwann  sud- 
denly, "we  never  will  know!” 
"Sir,”  said  Volval,  ap- 
proaching the  pilot,  "I’ve  dis- 
covered some  maps.”  He  held 
out  a packet  of  papers,  tinted 
blue  and  brown. 

"Good  work,  Volval,”  said 
Gwann,  taking  the  packet. 
"Where  did  you  find  them?” 
"In  one  of  those  small  shops, 
not  far  from  the  ship,  sir.  I 
cannot  read  the  designations, 
of  course,  but  I thought  that, 
by  a comparison  with  the 
maps  from  Venus  Observa- 
tory, we  might — ” 

"That’s  intelligent  think- 
ing,” said  Gwann,  nodding. 
"Their  maps  are  bound  to  be 
similar  to  ours.  Klendro! 
What  can  you  make  of  these?” 
The  ambassador  came  over 
and  took  the  thick  packet.  The 
paper  of  the  maps,  as  he  did 
so,  tore  apart,  and  bits  and 
pieces  of  the  soft,  pulpy  edges 
dropped  in  a shower  to  the 
street. 

"Not  very  substantial  mate- 
rial, is  it?”  he  muttered,  un- 
folding the  topmost  of  the 
maps.  He  looked  over  the  col- 
ored line  drawings  on  the  page 
in  some  bewilderment.  The  let- 
ters spelling  out  "Rand  Mc- 
Nally” meant  nothing  to  his 

JACK  SHARKEY 


alien  eyes.  The  map  itself  was 
a mercator  projection  of  the 
globe,  the  extreme  northern 
and  southern  continents  being 
somewhat  distorted.  After  a 
few  moments,  he  shook  his 
head. 

“I’m  sorry.  All  the  Earth 
broadcasts  that  we  intercepted 
gave  me  a working  knowledge 
of  the  spoken  word,  sir,  but 
I’m  afraid  their  actual  word 
symbols  are  beyond  me.  It 
would  take  trained  linguists 
months,  perhaps  years,  to  get 
a correlation  between  the 
sound  of  the  word  and  its  writ- 
ten image.” 

“Drog?”  said  Gwann,  turn- 
ing to  the  navigator. 

Drog  took  the  rotting  sheet 
in  his  hands  and  studied  the 
configurations  of  the  conti- 
nents. After  a bit,  he  bright- 
ened. 

“Sir,  I think  I can  figure 
this  out.  According  to  our 
landing  calculations,  we  are 
here.”  He  jabbed  a digit  at 
one  section  of  the  page,  and 
was  distressed  when  it  went 
right  through.  “The  material 
seems  to  be  falling  apart,  sir.” 

“Perhaps,”  Jorik  suggested, 
“it  is  undergoing  some  unnat- 
ural stress — possibly  tied  up 
somehow  with  whatever  it  was 
that  depopulated  this  city?” 

“A  good  point,  Jorik,”  said 
Gwann. 

Along  black  shadow  slid 
across  the  pavement  near 
their  feet  and  the  five  Venu- 
sians,  very  much  startled,  look- 


ed overhead.  They  were  barely 
in  time  to  see  the  huge  gray 
form  of  the  carnivore  before 
it  vanished  behind  a sign  atop 
a nearby  building  which  bore 
the  mystifying  information 
“Pepsi-Cola.” 

“There,  sir!”  cried  Jorik. 
“That’s  exactly  like  the  one  I 
saw  earlier!” 

“Those  teetkl”  Klendro 
whimpered.  “They  could  bite 
one  of  us  in  two!” 

“And  what  they  could  do  to 
us,  they  could  do  to  an  Earth- 
man,”  Gwann  said  specula- 
tively. “From  the  sizes  of  the 
doorways  in  these  buildings, 
and  the  clothing  on  display  in 
the  shop  windows,  the  Earth- 
men  could  not  have  been  much 
larger  than  us.” 

“Sir,”  said  Drog,  holding  up 
the  map  so  that  the  leader 
could  see  it,  “look  here.  This 
blue  section  that  runs  all  over 
the  map.  You  see,  it’s  marked 
circle-arc-fork-cone-zigzag.” 
“Yes,”  said  Gwann.  “I  see. 
What  about  it?” 

“Well,  sir,  it  recurs  on  the 
map,  but  each  time  it  has  a 
new  group  of  symbols  in  front 
of  it.  What  can  it  mean?” 
Gwann  frowned  and  studied 
the  five  symbols : 0-C-E-A-N. 

“Seems  to  suggest  a similar- 
ity between  all  of  them,”  said 
Jorik.  “Perhaps  the  first  syro- 
bol  only  means  that  the  section 
is  in  a different  place.” 

All  five  Venusians  studied 
A-R-C-T-I-C,  A-N-T-A-R-C- 
T-I-C,  I-N-D-I-A-N,  and  the 
other  symbols  that  were  used 

95 


TO  EACH  HIS  OWN 


in  conjunction  with  the  mys- 
terious 0-C-E-A-N. 

''A  tribal  tabu!”  exclaimed 
Jorik. 

‘'What  are  you  talking 
about,  Jorik?”  said  Gwann 
impatiently. 

“You  recall  I said  there 
seemed  something  strange 
about  the  consolidation  of  the 
populace  in  certain  areas  ? The 
wasted  land  space?” 

“Yes,  yes.  What  about  it?” 

“All  these  sections  marked 
0-C-E-A-N  are  the  unused 
areas.  There  must  have  been 
some  sort  of  tribal  superstition 
about  dwelling  in  those  areas. 
That  would  explain  why  all 
the  people  lived  on  the  higher 
ground  here.” 

“I — I would  have  expected 
to  find  something  blue  in  that 
area,”  said  Gwann  uncertain- 
ly. “Or  else  why  is  it  so  mark- 
ed?” 

“Sir,”  said  Jorik  respectful- 
ly, “some  sections  are  colored 
very  oddly — even  in  red.  Yet 
no  such  colors  were  found  any- 
where on  the  planet  by  our 
telescopes,  were  they?  And 
none  of  these  large  blue  areas 
shows  population  centers. 
Tabu  areas,  obviously — not  to 
be  inhabited.” 

Gwann  shivered.  “The  long- 
er I stay  here,  the  less  I like 
it.  Come  on.  Each  of  you  take 
one  of  these  maps.  Drog,  you 
assign  us  to  a specific  sector 
by  these  maps,  rather  than  by 
ours.  We'll  meet  back  here  at 
the  ship  in  five  days.” 

One  by  one,  the  Venusians 


got  aboard  their  skimmers, 
making  sure  the  protective 
barriers  were  working,  and 
then  glided  off  to  investigate 
the  ghost  planet. 

Drog,  sliding  in  his  trim 
craft  over  the  Noiih 
American  continent,  stopped 
many  times,  at  each  large  city 
he  discovered,  but  the  story 
was  the  same  as  in  New  York. 
Empty  buildings,  no  particu- 
lar damages  except  what  could 
be  accounted  for  by  decay  and 
long  disuse.  Every  so  often — 
more  often  than  he  enjoyed — 
a flock  of  the  huge  carnivores 
soared  above  his  skimmer, 
their  long,  dark  shadows  slith- 
ering over  the  cockpit  in  the 
dancing  yellow  sunlight. 

Once,  one  of  them  broke 
away  from  the  group  and 
spiraled  down  to  investigate 
his  craft.  Drog  jabbed  the  but- 
ton of  the  nose-gun  hastily, 
and  a lance  of  metal  sped  with 
a flicker  of  light  into  the  thick 
hide  of  the  oncoming  monster. 

A thick  spray  of  blood  gush- 
ed from  the  wound,  as  the 
great  beast  writhed  in  torment 
before  sliding  down  through 
the  atmosphere  toward  the 
distant  ground.  Its  blood  hung 
in  a grisly  trail  over  it  as  it 
plunged,  marking  its  passage, 
then  began  to  fall  slowly  after 
the  beast. 

Drog  was  by  now  almost  a 
mile  beyond  the  point  where 
he  had  fired  at  the  carnivore, 
but  he  wasn't  too  far  away  to 
see  its  hungry  companions 


96 


JACK  SHARKEY 


swoop  down  after  it  and  begin 
rending  it  even  before  it 
reached  the  ground. 

He  shuddered  and  looked 
away. 

As  he  soared  onward,  he  de- 
termined to  keep  the  barrier 
on  all  night  long,  while  he 
slept.  If  he  could  sleep  . . . 

North  America  taken  care 
of,  as  well  as  possible  in  his 
limited  time,  Drog  headed 
northward  for  the  continent  of 
Arctica. 

Nothing  but  bare  land  and 
ocean  bottom  met  his  eye. 

Feeling  increasingly  queasy, 
he  nosed  the  skimmer  around 
and  set  it  swishing  back  to- 
ward New  York. 

JORIK  watched  the  shadow 
of  his  skimmer  pacing  his 
own  motion  over  the  tops  of 
the  tangled  jungle  trees  below. 
He  inclined  the  nose  of  the 
craft  downward,  and  began  a 
shallow  glide  toward  a clear- 
ing in  the  midst  of  the  dense 
undergrowth. 

Braking  the  skimmer  gent- 
ly, he  let  it  settle  slowly  into 
the  resilient  grip  of  the  tall 
yellow-brown  grass  in  the 
clearing.  Making  sure  his  gun 
was  loaded  and  the  safety 
catch  off,  he  slid  open  the 
cockpit  and  eased  himself  out. 

He  was — though  of  course 
he  didn’t  know  it — deep  in  the 
Matto  Grosso  of  South  Amer- 
ica. Everywhere  he  looked, 
violent  flares  of  color  peeped 
at  him  through  the  twisted, 
swaying  vines  that  clung 

TO  EACH  HIS  OWN 


everjwhere.  Nature  had  run 
riot  in  the  jungle.  No  subtle- 
ties of  shading  or  form  here. 
Long,  sharp  leaves  gleamed 
greenly  on  all  sides  of  the  bio- 
chemist. Radiant  reds  glowed 
from  the  shadowy  depths  of 
forest  beyond  the  small  clear- 
ing. Golden  streamers  hung  in 
profusion  from  each  crooked 
elbow  of  the  chaotically  twist- 
ed tree  branches  all  about  him. 

Despite  the  brilliance  and 
beauty  of  it,  Jorik  sensed  a 
hidden  menace  in  the  place. 
He  should,  at  that  spot,  have 
been  hearing  shrieking,  roar- 
ing, bleating,  grunting  of  ani- 
mals, the  cries  of  birds  and 
skittering  of  insects.  There 
was  nothing  but  that  all- 
pervading  silence. 

Jorik  moved  slowly  away 
from  the  skimmer  and  a^ 
proached  the  nearest  tree,  his 
scientist’s  eye  pondering  some- 
thing not-quite-right-looking 
about  it.  As  he  got  to  it,  and 
touched  it,  the  thick,  corru- 
gated bark  fell  into  powder 
between  his  fingers.  He  press- 
ed, pried,  thumped  and  tugged 
at  the  tree.  It  was  dead.  Dead 
and  rotting. 

His  heart  fluttered  annoy- 
ingly in  his  breast.  There  was 
something  frightening  about 
the  way  things  were  going.  He 
could  understand  a war  de- 
stroying human  life,  even  civi- 
lization, but  this — this  was 
primeval  territory.  The  beasts, 
the  plants,  the  lower  forms  of 
life — ^these  should  have  sur- 
vived. 


97 


But  they  hadn’t. 

Suddenly  afraid,  he  rushed 
back  to  his  skinuner,  slid  into 
the  cockpit  and  took  off,  rising 
at  a swift  vertical  angle  from 
the  dead  jungle. 

Toward  the  eastern  coast  of 
South  America,  he  saw  many 
fine  hotels,  with  magnificent 
curves  of  beaches  following 
the  perimeter  of  the  land  mass 
on  which  the  people  had  lived 
— already  he  was  thinking  of 
them  in  the  past  tense — and 
Jorik  wondered  at  the  absence 
of  the  blue  0-C-E-A-N  that 
should  have  bordered  those 
beaches. 

But  as  he  glided  outward 
from  the  coast,  curving  steadi- 
ly northward  toward  New 
York,  he  saw  that  the  beaches, 
with  their  pale  silver  sands, 
extended  outward  and  down- 
ward toward  only  more  land, 
soon  becoming  rocky,  then 
turning  at  last  into  mud  and 
ooze,  with  a sprinkling  of 
blackish-green  weeds.  But  no 
visible  trace  of  the  mysterious 
0-C-E-A-N. 

GWANN,  searching  through- 
out Africa,  fared  no  bet- 
ter. Only  the  silence,  the 
rotting  vegetation,  and  the 
absence  of  landlocked  life. 
Higher  in  the  atmosphere  of 
the  ghost  planet,  he  saw  many 
of  the  carnivores,  but  also 
smaller  animals,  soaring  in 
gloriously  colored  groups,  and 
seemingly  haiTnless.  There 
were  times  when  he  had  to 
pass  through  literal  clouds  of 


these  smaller  beasts,  whizzing 
and  bobbing  and  gliding  past 
him  by  the  millions,  only  to 
vanish  in  the  hazy  distance 
with  a blaze  of  color. 

Africa  having  proven  fruit- 
less, Gwann  directed  the  skim- 
mer toward  the  opposite  polar 
region  from  that  which  Drog 
was  to  investigate. 

Like  Drog,  he  found  only 
land  there,  and  no  continent. 
The  land  was  ocean  bottom. 
He  consulted  his  map,  but 
there  was  nothing  below  his 
skimmer  that  corresponded 
with  the  cryptic  mark- 
ings: A-N-T-A-R-C-T-I-C 

0-C-E-A-N. 

He  turned  his  skimmer 
around  and  started  back  for 
New  York. 

VOLVAL,  CRUISING  from 
the  Alps  to  the  steppes  and 
back  again,  found  nothing  to 
explain  the  disappearance  of 
the  Earthmen.  Many  cities, 
many  lands,  hamlets  and  vil- 
lages, huts  and  palaces  ...  It 
was  the  same  every  place.  Si- 
lence. Fleeting  glimpses  of  the 
carnivores  and  sometimes 
tinier-but-similar  beasts.  But 
no  Earthmen. 

KLENDRO  HAD  passed  over 
the  surface  of  Australia  fifty 
times  in  his  five  alloted  days 
without  discovering  life  of  any 
sort  other  than  the  carnivores. 
And  they,  for  some  reason, 
were  unusually  well  represent- 
ed in  that  region.  They  had 
come  at  his  skimmer  in  grin- 


98 


JACK  SHARKEY 


ning  swanns,  but  the  barrier 
held  firm,  and  the  unlucky 
nearer  ones  spun  away  with 
scorched  flesh  glowing  red,  to 
be  tom  to  pieces  by  their  com- 
panions. 

When  he  decided  further  in- 
vestigation was  useless,  Klen- 
dro  was  very  glad  to  leave 
that  place.  A group  of  the 
carnivores  gave  chase,  but 
Klendro  spun  his  ship  about 
long  enough  to  shoot  metal 
darts  into  two  of  them.  As  the 
others  swerved  back  to  begin 
an  impromptu  feast  on  their 
wounded  companions,  Klendro 
turned  the  skimmer  up  to  full 
speed  and  made  quick  connec- 
tion with  the  homing  device 
on  the  ship,  back  in  New  York. 

“I  DON’T  understand  it,”  said 
Gwann,  on  the  night  of  the 
fifth  day.  The  Venusians  were 
all  back  in  the  ship  in  Times 
Square,  having  a meal  to- 
gether that  was  partly  to  sat- 
isfy their  appetites,  partly  to 
celebrate  being  together  again 
with  their  friends. 

“It’s  incredible,  all  right,” 
said  Jorik.  “A  whole  planet — 
and  of  a high  degree  of  civili- 
zation, too — wiped  out.  The 
very  vegetation  dying.  And 
that’s  the  frightening  part  of 
it;  Not  dead,  mind  you,  dying. 
That  means  that  whatever 
happened  here  happened  re- 
cently.” 

“And  those  constructions  in 
the  buildings,”  said  Volval, 
staring  bemusedly  at  the  wall, 
“the  ones  marked  S-t-a-i-r- 


w-a-y.  I wonder  what  they 
were  for.” 

“Obviously  they  were  deco- 
rations added  by  the  archi- 
tect,” said  Drog.  “Any  fool 
can  see  they  served  no  pur- 
pose. If  anything,  they  hinder- 
ed the  use  of  the  access  slots 
to  the  various  levels  of  the 
buildings.” 

“Well,”  said  Gwann,  “our 
work  here  is  through.  We’d 
better  be  heading  back  to 
Venus.” 

“And  your  report?”  asked 
Jorik. 

“Positive,”  said  Gwann. 
"Favorable  for  immediate  pos- 
session and  colonization.” 

“It’s  a good  little  planet.” 
Jorik  nodded.  “But  why  do 
you  suppose  the  Earthmen  all 
vanished  ?” 

“We’ll  probably  never 
know,”  Volval  sighed. 

“Not  unless,”  said  Klendro, 
indicating  a bale  of  salvaged 
Earth  materials,  “our  lin- 
guists and  archeologists  can 
make  some  sense  out  of  this 
junk  here.” 

“Let’s  hope  so,”  Gwann 
said.  ‘The  mysteriousness  of 
this  whole  thing  is  going  to 
drive  me  crazy  if  they  don’t.” 

“Well,  sir,”  said  Drog,  con- 
sulting his  charts,  “if  we’re 
going  to  take  advantage  of 
juxtaposition  of  the  two 
planets — ” 

“Right,”  said  Gwann,  turn- 
ing and  making  his  way  to- 
ward the  pilot’s  compartment. 
“We’ll  depart  from  Earth  in 
ten  minutes.  Secure  all  hatches 


TO  EACH  HIS  OWN 


99 


and  loose  objects  until  we  get 
into  space.” 

The  crew  hurried  to  their 
tasks. 

Halfway  to  Venus,  voi- 
val,  paging  idly  through 
one  of  the  rotting  books  from 
Earth,  gave  a shout. 

“What  is  it?”  said  Gwann, 
coming  into  the  light-beam 
operator’s  compartment, 
stretching  to  ease  the- muscle 
cramps  from  his  long  stint  in 
the  pilot’s  cabin. 

“I’ve  found  a picture  of  the 
carnivore,  sir!”  said  Volval 
proudly.  “Look,  sir.” 

“Hmm,”  said  Gwann,  study- 
ing the  fading  illustration.  “I 
believe  you’re  right.  Jorik!” 
The  biochemist  popped  into 
the  compartment,  his  face  cu- 
rious. “Yes,  sir?  What  is  it?” 
“Isn’t  this  one  of  your  car- 
nivores, Jorik?”  asked  Gwann, 
giving  him  the  book. 

Jorik,  reaching  for  the 
book,  nudged  one  of  the  news- 
papers atop  the  stack  near  the 
cabin  wall,  and  the  front  page 
fluttered  unnoticed  to  the  floor. 
Across  its  surface  were  spread 


the  incomprehensible — to  Ve- 
nusian eyes — ^words : 

LITHIUM  BOMB  TEST 
COULD  DESTROY  WORLD 

Noted  Scientist  Declares  Dan- 
ger of  Polar  Experiment ; 

Melted  Polar  Caps 
May  Flood  En- 
tire Globe 

Jorik  studied  the  picture 
carefully,  his  gills  trickling  a 
faint  stream  of  bubbles  as  he 
concentrated  on  the  image  of 
the  carnivore.  “Yes,  that’s  one 
of  them,  sure  enough.  I wish 
I could  read  Earth  writing.  I 
wonder  just  what  a T-i-g-e-r- 
s-h-a-r-k  is.” 

Volval  bobbed  up  from  his 
place  and  floated  to  a port  in 
the  ceiling,  through  which  he 
could  see  the  tiny,  glittering 
ball  of  Earth,  its  blue-green 
surface  sparkling  like  a star 
against  the  black  backdrop  of 
empty  space. 

“I  can’t  understand  w^t 
killed  them,”  he  said.  “Living 
conditions  were  ideal” 

END 


IF  YOU'VE  MOVED 

. . . please  let  us  know,  will  you?  We  want  to  get  your  copies  of  IF 
to  you  when  they  should  arrive^-at  least  a week  before  the  news- 
stands get  theirs — but  we  can’t  unless  you  inform  us  that  you've 
moved  or  are  moving. 

Send  both  addresses,  the  old  and  the  new,  to: 

SUBSCRIPTION  DEPT.  IF  MAGAZINE 
421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y. 


THE  AUTUMN  AFTER  NEXT 


By  MARGARET  ST.  CLAIR 


Being  a wizard  missionary  to  the  Free’l 


needed  more  than  magic — 


it  called  for  a miracle! 


The  spell  the  Free’l  were 
casting  ought  to  have 
drawn  the  moon  down  from 
the  heavens,  made  water  run 
uphill,  and  inverted  the  order 
of  the  seasons.  But,  since  they 
had  got  broor’s  blood  instead 
of  newt’s,  were  using  alganon 
instead  of  vervet  juice,  and 
were  three  days  later  than  the 
solstice  anyhow,  nothing  hap- 
pened. 

Neeshan  watched  their  an- 
tics with  a bitter  smile. 

He’d  tried  hard  with  them. 


The  Free’l  were  really  a chal- 
lenge to  evangelical  wizardry. 
They  had  some  natural  talent 
for  magic,  as  was  evinced  by 
the  frequent  attempts  they 
made  to  perform  it,  and  they 
were  interested  in  what  he 
told  them  about  its  capacities. 
But  they  simply  wouldn’t  take 
the  trouble  to  do  it  right. 

How  long  had  they  been 
stamping  around  in  their  cir- 
cle, anyhow?  Since  early 
moonset,  and  it  was  now  al- 
most dawn.  No  doubt  they 


101 


would  go  on  stamping  all  next 
day,  if  not  interrupted.  It  was 
time  to  call  a halt. 

Neeshan  strode  into  the 
middle  of  the  circle.  Rhn,  the 
village  chief,  looked  up  from 
his  drumming. 

“Go  away,”  he  said.  “You'll 
spoil  the  chann." 

“What  charm?  Can't  you 
see  by  now,  Rhn,  that  it  isn't 
going  to  work?” 

^'Of  course  it  will.  It  just 
takes  time.” 

'‘Hell  it  will.  Hell  it  does. 
Watch.” 

Neeshan  pushed  Rhn  to  one 
side  and  squatted  down  in  the 
center  ofr  the  circle.  From  the 
pockets  of  his  black  robe  he 
produced  stylus,  dragon's 
blood,  oil  of  anointing,  and 
salt. 

He  drew  a design  on  the 
ground  with  the  stylus,  drop- 
ped dragon's  blood  at  the  cor- 
ners of  the  parallelogram,  and 
touched  the  inner  cusps  with 
the  oil.  Then,  sighting  careful- 
ly at  the  double  red  and  white 
sun,  which  was  just  coming 
up,  he  touched  the  outer  cusps 
with  salt.  An  intense  smoke 
sprang  up. 

WHEN  the  smoke  died 
away,  a small  lizardlike 
creature  was  visible  in  the 
parallelogram. 

“Tell  the  demon  what  you 
want,”  Neeshan  ordered  the 
Free'l. 

The  Free'l  hesitated.  They 
had  few  wants,  after  all, 
which  was  one  of  the  things 

102 


that  made  teaching  them  mag- 
ic difficult. 

“Two  big  dyla  melons,”  one 
of  the  younger  ones  said  at 
last. 

“A  new  andana  necklace,” 
said  another. 

“A  tooter  like  the  one  you 
have,”  said  Rhn,  who  was  am- 
bitious. 

“Straw  for  a new  roof  on 
my  hut,”  said  one  of  the  older 
females. 

“That's  enough  for  now,” 
Neeshan  interrupted.  “The 
demon  can't  bring  you  a toot- 
er, Rhn — you  have  to  ask  an- 
other sort  of  demon  for  that. 
The  other  things  he  can  get. 
Sammel,  to  work!” 

The  lizard  in  the  parallelo- 
gram twitched  its  tail.  It  dis- 
appeared, and  returned  almost 
immediately  with  melons,  a 
handsome  necklace,  and  an 
enormous  heap  of  straw. 

“Can  I go  now?”  it  asked. 

“Yes.”  Neeshan  turned  to 
the  Free'l,  who  were  sharing 
the  dyla  melons  out  around 
their  circle.  “You  see?  ThaVs 
how  it  ought  to  be.  You  cast  a 
spell.  You're  careful  with  it. 
And  it  works.  Right  away.” 

“When  you  do  it,  it  works,” 
Rhn  answered. 

“Magic  works  when  any- 
body does  it.  But  you  have  to 
do  it  right.” 

Rhn  raised  his  mud-plaster- 
ed shoulders  in  a shrug.  “It's 
such  a lot  of  dreeze,  doing  it 
that  way.  Magic  ought  to  be 
fun.”  He  walked  away, 
munching  on  a slice  of  the 


MARGARET  ST.  CLAIR 


melon  the  demon  had  brought. 

Neeshan  stared  after  him, 
his  eyes  hot.  “Dreeze”  was  a 
Free’l  word  that  referred 
originally  to  the  nasal  drip 
that  accompanied  that  race’s 
virulent  head  colds.  It  had 
been  extended  to  mean  almost 
anything  annoying.  The 
Free’l,  who  spent  much  of 
their  time  sitting  in  the  rain, 
had  a lot  of  colds  in  the  head. 

Wasn’t  there  anything  to  be 
done  with  these  people?  Even 
the  simplest  spell  was  too 
dreezish  for  them  to  bother 
with. 

He  was  getting  a headache. 
He’d  better  perform  a head- 
ache-removing spell. 

He  retired  to  the  hut  the 
Free’l  had  assigned  to  him. 
The  spell  worked,  of  course, 
but  it  left  him  feeling  soggy 
and  dispirited.  He  was  still 
standing  in  the  hut,  wonder- 
ing what  he  should  do  next, 
when  his  big  black-and-gold 
tooter  in  the  corner  gave  a 
faint  “woof.”  That  meant 
headquarters  wanted  to  com- 
municate with  him. 

Neeshan  carefully  aligned 
the  tooter,  which  is  basically 
a sort  of  lens  for  focusing 
neural  force,  with  the  rising 
double  suns.  He  moved  his 
couch  out  into  a parallel  posi- 
tion and  lay  down  on  it.  In  a 
minute  or  two  he  was  deep  in 
a cataleptic  trance. 

The  message  from  head- 
quarters was  long,  circuitous, 
and  couched  in  the  elaborate, 
ego-caressing  ceremonial  of 

THE  AUTUMN  AFTER  NEXT 


high  magic,  but  its  gist  was 
clear  enough. 

“Your  report  received,”  it 
boiled  down  to.  “We  are  glad 
to  hear  that  you  are  keeping 
on  with  the  Free’l.  We  do  not 
expect  you  to  succeed  with 
them — none  of  the  other  mag- 
ical missionaries  we  have  sent 
out  ever  has.  But  if  you 
should  succeed,  by  any  chance, 
you  would  get  your  senior 
warlock’s  rating  immediately. 
It  would  be  no  exaggeration, 
in  fact,  to  say  that  the  high- 
est offices  in  the  Brotherhood 
would  be  open  to  you.” 

Neeshan  came  out  of  his 
trance.  His  eyes  were 
round  with  wonder  and  cupid- 
ity. His  senior  warlock’s  rat- 
ing— why,  he  wasn’t  due  to 
get  that  for  nearly  four 
more  six  hundred-and-five-day 
years.  And  the  higest  offices 
in  the  Brotherhood — ^that 
could  mean  anything.  Any- 
thing! He  hadn’t  realized  the 
Brotherhood  set  such  store  on 
converting  the  Free’l.  Well, 
now,  a reward  like  that  was 
worth  going  to  some  trouble 
for. 

Neeshan  sat  down  on  his 
couch,  his  elbows  on  his  knees, 
his  fists  pressed  against  his 
forehead,  and  tried  to  think. 

The  Free’l  liked  magic,  but 
they  were  lazy.  Anything  that 
involved  accuracy  impressed 
them  as  dreezish.  And  they 
didn’t  want  anything.  That 
was  the  biggest  difficulty. 
Magic  had  nothing  to  offer 

103 


them.  He  had  never,  Neeshan 
thought,  heard  one  of  the 
Free’l  express  a want. 

Wait,  though.  There  was 
Rhn. 

He  had  shown  a definite 
interest  in  Neeshan’s  footer. 
Something  in  its  intricate, 
florid  black-and-gold  curves 
seemed  to  fascinate  him.  True, 
he  hadn’t  been  interested  in 
it  for  its  legitimate  uses, 
w'hich  were  to  extend  and  de- 
velop a magician’s  spiritual 
power.  He  probably  thought 
that  having  it  would  give  him 
more  prestige  and  influence 
among  his  people.  But  for  one 
of  the  Free’l  to  say  “I  wish  I 
had  that”  about  anything 
whatever  meant  that  he  could 
be  worked  on.  Could  the  foot- 
er be  used  as  a bribe? 

Neeshan  sighed  heavily. 
Getting  a footer  was  painful 
and  laborious.  A footer  was 
carefully  fitted  to  an  individ- 
ual magician’s  personality ; in 
a sense,  it  was  a part  of  his 
personality,  and  if  Neeshan 
let  Rhn  have  his  footer,  he 
would  be  letting  him  have  a 
part  of  himself.  But  the 
stakes  were  enormous. 

Neeshan  got  up  from  his 
couch.  It  had  begun  to  rain, 
but  he  didn’t  want  to  spend 
time  performing  a rain-re- 
pelling spell.  He  wanted  to 
find  Rhn. 

Rhn  was  standing  at  the 
edge  of  the  swamp,  luxuriat- 
ing in  the  downpour.  The 
mud  had  washed  from  his 
shoulders,  and  he  was  already 

104 


sniffling.  Neeshan  came  to  the 
point  directly. 

“I’ll  give  you  my  footer,’’ 
he  said,  almost  choking  over 
the  words,  “if  you’ll  do  a spell 
— a simple  spell,  mind  you — 
exactly  right.” 

Rhn  hesitated.  Neeshan  felt 
an  impulse  to  kick  him.  Then 
he  said,  “Well  ...” 

Neeshan  began  his  instruc- 
tions. It  wouldn’t  do  for  him 
to  help  Rhn  too  directly,  but 
he  was  willing  to  do  every- 
thing reasonable.  Rhn  listen- 
ed, scratching  himself  in  the 
armpits  and  sneezing  from 
time  to  time. 

After  Neeshan  had  been 
through  the  directions  twice, 
Rhn  stopped  him.  “No,  don’t 
bother  telling  me  again — it’s 
just  more  dreeze.  Give  me  the 
materials  and  I’ll  show  you. 
Don’t  forget,  you’re  giving 
me  the  footer  for  this.” 

He  started  off,  Nee- 
shan after  him,  to  the  lat- 
ter’s hut.  While  Neeshan 
looked  on  tensely,  Rhn  began 
going  through  the  actions 
Neeshan  had  told  him.  Half- 
way through  the  first  decad, 
he  forgot.  He  inverted  the  or- 
der of  the  hand-passes,  sprin- 
kled salt  on  the  wrong  point, 
and  mispronounced  the  names 
in  the  invocation.  When  he 
pulled  his  hands  apart  at  the 
end,  only  a tiny  yellow  flame 
sprang  up. 

Neeshan  cursed  bitterly. 
Rhn,  however,  was  delighted. 
“Look  at  that,  will  you!”  he 


MARGARET  ST.  CLAIR 


exclaimed,  clapping  his  chap- 
ped, scabby  little  hands  to- 
gether. “It  worked!  I'll  take 
the  tooter  home  with  me 
now.” 

“The  tooter?  For  that? 
You  didn’t  do  the  spell  right.” 
Rhn  stared  at  him  indig- 
nantly. “You  mean,  you’re 
not  going  to  give  me  the  toot- 
er after  all  the  trouble  I went 
to?  I only  did  it  as  a fay  or, 
really.  Neeshan,  I think  it’s 
very  mean  of  you.” 

“Try  the  spell  again.” 

“Oh,  dreeze.  You’re  too  im- 
patient. You  never  give  any- 
thing time  to  work.” 

He  got  up  and  walked  off. 
For  the  next  few  days, 
everybody  in  the  village 
avoided  Neeshan.  They  all  felt 
sorry  for  Rhn,  who’d  worked 
so  hard,  done  everything  he 
was  told  to,  and  been  cheated 
out  of  his  tooter  by  Neeshan. 
In  the  end  the  magician,  curs- 
ing his  own  weakness,  surren- 
dered the  tooter  to  Rhn.  The 
accusatory  atmosphere  in  the 
normally  indifferent  Free’l 
was  intolerable. 

But  now  what  was  he  to 
do?  He’d  given  up  his  tooter 
— he  had  to  ask  Rhn  to  lend 
it  to  him  when  he  wanted 
to  contact  headquarters — and 
the  senior  rating  was  no 
nearer  than  before.  His  head 
ached  constantly,  and  all  the 
spells  he  performed  to  cure 
the  pain  left  him  feeling 
wretchedly  tired  out. 

Magic,  however,  is  an  art 
of  many  resources,  not  all  of 

THE  AUTUMN  AFTER  NEXT 


them  savory.  Neeshan,  in  his 
desperation,  began  to  invoke 
demons  more  disreputable 
than  those  he  would  ordinar- 
ily have  consulted.  In  effect, 
he  turned  for  help  to  the 
magical  underworld. 

His  thuggish  informants 
were  none  too  consistent.  One 
demon  told  him  one  thing,  an- 
other something  else.  The 
consensus,  though,  was  that 
while  there  was  nothing  the 
Free’l  actually  wanted  enough 
to  go  to  any  trouble  for  it 
(they  didn’t  even  want  to  get 
rid  of  their  nasal  drip,  for 
example — in  a perverse  way 
they  were  proud  of  it),  there 
was  one  thing  they  disliked 
intensely — Neeshan  himself. 

The  Free’l  thought,  the 
demons  reported,  that  he  was 
inconsiderate,  tactless,  offi- 
cious, and  a crashing  bore. 
They  regarded  him  as  the 
psychological  equivalent  of 
the  worst  case  of  dreeze  ever 
known,  carried  to  the  nth 
power.  They  wished  he’d  drop 
dead  or  hang  himself. 

Neeshan  dismissed  the  last 
of  the  demons.  His  eyes  had 
begun  to  shine.  The  Free’l 
thought  he  was  a nuisance, 
did  they?  They  thought  he 
was  the  most  annoying  thing 
they’d  encountered  in  the 
course  of  their  racial  history? 
Good.  Fine.  Splendid.  Then 
he’d  really  annoy  them. 

He’d  have  to  watch  out  for 
poison,  of  course.  But  in  the 
end,  they’d  turn  to  magic  to 
get  rid  of  him.  They’d  have  to. 

105 


And  then  he’d  have  them. 
They’d  be  caught. 

One  act  of  communal  magic 
that  really  worked  and  they’d 
be  sold  on  magic.  He’d  be  sure 
of  his  senior  rating. 

NEESHAN  began  his  cam- 
paign immediately.  Where 
the  Free’l  were,  there  was  he. 
He  was  always  on  hand  with 
unwanted  explanations,  hy- 
percritical objections,  and 
maddening  “wouldn’t -it- be - 
betters.” 

Whereas  earlier  in  his 
evangelical  mission  he  had 
confined  himself  to  pointing 
out  how  much  easier  magic 
would  make  life  for  the  Free’l, 
he  now  counciled  and  advised 
them  on  every  phase  of  their 
daily  routine,  from  mud- 
smearing  to  rain-sitting,  and 
from  the  time  they  got  up  un- 
til they  went  to  bed.  He  even 
pursued  them  with  advice 
after  they  got  into  bed,  and 
told  them  how  to  run  their 
sex  lives — advice  which  the 
Free’],  who  set  quite  as  much 
store  by  their  sex  lives  as  any- 
body does,  resented  passion- 
ately. 

But  most  of  all  he  harped 
on  their  folly  in  putting  up 
with  nasal  drip,  and  instruct- 
ed them  over  and  over  again 
in  the  details  of  a charm — a 
quite  simple  charm — for  get- 
ting rid  of  it.  The  charm 
would,  he  informed  them, 
work  equally  well  against 
anything — or  person  — that 
they  found  annoying. 

106 


The  food  the  Free’l  brought 
him  began  to  have  a highly 
peculiar  taste.  Neeshan  grin- 
ned and  hung  a theriacal 
charm,  a first-class  antidote 
to  poison,  around  his  neck. 
The  Free’l’s  distate  for  him 
bothered  him,  naturally,  but 
he  could  stand  it.  When  he 
had  repeated  the  anti-annoy- 
ance charm  to  a group  of 
Free’l  last  night,  he  had  no- 
ticed that  Rhn  was  listening 
eagerly.  It  wouldn’t  be  much 
longer  now. 

On  the  morning  of  the  day 
before  the  equinox,  Neeshan 
was  awakened  from  sleep  by 
an  odd  prickling  sensation  in 
his  ears.  It  was  a sensation 
he’d  experienced  only  once  be- 
fore in  his  life,  during  his 
novitiate,  and  it  took  him  a 
moment  to  identify  it.  Then 
he  realized  what  it  was.  Some- 
body was  casting  a spell 
against  him. 

At  last!  At  last!  It  had 
worked ! 

Neeshan  put  on  his  robe 
and  hurried  to  the  door  of  the 
hut.  The  day  seemed  remark- 
ably overcast,  almost  like 
night,  but  that  was  caused  by 
the  spell.  This  one  happened 
to  involve  the  optic  nerves. 

He  began  to  grope  his  way 
cautiously  toward  the  village 
center.  He  didn’t  want  the 
Free’l  to  see  him  and  get  sus- 
picious, but  he  did  want  to 
have  the  pleasure  of  seeing 
them  cast  their  first  accurate 
spell.  (He  was  well  protected 
against  wind-damage  from  it, 

/MRGARET  ST.  CLAIR 


of  course.)  When  he  was  al- 
most at  the  center,  he  took 
cover  behind  a hut.  He  peered 
out. 

They  were  doing  it  right.  Oh, 
what  a satisfaction!  Neeshan 
felt  his  chest  expand  with 
pride.  And  when  the  spell 
worked,  when  the  big  wind 
swooped  down  and  blew  him 
away,  the  Free'l  would  cer- 
tainly receive  a second  magi- 
cal missionary  more  kindly. 
Neeshan  might  even  come 
back,  well  disguised,  himself. 

The  ritual  went  on.  The 
dancers  made  three  circles  to 
the  left,  three  circles  to  the 
right.  Cross  over,  and  all 
sprinkle  salt  on  the  interstices 
of  the  star  Rhn  had  traced  on 
the  ground  with  the  point  of 
a knife.  Back  to  the  circle. 
One  to  the  left,  one  to  right, 
while  Rhn,  in  the  center  of  the 
circle,  dusted  over  the  salt 
with — with  what  ? 

“lley!’’  Neeshan  yelled  in 
sudden  alarm.  “Not  brim- 
stone! Watch  out!  You're  not 
doing  it  ri — " 

His  chest  contracted  sud- 
denly, as  if  a large,  stony 
hand  had  seized  his  thorax 
above  the  waist.  He  couldn't 
breathe,  he  couldn't  think,  he 


couldn't  even  say  “Ouch!”  It 
felt  as  if  his  chest — no,  his 
whole  body — was  being  com- 
pressed in  on  itself  and  turn- 
ing into  something  as  hard  as 
stone. 

He  tried  to  wave  his  tiny, 
heavy  arms  in  a counter- 
charm; he  couldn't  even  in- 
hale. The  last  emotion  he 
experienced  was  one  of  bitter- 
ness. He  might  have  known 
the  Free'l  couldn't  get  any- 
thing right. 

The  Free'l  take  a dim  view 
of  the  small  stone  image 
that  now  stands  in  the  center 
of  their  village.  It  is  much  too 
heavy  for  them  to  move,  and 
while  it  is  not  nearly  so  much 
of  a nuisance  as  Neeshan  was 
when  he  was  alive,  it  incon- 
veniences them.  They  have  to 
make  a detour  around  it  when 
they  do  their  magic  dances. 

They  still  hope,  though,  that 
the  spells  they  are  casting  to 
get  rid  of  him  will  work  even- 
tually. If  he  doesn't  go  away 
this  autumn,  he  will  the  au- 
tumn after  next.  They  have  a 
good  deal  of  faith  in  magic, 
when  you  come  right  down  to 
it.  And  patience  is  their  long 
suit.  END 


mm 


THE  AUTUMN  AFTER  NEXT 


107 


Space  Taxi 
$1,29 


Designed  by  Foremost  Rocket  and  Space  Authority! 
In  Fabulous  Hobby  Kits  by  MONOGRAM! 


If  you  are  exerted  about  tomorrow  and  get  a thrill  out  of 
the  idea  of  a man  in  space  ...  get  a Willy  Ley  Space 
Model  in  a fascinating  Monogram  hobby  kit. 


TV  Orbiter  $1.29 


Eos//  Fascinating  Assembly 

These  exciting  new  models  bring  space  travel  closer  and 
add  reality  to  what  you  read.  Designed  by  Willy  Ley, 
author  of  "Conquest  of  Space"  and  other  thrillers. 
Molded  in  brilliant  color  plastic  by  Monogram,  leading 
producer  of  fine  hobby  kits.  Assembly  is  easy — fascinat- 
ing. No  tools  required.  Models  are  beautiful  show  and 
conversation  pieces,  with  separating  stages  and  many 
operational  features. 

Informative  Booklet  included 

Detailed  pictorial  instructions  and  booklet  by  Willy  Ley 
describing  the  real  space  ship  and  its  uses,  included 
with  each  model.  Use  coupon  on  opposite  page. 


Guaranteed  by  IF  — Science  Fiction 


IF  Science  Ficfieii  421  Hudson  Street,  New  York  14,  N.  Y* 

Send  at  once,  postpaid,  Willy  Ley  Space  Models  as  checked  below.  Remittance  for  $ 

enclosed. 

□ Space  Taxi  $1.29  □ TV  Orbiter  $1.29 

□ Passenger  Rocket  $1.49  □ Orbital  Rocket  $1.49 

Name 

Address 

City ^ Zone State — 


SPACE  TAXI 

Transport  and  work  ship.  Opening  cargo  door  and 
cargo.  Pilot  and  three  figures  in  space  suits.  Ter- 
restrial globe  mounting  and  base.  SVz  inches  long. 
Molded  in  four  colors.  Booklet  by  Willy  Ley.  $1.29 

PASSENGER  ROCKET 

Two  manned  and  separating  stages  for  passenger  serv- 
ice in  outer  space  at  100  mile  altitude.  Retractable 
landing  gear,  launching  pad.  5 figures.  Molded  in  3 
colors.  Booklet  by  Willy  Ley.  $1.49 


TV  ORBITER 

Television  from  outer  space.  Depicts  actual  rocket, 
designed  to  put  a television  camera  in  orbit  around 
the  earth.  3 separating  stages,  television  nose  cone, 
launching  pad.  service  tower.  3 figures.  Molded  in 
four  colors.  Booklet  by  Willy  Ley.  $1.29 

ORBITAL  ROCKET 

Manned  rocket  for  controlled  orbital  flight  around  the 
earth.  3 separating  stages,  landing  gear,  removable 
fuel  tanks,  launching  pad,  5 figures.  Molded  in  four 
colors.  Booklet  by  Willy  Ley.  $1.49 


Easy-to-Assemble,  All-Plastic 

Aai4l«AM4ia»  lAlilli#  I At#  ^ 

Order  on  Coupon  Below.  We  Pay  Postage.  Delivery  Guaranteed. 


V\ 


EXChdn^^  ByJ.  F.  BONE 


How  Muld  any  race  look  so 


ferocious  and  yet  he  peace- 


ful — and  devise  so  nasty  a 


weapon? 


I 

I COULDN’T  help  listening 
to  the  big  spaceman  sitting 
alone  at  the  corner  table.  He 
wasn’t  speaking  to  me — that 
was  certain — nor  was  his  flat, 
curiously  uninflected  voice  di- 
rected at  anyone  else.  With 
some  sui'prise  I realized  that 
he  was  talking  to  himself. 
People  don’t  do  that  nowa- 
days. They’re  adjusted. 

He  noted  my  raised  eye- 
brows and  grinned,  his  square 
teeth  white  against  the  dark 
planes  of  his  face.  “I’m  not 
psycho,’’  he  said.  “It’s  just  a 
bad  habit  I picked  up  on 
Lyrane.” 

“Lyrane?”  I asked. 

“It  hasn’t  been  entered  on 
the  charts  yet.  Just  discover- 
ed.’’ His  voice  was  inflected 
now.  And  then  it  changed 
abruptly.  “If  you  must  know, 
this  is  ethanol — CoHjjOHt— 


111 


and  I drink  it.”  He  looked  at 
me  with  an  embarrassed  ex- 
pression in  his  blue  eyes.  “It’s 
just  that  I’m  not  used  to  it 
yet,”  he  explained  without  ex- 
plaining. “It’s  easier  when  I 
vocalize.” 

“You  sure  you’re  all  right?” 
I asked.  “Want  me  to  call  a 
psychologician  ?” 

“No.  I’ve  just  been  certified 
by  Decontamination.  I have  a 
paper  to  prove  it.” 

“But—” 

“Draw  up  a chair,”  he  in- 
vited. “I  hate  to  drink  alone. 
And  I’d  like  to  talk  to  some- 
body.” 

I smiled.  My  talent  was 
working  as  usual.  I can’t  walk 
into  a bar  without  someone 
telling  me  his  life  history. 
Nice  old  ladies  buttonhole  me 
at  parties  and  tell  me  all  about 
their  childhoods.  Boys  tell  me 
about  girls.  Girls  tell  me  about 
boys.  Politicians  spill  party 
secrets  and  pass  me  tips. 

Something  about  me  makes 
folks  want  to  talk.  It’s  a tal- 
ent and  in  my  business  it’s  an 
asset.  You  see.  I’m  a freelance 
writer.  Nothing  fancy  or  sig- 
nificant, just  news,  popular 
stuff,  adventure  stories,  prob- 
lem yarns,  romances,  and  mys- 
teries. I’ll  never  go  down  in 
history  as  a literary  great,  but 
it’s  a living — and  besides  I 
meet  the  damnedest  charac- 
ters. 

So  I sat  down. 

“I  guess  you’re  not  conta- 
gious if  you’ve  been  through 
Decontamination,”  I said. 


He  looked  at  me  across 
the  rim  of  an  oversized 
brandy  sniffer — a Napoleon, 
I think  it’s  called — and  wag- 
gled a long  forefinger  at  my 
nose.  “The  trouble  wfith  you 
groundhogs  is  that  you’re  al- 
ways thinking  we  spacers  are 
walking  hotbeds  of  contagion 
all  primed  to  wreck  Earth. 
You  should  know  better.  Any- 
thing dangerous  has  about 
as  much  chance  of  getting 
through  Decontamination  as 
an  ice  cube  has  of  getting 
through  a nuclear  furnace.” 
“There  was  Martian  Fe- 
ver,” I reminded  him. 

“Three  centuries  ago  and 
you  still  remember  it,”  he 
said.  “But  has  there  been  any- 
thing else  since  Decontamina- 
tion was  set  up?” 

“No,”  I admitted,  “but  that 
was  enough,  wasn’t  it?  We 
still  haven’t  reached  the  pre- 
Mars  population  level.” 

“Who  wants  to?”  He  sipped 
at  the  brownish  fluid  in  the 
glass  and  a shudder  rippled 
the  heavy  muscles  of  his  chest 
and  shoulders.  He  grinned 
nastily  and  took  a bigger 
drink.  “There,  that  ought  to 
hold  you,”  he  muttered.  He 
looked  at  me,  that  odd  embar- 
rassed look  glinting  in  his 
eyes.  “I  think  that  did  it.  No 
tolerance  for  alcohol.” 

I gave  him  my  puzzled  and 
expectant  look. 

He  countered  with  a gesture 
at  the  nearly  empty  brandy 
glass.  I got  the  idea.  I signaled 
autoservice — a conditioned  re- 


112 


J.  F.  BONE 


flex  developed  over  years  of 
pumping  material  out  of 
spacemen — and  slipped  my  ID 
into  the  check  slot  of  the  robot 
as  it  rolled  up  beside  us  and 
waited,  humming  expectantly. 

“Rum,”  the  spaceman  said. 
“Demerara,  four  ounces.” 
“You  are  cautioned,  sir,” 
the  autoservice  said  in  a flat 
mechanical  voice.  “Demerara 
rum  is  one  hundred  fifty  proof 
and  is  not  meant  to  be  ingested 
by  terrestrial  life-forms  with- 
out prior  dilution.” 

“Shut  up  and  serve,”  I said. 
The  robot  clicked  disapprov- 
ingly, gurgled  briefly  inside  its 
cubical  interior  and  extruded 
a pony  glass  of  brownish 
liquid.  “Sir,  you  will  undoubt- 
edly end  up  in  a drunkard’s 
grave,  dead  of  hepatic  cirrho- 
sis,” it  informed  me  virtuous- 
ly as  it  returned  my  ID  card. 
I glared  as  I pushed  the  glass 
across  the  table. 

“Robots,”  I said  contemptu- 
ously. It  was  lost  on  that  me- 
tallic monstrosity.  It  was  al- 
ready rolling  away  toward 
another  table. 

The  spaceman  poured  the 
pony  glass  into  his  Napoleon, 
sniffed  appreciatively,  sipped 
delicately  and  extended  a 
meaty  hand.  “My  name’s  Hal- 
sey,” he  said.  “Captain  Roger 
Halsey.  I skipper  the  Two  Txvo 
Four.” 

“The  Bureau  ship  that  land- 
ed this  morning?” 

He  nodded.  “Yeah.  I’m  one 
of  the  Bureau’s  brave  boys.” 
There  was  a faint  sneer  in  his 


voice.  “The  good  old  Bureau 
of  Extraterrestrial  Explora- 
tion. The  busy  BEE.”  He  fail- 
ed to  pronounce  the  individual 
letters.  “You’re  a reporter, 
aren’t  you?”  he  asked  sud- 
denly. 

“How’d  you  guess?” 

“That  little  trick  of  not  an- 
swering an  introduction.  Most 
of  you  sludge  pumpers  do  it, 
but  I never  knew  why.” 
“Libel  and  personal  privacy 
laws,”  I said.  “If  you  don’t 
know  who  we  are,  you  can*t 
sue.” 

He  grinned.  “Okay.  I don't 
care.  Keep  your  privacy.  All 
I want  is  someone  to  talk  to.” 
I smiled  inwardly. 

“Think  my  job’s  exciting?” 
he  asked.  “Skipper  of  an  ex- 
ploration ship.  Poking  my  nose 
into  odd  corners  of  the  Galaxy. 
Seeing  what’s  over  Hie  hill.” 
“Of  course,”  I said. 

“Well,  you’d  be  wrong 
ninety-nine  times  out  of  a 
hundred.  It's  just  a job.  Most 
of  it  is  checking — or  did  you 
know  that  only  one  sun  in  ten 
has  planets,  and  only  one  in 
ten  thousand  has  a spectrum 
that  will  support  human  life, 
and  that  only  one  in  ten  thou- 
sand planets  has  Earthlike 
qualities?  So  you  can  imagine 
how  we  felt  when  we  ran 
across  Lyrane.”  He  grimaced 
wryly.  “I  had  it  on  the  log  as 
Halsey’s  Planet  for  nearly  two 
weeks  before  we  discovered  it 
was  inhabited.”  He  shrugged. 
“So  the  4iame  was  changed. 
Too  bad.  Always  did  want  to 

113 


CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


have  a planet  named  after  me. 
But  ni  make  it  yet.” 

I clucked  sympathetically. 
Capt,  Halsey  sighed,  and  this 
is  what  he  told  me. 

II 

IT’S  a beautiful  world,  Ly- 
rane  is.  Like  Earth  must 
have  been  before  it  got  clut- 
tered up  with  people.  No 
cities,  no  smoke,  no  industrial 
complexes — ^just  green  plains, 
snowy  mountains,  dark  for- 
ests, blue  seas,  and  white  polar 
caps  all  wrapped  in  cotton 
clouds  swimming  in  the  clear- 
est atmosphere  you  ever  saw. 
It  made  my  eyes  ache  to  look 
at  it.  And  it  affected  the  crew 
the  same  way. 

We  were  wild  to  land.  We 
came  straight  in  along  the 
equatorial  plane  until  we  hit 
the  Van  Allen  Belt  and  the 
automatics  took  over.  We 
stopped  dead,  matched  intrin- 
sics  and  skirted  the  outer 
band,  checking  the  radiation 
quality  and  the  shape  of  the 
Belt.  It  was  a pure  band  that 
dipped  down  at  the  poles  to 
form  entry  zones.  There  was 
not  a sign  of  bulges  or  indus- 
trial contaminants. 

Naturally  we  had  every- 
thing trained  on  the  planet 
while  we  made  our  sweeps — 
organic  detectors,  radar,  spec- 
troanalytic  probes  — all  the 
gadgets  the  BEE  equips  us 
with  to  make  analysis  easy 
and  complete.  The  readings 
were  so  homelike  that  every 


man  was  landsick.  I wasn’t 
any  different  from  the  rest  of 
them,  but  I was  in  command 
and  I had  to  be  cautious  about 
setting  the  Two  Two  Four 
down  until  we’d  really  wrung 
the  analytic  data  dry. 

So,  while  the  crew  grumbled 
about  hanging  outside  on  a 
skyhook,  we  kept  swinging 
around  in  a polar  orbit  until 
we  knew  that  world  below  us 
like  a baby  knows  its  mother. 
It  checked  clean  to  five  decimal 
places,  which  is  the  limit  of 
our  gadgetry.  Paradise,  that’s 
what  it  was — a paradise  un- 
trod by  human  foot.  And 
eveiy  foot  on  the  ship  was 
itching. 

“When  we  gonna  land. 
Skipper?”  Alex  Baranov  ask- 
ed me.  It  was  a gross  breach 
of  discipline,  but  I forgave 
him.  Alex  was  the  second  en- 
gineer, an  eager  kid  on  his 
first  flight  out  from  Earth. 
Like  most  youngsters,  he 
thought  there  was  romance  in 
space,  but  right  now  he  was 
landsick.  Even  worse  than 
most  of  us.  And,  like  most 
kids,  he’d  leap  where  angels’d 
dread  to  walk  on  tiptoe. 

“We’ll  land,”  I assured  him. 
“You’ll  be  down  there  pretty 
soon.” 

He  hurried  off  to  tell  the 
others. 

We  set  the  ship  down  in  the 
middle  of  one  of  the  continen- 
tal land  masses  in  an  open 
plain  surrounded  by  forest 
and  ran  a few  more  tests  be- 
fore we  stepped  out,  planted 


114 


J.  F.  BONE 


the  flag,  and  claimed  the  place 
for  the  Confederation.  After 
that  we  had  an  impromptu 
celebration  to  thoroughly  en- 
joy the  solid  feel  of  ground 
under  our  feet  and  open  sky 
overhead.  It  lasted  all  of  five 
minutes  before  we  came  to 
our  senses  and  posted  a guard. 

It  was  five  minutes  too  long. 
Alex  Baranov  had  a chance  to 
get  out  of  sight  and  go  explor- 
ing, and,  like  a kid,  he  took  it. 
We  didn’t  miss  him  for  nearly 
ten  minutes  more,  and  in  fif- 
teen minutes  a man  can  cover 
quite  a bit  of  territory. 

“Anyone  see  where  he 
went?”  I asked. 

“He  was  wearing  a menti- 
com,”  one  of  the  crew  offered. 
“Said  he  wanted  to  look 
around.” 

“The  idiot!”  I snapped.  “He 
had  no  business  going  off  like 
that.” 

“Nobody  told  him  not  to,” 
Dan  Warren  said.  Dan  was 
my  executive  officer,  and  a 
good  hand  in  case  of  trouble, 
but  he  left  the  command  deci- 
sions to  me,  and  of  course  I 
figured  that  everybody  knew 
the  cardinal  rule  of  first  land- 
ings. The  net  result  was  that 
Alex  had  disappeared. 

I went  back  into  the  ship 
and  broke  out  another  men- 
ticom. 

“Alex !”  I broadcasted.  “Re- 
turn to  ship  at  once !” 

“I  can’t,  Skipper,”  Alex's 
projection  came  back  to  me, 
“I’m  surrounded.” 

“By  what?  Where?” 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


“They  look  sorta  human — 
bigger  than  us.  I’m  near  the 
edge  of  the  forest  nearest  the 
ship.  I can’t  do  anything.  I 
didn’t  bring  a blaster.”  There 
was  panic  in  his  thoughts. 
And  then  suddenly  I saw  two 
hairy  bipeds  flash  across 
Alex’s  vision.  Both  of  them 
were  carrying  spears.  The 
nearest  one  jumped  and  lung- 
ed. The  scene  dissolved  in  a 
blaze  of  red  panic  and  the  pro- 
jection cut  off  as  though  some- 
one had  turned  a switch. 

I had  a fix  now  and  turned 
to  face  a knob  of  forest  jutting 
out  into  the  plain.  Near  the 
forest’s  edge  I saw  a flurry  of 
movement  that  vanished  as  I 
watched. 

“Break  out  a ’copter,”  I or- 
dered. 

“Why?”  Warren  asked,  and 
then  I realized  that  I alone  of 
all  the  crew  had  seen  what 
had  happened  to  Alex. 

I told  them. 

The  search,  of  course,  was 
unproductive.  I didn’t  ex- 
pect that  it  would  be  anything 
else.  I was  pretty  certain  that 
Alex  was  a casualty,  I’d  felt 
people  die  while  wearing  men- 
ticoms,  and  the  same  blank 
sense  of  emptiness  had  blotted 
out  Alex.  It  was  a bad  deal  all 
around,  I liked  that  kid. 

But  Alex’s  death  had  pro- 
vided data.  This  world  was  in- 
habited and  the  inhabitants 
weren’t  friendly.  So  I had  the 
crew  stake  out  a perimeter 
which  we  could  energize  with 

1U 


the  ship’s  engines,  and  acti- 
vated a couple  of  autoguards 
for  patrol  duty.  Alex  wasn’t 
a pleasant  thought,  but  we 
weren’t  equipped  to  retrieve 
bodies.  So  I wrote  him  in  the 
log  as  missing  and  let  it  go  at 
that. 

I had  to  correct  the  entry  a 
week  later  when  Alex  came 
walking  up  to  the  perimeter 
as  large  as  life  and  just  as 
healthy,  wearing  a mild  sun- 
burn, a sheepish  expression, 
and  nothing  else. 

The  autoguard  announced 
his  coming  and  I headed  the 
delegation  that  met  him.  I 
read  him  the  riot  act,  and 
after  I’d  finished  chewing  on 
him  he  was  pinker  than  ever. 

“Okay,  sir — so  I was  a 
fool,”  he  said.  “But  they  didn’t 
hurt  me.  Scared  me  half  to 
death,  but  once  they  realized 
I was  intelligent  there  was  no 
trouble.  They  were  fascinated 
by  my  clothes.”  Alex  grinned 
ruefully.  “And  they’re  pretty 
strong.  They  peeled  me.” 

“Obviously,”  I said  coldly. 

“They  have  a village  back 
in  the  woods.”  He  pointed 
vaguely  behind  him.  “It’d  pay 
to  take  a look  at  it.” 

“Mister  Baranov,”  I said. 
“If  I don’t  throw  you  in  the 
brig  for  what  you’ve  done,  it’s 
only  because  you  may  have 
brought  back  some  informa- 
tion we  can  use.  What  are 
these  natives  like?  What  did 
they  do  to  you  besides  making 
you  a strip-tease  artist?  What 
cultural  level  are  they?  How 

116 


many  of  them  do  you  estimate 
there  are?  What  do  they  look 
like?  Get  up  to  the  ship  and 
report  to  Lieutenant  Warren 
for  interrogation  and  draw 
new  clothing.”  I had  the  same 
half  exasperated,  half  angry 
tone  that  a relieved  mother 
has  when  one  of  her  young- 
sters returns  home  late  but 
unharmed. 

Alex  must  have  recognized 
it,  because  he  grinned  as 
he  went  off. 

I contacted  Warren  on  the 
intercom.  “Dan,”  I said,  “Ba- 
ranov’s back — apparently  un- 
harmed. I want  him  given  the 
works.  When  you’ve  gotten 
everything  you  can  get,  have 
a man  detailed  to  watch  him. 
If  he  so  much  as  looks  suspi- 
cious, heave  him  in  the  brig.” 
Warren’s  answering  projec- 
tion had  a laugh  in  it.  “Always 
cautious,  hey.  Skipper?  Okay, 
I’ll  see  that  he  gets  the  busi- 
ness.” 

It  turned  out  that  Alex 
didn’t  have  much  real  infor- 
mation except  for  a descrip- 
tion of  the  natives,  their  vil- 
lage, and  their  attitude  toward 
him.  It  was  about  what  you’d 
expect  from  a kid,  interesting 
but  far  from  helpful. 

The  delegation  of  natives 
showed  up  a half  hour  later. 
They  came  walking  across  the 
open  space  between  the  ship 
and  the  forest  as  though  they 
hadn’t  a care  in  the  world. 
Four  of  them — ^big  hairy  hu- 
manoids, carrying  spears. 

J.  F.  BONE 


They  were  naked  as  animals. 
Not  that  they  needed  clothes 
with  all  that  hair,  but  just  the 
same  their  appearance  gave 
me  a queasy  feeling — like  I 
was  looking  at  man’s  early  an- 
cestors suddenly  come  to  life. 

If  you  can  imagine  a furry 
humanoid  seven  feet  tall,  with 
the  face  of  an  intelligent  go- 
rilla and  the  braincase  of  a 
man,  you’ll  have  a rough  idea 
of  what  they  looked  like — ex- 
cept for  their  teeth.  The  ca- 
nines would  have  fitted  better 
in  the  face  of  a tiger,  and 
showed  at  the  corners  of  their 
wide,  thin-lipped  mouths,  giv- 
ing them  an  expression  of 
ferocity. 

They  came  trotting  straight 
across  the  plain,  moving  with 
grace  and  power.  All  external 
signs  pointed  to  them  being  a 
carnivorous,  primitive  race. 
Hunters,  probably.  The  mus- 
cles of  my  scalp  twitched  as 
some  deep-buried  instinct  in- 
side me  whispered,  “Competi- 
tion!” 

I’VE  met  plenty  of  human- 
oids, but  these  were  the 
first  that  roused  any  emotion 
other  than  curiosity.  Perhaps 
it  was  their  fierce  appearance, 
or  the  bright,  half-contemptu- 
ous  intelligence  in  their  eyes, 
or  the  confident  arrogance  in 
their  approach,  or  merely  that 
they  looked  more  like  us  than 
the  others  I had  met.  What- 
ever it  was,  it  was  strong,  and 
I had  the  impression  that  the 
feeling  was  mutual. 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


“Stop!”  I said  as  they  ap- 
proached the  periphery. 

“Why  should  we?”  the  fore- 
most native  replied  in  perfect 
Terran. 

“Because  that  barrier’ll 
bum  you  to  a nice  crisp  cinder 
if  you  don’t.” 

“That’s  a good  reason,”  the 
native  said,  nodding. 

Then  the  delayed  reaction 
took  over  and  the  shock  nearly 
floored  me,  until  I saw'  that 
he  was  w'earing  Alex’s  men- 
ticom.  Well,  that  explained  the 
language  and  the  feeling  of 
mutual  distrust — and  it  could 
explain  why  I thought  Alex 
had  died  back  there  in  the  jun- 
gle. A mental  communicator 
snatched  from  its  wearer’s 
head  can  give  that  impression. 

But  it  raised  an  entirely 
new  set  of  questions.  Where 
did  this  savage  learn  to  oper- 
ate the  circlet  and  how  did  he 
recognize  its  purpose?  I guess 
I w'asn’t  too  smart,  because 
the  native  was  tuned  to  me 
and  I wasn’t  shielding  my 
thoughts  at  all. 

He  chuckled — it  sounded 
like  the  purr  of  a cat.  “We  are 
not  stupid,  Earthman.” 

“So  I see,”  I said  uneasily. 

“I  am  K’wan,  chief  of  this 
segment.  1 wish  to  know  why 
you  are  here.” 

“To  survey  your  world.  We 
are  members  of  the  Bureau  of 
Extraterrestrial  Exploration. 
It  is  our  job  to  make  surveys 
of  planets.” 

“Why?” 

“For  trade,  colonization, 

117 


and  exploitation,”  I answered. 
There  was  no  sense  in  giving 
him  a dishonest  explanation. 
With  him  wearing  that  com- 
municator, it  would  have  done 
no  good  to  try. 

“And  what  have  you  de- 
cided about  us?” 

“That’s  not  our  job.  We  just 
investigate  and  report.  What 
happens  next  is  not  our  affair. 
But  if  you’re  worrying — don’t. 
There  are  plenty  of  worlds 
available  without  bothering 
inhabited  places.  Since  you 
are  intelligent,  we  would  prob- 
ably like  to  trade  with  you,  if 
you  have  anything  to  trade — 
but  that,  of  course,  is  up  to 
you.  We  never  intrude  where 
we  are  not  wanted,  as  long  as 
we  are  treated  with  respect. 
If  we  are  attacked,  however, 
that  is  a different  story.”  It 
was  the  old  respect-and-threat 
routine  that  worked  with 
primitive  races.  But  I wasn’t 
at  all  sure  it  was  working 
npw. 

“Strange,”  K’wan  said.  “I 
would  have  sworn  you  were 
a predatory  race.  You  are 
enough  like  us  to  be  our  little 
cousins.”  He  scratched  his 
head  with  a surprisingly  hu- 
man gesture.  “In  your  posi- 
tion I would  have  attacked  to 
show  my  power  and  inspire 
respect.  Perhaps  you  are  tell- 
ing the  truth.” 

“A  predator  can  grow  soft 
when  he  has  too  much  prey,” 
1 said. 

“Aye,  there  is  truth  in  that. 
But  what  is  too  easy  and  how 

118 


much  is  too  much?  And  does 
a man  change  his  habits  of 
eating  just  because  he  is  fat?” 
“You  can  find  out.” 

“I  do  not  think  that  would 
be  wise,”  the  native  said.  “Al- 
though you  are  physically 
weak,  you  sound  confident. 
Therefore  you  are  strong.  And 
strength  is  to  be  respected.  Let 
us  be  friends.  We  will  make  an 
agreement  with  you.” 

1 SHOOK  my  head.  “It  is  not 
our  place  to  make  agree- 
ments. We  only  observe.” 
“You  have  not  done  much  of 
that,”  he  said  pointedly.  “You 
sit  here  and  send  your  ma- 
chines over  our  seas  and  for- 
ests, but  you  do  not  see  for 
yourselves.  You  cannot  learn 
this  way.” 

“We  learn  enough,”  I said 
shortly. 

“We  have  talked  of  you  at 
our  council,”  K’wan  continued, 
“and  we  think  that  you  should 
know  more  before  you  depart. 
So  we  have  come  to  make  you 
an  offer.  Let  four  of  your  men 
come  with  me,  and  four  of 
mine  will  stay  with  you.  We 
will  exchange — and  you  can 
see  our  ways  while  we  see 
yours.  That  would  help  us  un- 
derstand each  other.” 

It  sounded  reasonable.  An 
exchange  of  hostages — or  call 
it  a cultural  exchange,  if  you’d 
prefer.  I told  him  that  I’d 
think  it  over  and  to  come  back 
tomorrow.  He  nodded,  tunied, 
and  together  with  his  retinue 
disappeared  into  the  jungle. 

J.  F.  BONE 


WE  HASHED  K’wan’s 
proposal  over  at  a board 
meeting  that  night  and  de- 
cided that  we’d  take  it.  The 
exact  status  of  Lyranian  cul- 
ture worried  us.  It  is  a cardi- 
nal rule  never  to  underesti- 
mate an  alien  culture  or  to 
judge  it  by  surface  appear- 
ances. So  we  organized  a team 
that  would  form  our  part  of 
the  “cultural  exchange.” 

I would  go,  of  course.  If 
K’wan  could  visit  us,  I could 
hardly  stay  back.  Alex  was 
selected  partly  because  he  was 
an  engineer,  mostly  because 
he’d  been  over  the  ground 
before.  Ed  Barger,  our  ecolo- 
gist, and  Patrick  Allardyce, 
our  biologist,  made  up  the  re- 
mainder of  the  party.  I’d  have 
liked  to  take  the  padre  and 
Doc,  but  Doc  was  more  valua- 
ble at  base,  and  if  I could  have 
only  four  men,  I wanted  fight- 
ing men. 

“Now,”  I said,  “we’ll  take 
along  a tight-beam  communi- 
cator. Coupled  to  our  menti- 
coms,  it  should  be  able  to 
reach  the  ship  and  put  what 
we  see  and  what  happens  on 
permanent  record.”  Then  I 
turned  to  Dan  Warren.  “If 
anything  goes  wrong,  don’t  try 
to  rescue  us.  Finish  your  ob- 
servations and  get  out.  You 
understand?  And  get  those  ex- 
change natives  into  Interroga- 
tion. Condition  them  to  the 
eyeballs  with  cooperation  dog- 
ma. We  may  need  some 
friends  here  when  the  second 
echelon  makes  a landfall.” 


Warren  nodded.  I didn’t 
have  to  elaborate. 

The  native  village  was 
about  what  I expected  from 
our  reconnaissance  flights.  It 
was  beautifully  camouflaged. 
You  couldn’t  tell  it  from  the 
rest  of  the  forest  except  that 
the  trees  were  larger  and  were 
hollow — apparently  hewn  out 
with  patient  care  to  make  a 
comfortable  living  space  in- 
side. Lyranians  lived  in  one 
place,  if  what  I could  see  of 
their  dwellings  was  any  crite- 
rion. I wanted  to  look  inside, 
but  K’wan  hustled  us  down  the 
irregular  “street”  that  wound 
through  the  grove  of  giant 
trees  until  we  finally  came  to 
the  granddaddy  of  them  all,  a 
trunk  nearly  forty  feet  in 
diameter. 

K’wan  gestured  at  the  tree. 
“Your  house  while  you  are 
here.  We  made  it  for  you 
Earthmen.”  His  voice  came 
over  my  menticom  and  was 
duly  recorded  on  the  ship, 
since  we  were  in  constant  con- 
tact, giving  our  impressions 
of  the  place.  So  far  it  was 
strictly  SOP. 

“Thanks,”  I said.  “We  ap- 
preciate it.”  I was  really 
touched  at  this  tribute.  K’wan 
had  probably  evacuated  his 
own  house  to  furnish  us  quar- 
ters where  we  could  be  to- 
gether. The  size  of  it  indicated 
that  it  must  be  the  chief’s 
residence.  But  like  all  primi- 
tives he  had  to  lie  a little  and 
the  fiction  of  making  this  place 
for  us  was  a way  of  salvaging 

119 


CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


pSide  in  the  face  of  our  tech- 
nological superiority. 

He  walked  inside  and  we 
followed,  expecting  to  find  a 
gloomy  hole — but  instead  the 
room  glowed  with  a soft  light 
that  came  from  the  walls 
themselves.  The  air  was  cool 
and  comfortable,  a pleasing 
contrast  to  the  heat  outside. 

“What  the — ” I began,  but 
Allardyce  was  already  peering 
at  the  walls. 

“A  type  of  luminous  fun- 
gus,” he  said.  “A  saprophyte. 
Lives  on  the  wood  of  this  tree 
and  gives  off  light.  Clever.” 

I shut  my  mouth  and  looked 
around.  There  were  other 
rooms  opening  off  this  one  and 
along  one  wall  a knobby  imita- 
tion of  a staircase  led  upward 
to  a hole  overhead. 

“Hmmm,  a regular  sky- 
scraper,” Ed  Barger  com- 
mented, noting  the  direction 
of  my  gaze.  “Well,  we  should 
not  be  crowded,  at  any  rate.” 
I had  been  noticing  some- 
thing was  wrong  without  re- 
alizing it.  You  know  the  feel- 
ing you  get  when  you’ve  lost 
something,  but  can’t  quite  re- 
member what  it  was.  Then  my 
neurons  made  connections  and 
I realized  that  the  communi- 
cator and  the  menticom  were 
both  as  dead  as  if  we  were  in 
a lead  box. 

Quietly  I moved  to  the  door 
— and  Dan’s  voice  hammered 
in  my  ears : “Skipper ! Answer 
me!  What’s  wrong?” 

“Nothing,  Dan,”  I said.  “We 
just  went  into  the  quarters 

120 


they  assigned  us.  Something 
about  them  blocks  transmis- 
sion and  reception.  We’re  all 
fine.” 

“Oh.”  Dan  sounded  relieved. 
“For  a minute  I was  wor- 
ried.” 

“One  of  the  boys’ll  call  in 
every  two  hours,”  I assured 
him.  “If  you  don’t  hear  from 
us  then,  it’ll  be  time  to  do 
something.” 

“Okay,  Skipper,  but  what’ll 
I do?” 

“That’ll  be  your  decision,” 
I said.  “You’ll  be  ranking  offi- 
cer.” 

Dan’s  chuckle  was  humor- 
less. “Thanks,  but  I hope  we 
keep  on  hearing  from  you.” 

“Don’t  worry — you  will. 
These  people  look  worse  than 
they  really  are.  At  least  they 
have  been  nice  so  far.” 

“They’d  better  stay  that 
way,”  Dan  replied  grimly. 

It  was  my  turn  to  chuckle. 
“Keep  calm  and  keep  your 
blasters  dry.  I’m  going  inside 
now.  You’ll  hear  from  us  in 
two  hours.” 

Ed  BARGER  looked  at  me  a 
trifle  oddly  as  I came 
through  the  doorway.  “A 
while  ago  you  were  laughing 
at  that  story  K’wan  was  tell- 
ing us  about  making  this 
house  for  us.  I caught  your 
undertone.” 

“Sure.  What  about  it?” 
“Well,  I’m  not  so  sure  he 
was  lying.” 

“Huh?” 

“Take  a look  around  you.” 


J.  F.  BONE 


I did.  It  was  a nice  room, 
considering  its  origin — low 
benches  around  the  walls,  a 
table  and  four  chairs  in  the 
center,  a soft,  thick  floor  cov- 
ering that  was  a pleasure  to 
the  feet. 

“See  anything  unusual?” 
Ed  asked. 

“No,”  I said. 

“What  about  those  bench- 
es?” 

“They’re  part  of  the  walls,” 
I said,  “cut  out  of  the  tree 
when  it  was  hollowed  out.” 

“Cut  to  our  size?” 

I did  a double  take.  Barger 
was  right.  The  Lyranians 
were  seven  feet  tall  and  long- 
legged,  but  the  benches  were 
precisely  right  for  human  sit- 
ting, and  the  table  in  the  cen- 
ter was  only  three  feet  above 
the  gray  floor.  Suddenly  I 
didn’t  feel  so  good. 

“And  those  rooms — ^there 
are  four  of  them — scaled  to 
people  our  size  ?” 

I shrugged.  “So  they  modi- 
fied the  joint  for  us.” 

“You  still  don’t  get  it.  This 
place  is  living.  It’s  growing. 
Nothing  here  except  those 
chairs  isn’t  part  of  this  tree, 
and  I’m  not  sure  that  they 
weren’t.  Besides,  how  did  they 
know  that  there’d  be  four  of 
us?” 

“They  could  have  been  hope- 
ful, or  maybe  four  is  their 
idea  of  a delegation.  Remem- 
ber there  were  four  of  them 
that  visited  us,  and  they  sug- 
gested that  four  of  us  visit 
them.” 


“It’s  obvious,”  Allardyce 
added,  "that  this  place  has 
been  made  for  us.  K’wan 
wasn’t  lying.” 

Barger  shook  his  head.  “I 
still  don’t  like  it.  I think  we’3 
better  get  out  of  here.  If  they 
are  as  good  biologists  as  this 
tree  indicates,  they’re  a Class 
VI  civilization  at  least — and 
we’re  not  set  up  to  handle  lev- 
els that  high.” 

“I  don’t  think  that’s  neces- 
sary,” Allardyce  said.  “They 
don’t  seem  unfriendly,  and  un- 
til they  do,  we’re  better  off 
sitting  pat  and  playing  the 
cards  as  they’re  dealt.  We  can 
always  warn  the  ship  in  case 
anything  goes  wrong.” 

“Don’t  be  jumpy,”  Alex 
broke  in.  “I  told  you  they  were 
all  right.  They  grew  the  place 
for  me.  It’s  just  grown  a little 
since.” 

I made  a noncommittal 
noise. 

“It’s  true,”  Alex  said. 
“While  I was  here  I needed 
quarters  and  nobody  wanted 
me  in  with  them.  They  have 
some  custom  about  not  letting 
strangers  in  their  houses  after 
sunset.  So  they  took  a sapling 
and  sprayed  it  with  some  sort 
of  stuff  and  by  the  next  “after- 
noon I had  a one-room  house.” 
“Where  did  you  stay  that 
first  night?”  I demanded. 

Alex  shrugged.  “In  one  of 
the  trees  down  the  street,”  he 
said,  pointing  through  the 
door.  “It  was  some  sort  of  a 
storage  warehouse.  No  air 
conditioning  and  blacker  than 

121 


CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


the  inside  of  the  Coal  Sack.  It 
rains  pretty  bad  at  night  and 
they  had  to  give  me  some 
shelter.” 

He  was  right  on  time  with 
his  last  statement,  because  the 
skies  opened  up  and  started  to 
pour.  The  four-hour  evening 
rain  had  begun.  It  had  fasci- 
nated us  at  first,  the  regular- 
ity with  which  the  evening 
showers  arrived  and  left,  but 
our  meteorologist  assured  us 
that  it  was  a perfectly  natural 
phenomenon  in  a planet  with 
no  axial  tilt. 

“But  growing  a tree  in  a 
day  is  fantastic,”  I said. 
“What’s  more,  it’s  unbelieva- 
ble, a downright — ” 

“Not  so  fantastic,”  Allar- 
dyce  interrupted.  “This  really 
isn’t  a tree.  It’s  a cycad — re- 
lated to  the  horsetail  ferns 
back  on  Earth.  They  grow 
pretty  fast  anyway  and  they 
might  grow  faster  here.  Be- 
sides, the  Lyranians  could 
have  some  really  potent 
growth  stimulants.  In  our 
hydroponics  stations  we  use 
delta-gibberelin.  That’ll  grow 
tomatoes  from  seed  in  a week, 
and  forage  crops  in  three  days. 
It  could  be  that  they  have 
something  better  that’ll  do  the 
job  in  hours.” 

“And  one  that  makes  a tree 
grow  rooms?”  I scoffed. 

ALLARDYCE  nodded.  “It’s 
possible,  but  I hate  to 
think  of  the  science  behind  it 
— it  makes  me  feel  like  a blind 
baby  fumbling  in  the  dark — 

122 


and  I’m  supposed  to  be  a good 
biologist.”  He  shivered.  “Their 
science’ll  be  centuries  ahead 
of  ours  if  that  is  true.” 

“Not  necessarily,”  Barger 
said.  “They  could  be  good  bi- 
ologists or  botanists  and  no- 
thing much  else.  We’ve  run 
into  that  sort  of  uneven  cul- 
ture before.” 

“Ha!”  Allardyce  snorted. 
“That  shows  how  little  you 
know  about  experimental  bi- 
ology. Anybody  able  to  do  with 
plants  what  these  people  do 
would  have  to  know  genetics 
and  growth  principles,  bio- 
chemistry, mathematics,  engi- 
neering and  physics.” 

“Maybe  they  had  it  once 
and  lost  most  of  it,”  I suggest- 
ed. “They  wouldn’t  be  the  first 
culture  that’s  gone  retrograde. 
We  did  it  after  the  Atomic 
Wars  and  we  were  several 
thousand  years  recovering. 
But  we  hadn’t  lost  the  skills — 
they  just  degenerated  into 
rituals  administered  by  witch 
doctors  who  handed  the  for- 
mulas and  techniques  down 
from  father  to  son.  Maybe  it’s 
like  that  here.  Certainly  these 
people  give  no  evidence  of  an 
advanced  civilization  other 
than  these  trees  and  their  na- 
tive intelligence.  Civilized  peo- 
ple don’t  hunt  with  spears  or 
live  in  tribal  groups.” 

Barger  nodded.  “That’s  a 
good  point.  Skipper.” 

“Well,  there’s  no  sense 
speculating  about  it;  maybe 
we’ll  know  if  we  wait  and 
see,”  Allardyce  summed  up. 

J.  F.  BONE 


I set  sentries,  three  hours 
on  and  nine  off,  to  keep  Dan 
informed  of  our  situation,  and 
since  rank  has  its  privileges, 
I took  the  first  watch.  We  were 
all  tired  from  our  walk 
through  the  woods ; the  others 
turned  in  readily  enough.  I 
was  sufficiently  worried  about 
the  hints  and  implications  in 
the  native  culture  to  keep  alert 
— but  nothing  happened.  I 
checked  in  with  Dan  back  at 
the  ship  and  went  to  awaken 
Alex,  who  had  drawn  the  sec- 
ond watch,  and  turned  in  to 
the  bedroom  allotted  to  me. 
Normally  I can  sleep  any- 
where, but  I kept  thinking 
about  houses  grown  from  trees 
and  upholstery  grown  from 
fungus,  about  spear-carrying 
savages  who  understood  the 
working  principle  of  a men- 
ticom. 

It  was  all  wrong  and  my 
facile  explanation  of  a regress- 
ed cultui’e  didn’t  satisfy  me. 
Superior  technology  and  sav- 
agery simply  didn’t  go  to- 
gether. Even  in  our  Interreg- 
num Period,  islands  of  culture 
and  technology  had  remained, 
and  men  hadn’t  reverted  to 
complete  savagery.  But  there 
were  no  such  islands  on  this 
world — or  none  that  were  ap- 
parent. 

Such  enclaves  couldn’t  have 
escaped  our  search  mecha- 
nisms, which  are  designed 
precisely  to  locate  such  things. 
And  besides,  an  advanced  bi- 
ological technology  would  have 
no  need  for  hunting  or  spears. 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


They  could  grow  all  the  food 
they  needed.  Any  damn  fool 
knew  that.  Then  why  the  noble 
savage  act?  For  if  our  analysis 
was  right,  it  must  be  an  act. 
Why  were  they  trying  to  hood- 
wink us  ? The  only  answer  was 
that  there  was  a high  civiliza- 
tion here  that  was  being  delib- 
erately hidden  from  us.  The 
only  mistake  they  had  made 
was  in  underestimating  us — 
the  old  story  of  civilized  men 
sneering  at  savages,  but  in 
reverse. 

The  trees,  therefore,  must 
be  such  old  and  primitive  tech- 
niques that  they  thought  noth- 
ing of  them,  deeming  them  so 
inconsequential  that  even  sav- 
ages like  us  would  know  of 
them  and  not  be  suspicious. 
At  that,  they  probably  didn’t 
have  too  much  time  after  they 
detected  us  orbiting  and  in- 
tending to  land.  And  if  that 
were  true,  there  could  be  only 
one  place  where  their  civiliza- 
tion was  hidden. 

1 TRIED  to  get  to  my  feet, 
to  warn  the  others — but  I 
couldn’t  move  and  no  sound 
came  from  my  flaccid  vocal 
cords.  I was  paralyzed,  help- 
less, and  K’wan’s  amused 
thought  floated  gently  into  my 
brain.  “I  told  the  others  that 
you  humans  were  an  advanced 
race,  but  they  couldn’t  believe 
an  obviously  warlike  species 
that  depended  upon  machinery 
could  be  anything  but  savages. 
And  your  man  Alex  confirmed 
their  beliefs.  So  we  tried  to 

123 


meet  you  on  your  own  ground 
— savage  to  savage,  as  it  were. 
It  seems  as  though  we  weren’t 
as  good  at  being  savages  as  we 
thought.”  And  K’wan  stepped 
through  an  apparently  solid 
section  of  tree  trunk  that 
parted  to  let  him  pass ! 

This  tree  was  nothing  but  a 
mousetrap,  and  we  were  the 
mice!  Why  hadn’t  one  of  us 
carried  the  discussion  a bit 
further?  Any  idiot  should 
know  that  biological  agents 
were  fully  as  deadly  as  physi- 
cal ones.  And  these  people 
were  self-admittedly  predato- 
ry. Contempt  at  my  stupidity 
was  the  only  emotion  that  fill- 
ed my  mind — that  we  would 
be  trapped  like  a flock  of 
brainless  sheep  and  led  bleat- 
ing happily  to  slaughter.  Raw 
anger  surged  through  me, 
smothering  my  fear  in  a red 
blanket  of  rage. 

K’wan  shook  his  head. 
“Your  reaction  works  against 
you.  It’s  primitive — and,  I 
think,  dangerous.  We  cannot 
risk  associating  with  a race 
that  cannot  control  them- 
selves. You  have  developed  too 
fast — too  soon.  We  are  an  old 
race  and  a slow  race,  and  our 
warlike  days  are  far  behind 
us.  The  council  was  right. 
Something  must  be  done  about 
you  or  there  will  be  more  of 
your  kind  on  Lyrane — ^hard, 
driving,  uncontrolled,  violent.” 
He  sighed — a very  human 
sigh — half  regret,  half  resig- 
nation. 

“And  you  promised  no  harm 

124 


would  come  to  us  if  we  came 
with  you,”  I thought  bitterly. 

“I  said  you  would  come  to 
no  harm,  nor  will  you.  You’ll 
just  be  changed  a little.” 

“Like  Alex?” 

“Yes.” 

“What  did  you  do  to  him?” 
He  grinned,  exposing  his 
long  tusks.  “You’ll  find  out,” 
he  said.  He  sounded  just  like 
a villain  in  a cheap  melo- 
drama. 

He  took  the  menticom  cir- 
clet off  my  head  and  all  com- 
munication stopped.  Two  oth- 
er Lyranians  stepped  through 
the  wall,  lifted  me  and  carried 
me  out  like  a shanghaied 
drunk  from  a spaceport  bar. 
I wasn’t  particularly  sur- 
prised at  the  laboratory  that 
lay  behind  the  wall.  After  all, 
an  observation  cage  had  to 
have  its  laboratory  facilities. 

These  were  good  — very 
good  indeed.  Even  though  I 
knew  hardly  anything  about 
biological  laboratories,  there 
was  no  doubt  that  here  were 
the  products  of  an  advanced 
technology.  I hated  to  admit 
it,  but  it  looked  as  though  we 
had  run  into  what  we  had  al- 
ways feared  but  had  never 
found — a civilization  superior 
to  ours.  From  the  windowless 
appearance  of  the  place,  it  was 
probably  underground,  and 
K’wan’s  look  and  nod  seemed 
to  confirm  my  guess. 

They  laid  me  out  on  a table, 
took  blood  and  tissue  samples 
and  proceeded  to  forget  me 
while  they  ran  tests  and  analy- 

J.  F.  BONE 


ses.  I kept  trying  to  move,  but 
it  wasn’t  any  use. 

A group  of  about  a dozen 
oldsters  came  in,  looked  at  me 
and  went  away.  The  council, 
1 guessed. 

In  a surprisingly  short  time 
K’wan  came  back,  distinguish- 
able by  the  menticom  circlet. 
He  was  holding  something 
that  looked  like  a jet  hypo  in 
his  hand.  The  barrel  was  full 
of  a cloudy  red  liquid  that 
swirled  sluggishly  behind  the 
confining  glass. 

“This  won’t  hurt,”  he  said, 
his  thoughts  amplified  by  the 
circlet. 

He  lifted  my  arm,  examined 
it  and  nodded.  There  was  a 
high-pitched,  sibilant  hiss  as 
he  touched  the  trigger  of  the 
syringe  and  I felt  a brief  sting 
near  my  elbow. 

“There — that’s  that!”  he 
said.  “Now  we’ll  take  you  back 
and  get  the  others.” 

I swore  at  him  coldly  and 
viciously. 

He  smiled. 

Alex  helped  lay  me  back  on 
my  bed  in  the  tree  house.  He 
looked  down  at  me  and  grin- 
ned. It  wasn’t  a pleasant  grin. 
It  reminded  me  of  a crocodile. 

Naked,  I was  standing  on 
an  endless  sandy  plain.  Off 
in  the  distance  the  Two  Two 
Four  stood  on  her  landing 
jacks,  a tall,  needle-pointed 
tower  of  burnished  silver 
metal.  The  sun  beat  down 
from  a cobalt  sky  burning  my 
bare  back  as  I trudged  pain- 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


fully  across  the  hot  shifting 
sand.  My  feet,  scorched  and 
blistered,  sent  agony  racing 
through  me  with  every  step  I 
took  toward  the  tall  silver  col- 
umn that  seemed  to  recede 
from  me  as  fast  as  I ap- 
proached. My  throat  was 
choked  with  dust  and  my 
mind  filled  with  fear  and  pain. 

I had  to  reach  the  ship.  I 
had  to.  Yet  I knew  with  dread- 
ful certainty  that  I would  not. 

He  came  at  me  from  a hol- 
low in  the  sandy  ground,  a 
huge,  furry  Lyranian — bigger 
than  any  I had  seen.  His  white 
tusks  glittered  in  the  sunlight 
as  he  leaped  at  me. 

Twisting,  I avoided  him  and 
turned  to  run.  To  fight  that 
mountain  of  fanged  flesh  was 
futile.  He  could  rip  me  apart 
with  one  hand.  But  I moved 
with  viscid  slowness,  stum- 
bling through  the  shifting 
sands. 

In  a moment  he  was  upon 
me,  clutching  with  his  huge 
hands,  snapping  at  my  throat 
with  his  tusked  mouth.  Fear 
pumped  adrenalin  into  my 
system  and  I fought  as  I had 
never  fought  before,  break- 
ing his  holds,  throwing  jar- 
ring punches  into  his  fanged 
face  as  he  clawed  and  bit  at 
me. 

With  a violent  effort  I broke 
away  and  ran  again  toward 
the  safety  of  the  distant  ship. 
For  a moment  I left  him  be- 
hind as  he  scrambled  to  re- 
gain his  feet  and  came  run- 
ning after  me.  He  was  on  me 

125 


again,  hands  reaching  for  my 
throat.  I couldn’t  get  away. 
And  again  we  fought,  batter- 
ing and  clawing  at  each  other, 
using  fists,  feet  and  teeth, 
biting  and  gouging.  His 
strength  was  terrible  and  his 
hot,  fetid  breath  was  rank  in 
my  nostrils.  With  a grunt  of 
triumph  he  tripped  me  and  I 
fell  on  my  back  on  the  blaz- 
ing sand.  I screamed  as  my 
back  struck  the  searing  sur- 
face, but  he  held  me  helpless 
and  immovable,  pinned  be- 
neath his  massive,  crushing 
weight. 

And  then  he  began  to  eat 
me! 

I felt  his  sharp  fangs  sink 
into  my  shoulder  muscles  and 
meet  in  my  flesh.  With  a rush 
of  frantic  strength  I threw 
him  off  again  and  again,  ran 
stumbling  across  the  plain. 
Once  more  he  caught  me  and 
again  we  fought. 

It  went  on  endlessly — the 
fight,  the  temporary  break- 
away, the  flight,  the  pursuit, 
and  the  recapture.  I wondered 
dully  why  no  one  on  the  ship 
had  seen  us.  Perhaps  they 
were  looking  in  the  wrong  di- 
rection, or  perhaps  they 
weren’t  even  looking.  If  I sur- 
vived this  and  found  that  they 
hadn’t  been  on  watch — I 
snarled  and  slammed  my  fist 
into  the  Lyranian’s  face. 

Both  of  us  were  covered 
with  blood,  but  he  was  visibly 
weaker.  It  was  no  longer  a 
fight;  we  were  too  exhausted 
for  that.  We  pawed  at  each 

126 


other  feebly,  and  I could  de- 
tect something  oddly  like  fear 
in  him  now.  He  couldn’t  hold 
me — ^but  neither  could  I finish 
him. 

I gathered  my  last  remain- 
ing strength  into  one  last 
blow.  My  torn  fist  smashed 
into  his  bloody  face.  He  top- 
pled to  the  ground  and  I fell 
beside  him,  too  spent  to  move. 
I lay  there  panting,  watching 
him. 

He  rose  to  his  hands  and 
knees  and  came  crawling  to- 
ward me,  trembling  with 
weakness.  I felt  his  smother- 
ing weight  pinning  me  as  he 
fell  across  me.  He  twisted 
slowly,  his  fanged  mouth 
gaping  to  bite  again.  His 
jaws  closed  on  my  arm.  I was 
done — beaten — too  weary  and 
bruised  to  care.  He  had  won. 
But  his  teeth  couldn’t  break 
my  skin.  Like  me,  he  was  fin- 
ished. 

We  lay  there  as  the  sun 
beat  down,  glaring  at  each 
other  with  fear  and  hate.  And 
suddenly  — over  us  — loomed 
the  familiar  faces  of  my  crew 
and  the  tall  tower  of  the  Two 
Two  Four. 

Somehow  I had  reached  the 
ship  and  safety ! 

1 AWOKE.  I was  bathed 
with  sweat.  My  muscles 
were  aching  and  my  head  was 
a ball  of  fire.  I looked  around. 
Everything  seemed  normal. 
My  menticom  was  on  my  head 
and  I was  lying  on  the  bed  in 
the  tree  house.  Painfully  I 


J.  F.  BONE 


rose  to  my  feet  and  staggered 
into  the  main  room. 

“My  God ! Skipper,  you  look 
awful!”  Allardyce’s  voice  was 
sharp  with  concern.  “What’s 
wrong?” 

“I  don’t  know,”  I muttered. 
“My  head’s  splitting.” 

“Here,  sit  down.  Let  me 
take  a look  at  you.”  Allardyce 
produced  a thermometer  and 
stuck  it  in  my  mouth. 
“Mmmm,”  he  said  worriedly. 
“You’ve  got  fever.” 

“I  feel  like  I’ve  been 
through  the  mill,”  I said. 

“We’d  better  get  back  to 
the  ship.  Doc  should  have  a 
look  at  you.” 

I wanted  nothing  more  than 
the  familiar  safety  of  the 
ship,  away  from  these  odd  na- 
tives and  exotic  diseases  that 
struck  despite  omnivaccina- 
tion. And  we  should  get  back 
before  the  others  fell  sick. 

“All  right,  Pat,”  I said. 
“Contact  Dan.  Have  him  send 
the  big  ’copter.  We’ll  leave  at 
once.”  I discounted  the  expe- 
rience of  last  night  as  delir- 
ium, but  just  to  make  sure,  I 
checked  with  Allardyce  and 
Barger  when  they,  came  in. 

“Obviously  fever,”  Barger 
said.  “Nothing  happened  to 
me  like  you  describe.” 

“Nor  to  me,”  Allardyce 
said. 

I nodded.  They  were  right, 
of  course,  unless  the  Lyranian 
in  their  dreams  had  eaten  and 
absorbed  them.  Then — but 
that  was  sheer  nonsense.  I 
was  being  a suspicious  fool. 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


But  that  dream — all  of  it — 
had  been  damnably  real. 

We  made  our  excuses  to 
K’wan  as  the  ’copter  fluttered 
down  into  a nearby  clearing. 

“I’m  sorry  about  this,” 
K’wan  said  apologetically, 
“but  I never  thought  of  the 
possibility  of  diseases.  We  are 
all  immune.  We  do  have  some 
biological  skill,  as  you’ve 
surely  guessed,  but  our  en- 
gineering technology  is  far  in- 
ferior to  yours.  We  thought 
it  would  be  better  not  to  let 
you  know  about  us  until  we 
had  a chance  to  observe  you. 
But  you  undoubtedly  have 
seen  enough  to  deduce  our 
culture.”  He  grinned — a fe- 
rocious grimace  that  exposed 
his  long  tusks.  “I  suppose  we 
are  rather  bad  liars.  But  then 
we’re  not  accustomed  to  de- 
ception.” 

“I  understand,”  I said. 
“You  had  no  way  of  knowing 
what  we  were  really  like.  We 
could  have  been  the  advance 
guard  of  a conquering  space 
armada.  You  showed  great 
courage  to  open  relations  with 
us.” 

“Not  as  great  as  yours.  We 
had  the  opportunity  of  exam- 
ining your  man  Alex.  You  had 
only  his  untried  opinions  to 
go  by.” 

The  ’copter  came  down  with 
a flutter  of  rotor  blades,  and 
I shook  hands  with  K’wan. 
For  a moment  I was  tempted 
to  call  Dan  and  tell  him  to 
turn  our  hostages  loose,  but 
on  second  thought  decided 

127 


that  could  wait.  I slipped  my 
menticom  off.  There  was  no 
point  in  broadcasting  my 
thoughts,  and  without  the 
gadget  KVan  couldn't  inter- 
cept them  unless  they  were 
directed.  After  all,  we  were 
a minority  on  this  world  and 
Earth  didn't  even  know  where 
we  were  yet.  A ship  can  cross 
hyper-space  far  more  easily 
and  quickly  than  the  most 
powerful  transmitter  can 
broadcast  across  normal 
space.  It  would  be  a thousand 
years  before  Earth  could  hear 
from  us  by  radio,  even  if  they 
could  distinguish  our  mes- 
sages from  stellar  interfer- 
ence. While  I felt  oddly 
friendly,  there  was  no  reason 
to  take  chances,  especially  if 
there  was  any  truth  in  that 
dream. 

“You  will  be  leaving  soon?" 
K'wan  asked.  “You  and  the 
ship?” 

“Yes,"  I said.  “We  have 
done  all  we  can  do  here." 

I looked  up  at  him.  He  was 
standing  there — holding  the 
menticom  in  his  hand — yet  I 
understood  him! 

I didn't  let  the  astonish- 
ment show  on  my  face, 
nor  the  shock  that  coursed 
through  my  mind  when  the 
Lyranian  in  my  brain  tried 
vainly  to  scream  a waiming! 
Instead  I took  the  circlet  and 
turned  to  go. 

“Remember  what  you  are 
to  do;  the  others  will  help," 
K'wan  said. 

“I  will  remember,"  I re- 


plied. You' re  damn  ivell  right 
ril  remember,  1 thought  grim- 

ly. 

The  Lyranian  was  supposed 
to  wreck  the  ship. 

He  waved  farewell  as  I 
turned  to  enter  the  ’cop- 
ter. “Our  thoughts  go  with 
you  for  your  success,”  he  said. 

The  Lyranian  in  my  brain 
screamed  and  struggled,  but  I 
held  him  easily.  I was  his  mas- 
ter, not  he  mine.  There  would 
be  no  sabotage  on  the  Two 
Two  Four.  He  wouldn’t  wreck 
my  ship. 

“Dan,”  I said  as  we  went 
into  orbit,  “did  Alex  come 
aboard?” 

“Of  course.” 

“Where  is  he?” 

“Down  in  the  engine  room, 
I suppose,  or  in  his  bunk.  It’s 
not  his  watch.” 

“Maybe  you’d  better  check. 
But  before  you  do — ” 

He  waited  for  me  to  con- 
tinue, and  finally  I was  able 
to. 

“Put  Allardyce,  Barger, 
and  myself  in  the  brig,”  I 
said.  “Set  a guard  over  us 
with  instructions  to  shoot  if 
we  try  to  make  a break.  Then 
get  Alex,  if  he’s  aboard. 
Frankly,  I don’t  think  you’ll 
find  him.  They  didn’t  need  a 
ship’s  commander,  a sociolo- 
gist or  a biologist,  but  they 
did  need  an  engineer.  Now  get 
going.  This  is  an  order!” 
Warren  stiffened.  “Yes, 
sir — sorry,  sir!” 

Inside  my  skull,  the  Lyran- 

J.  F.  BONE 


128 


ian  came  to  life — struggled 
briefly — and  then  quit.  Bar- 
ger, Allardyce  and  I spent  the 
rest  of  the  trip  home  in  the 
air-conditioned,  radiation-re- 
sistant, germproof,  dustproof, 
escape-resistant  brig.  Alex,  of 
course,  wasn’t  aboard.  There 
aren’t  many  places  on  a star- 
ship  where  a man  can  hide, 
and  the  crew  searched  them 
all. 

Even  so,  I kept  worrying 
about  the  ship’s  safety  all  the 
way  back.  It  was  a miserable 
trip.  I suppose  it  was  just  as 
miserable  for  the  Lyranians  in 
my  two  companions  who  kept 
worrying  about  how  to  de- 
stroy us.  It  didn’t  do  them  any 
good  either.  They  never  got  a 
chance,  and  ultimately  we 
reached  Decontamination. 

Barger  and  Allardyce  are 
up  there  now.  The  medics 
think  they  can  erase  the  Ly- 
ranians with  insulin  shock, 
but  it’ll  take  time.  Mine,  be- 
ing a nice,  tame  one,  was  con- 
sidered to  be  more  valuable  in 
me  than  out.  We’re  going  to 
have  to  know  a lot  about  Ly- 
rane  in  a huriy  if  we’re  going 
to  do  anything  about  those 
people,  and  my  Lyranian  can 
tell  us  plenty. 

But  I’ll  bet  we’ll  find  things 
different  on  Lyrane  when  we 
go  back.  They’ll  have  at  least 
ten  years,  and  with  the  brains 
they’ve  got — and  Alex’s  brain 
to  pick— they’ll  do  just  fine 
from  an  engineering  point  of 
view.  I’ll  bet  they’ll  even  have 
spaceships. 

CULTURAL  EXCHANGE 


From  what  I can  gather 
from  my  alter  ego,  they 
checked  Alex’s  brain  and 
didn’t  like  what  they  saw. 
That’s  the  trouble  with  ro- 
mantics. They  always  re- 
member the  wars  and  the 
fighting,  never  the  stodgy, 
peaceful  interims.  But  you 
simply  don’t  spring  that  sort 
of  stuff  on  a culture  like  Ly- 
rane’s.  And  I suppose  my 
anger  didn’t  help  things  any, 
but  if  not  for  that  anger  and 
my  primitive  bull-headedness, 
we  might  not  be  here- 

III 

CAPT.  Halsey  hurriedly 
downed  the  rum.  “Skip- 
pers are  picked  because 
they’re  tough-minded  and  au- 
thoritarian. In  space  you  need 
it  occasionally.  Fortunately  I 
lived  up  to  specifications.  A 
peaceful  sort  like  my  Lyran- 
ian just  couldn’t  take  it — for- 
tunately.” 

“Fortunately?”  I asked. 
“Sure.  What  else?  Possibly 
those  natives  we  conditioned 
would  help  our  case,  possibly 
not.  And  in  the  meantime  the 
Lyranians  would  suck  Alex 
dry.  And  with  the  Tivo  Two 
Four  gone  it’d  be  maybe  a 
couple  of  hundred  years  be- 
fore we  ran  into  them  again, 
and  by  then  they’d  really  be 
ready — loaded  for  bear  with 
itchy  trigger  fingers — and  we 
just  might  have  a war  on  our 
hands.  As  it  is  we’ll  send  out 
a battle  fleet  to  give  some  au- 

129 


thority  to  our  negotiators  so 
no  one  will  get  hurt.  They  just 
shouldn't  have  picked  Alex  as 
typical  of  us.  With  his  atti- 
tude and  our  weapons,  they 
naturally  got  a lot  of  wrong 
ideas.” 

‘‘Wrong?”  I prompted  the 
skipper. 


Halsey  chuckled.  “Yes, 
that's  what  I said — wrong 
ideas,”  he  said  in  that  remote 
second  voice.  “Just  because 
you've  forgotten  self-defense 
doesn't  mean  that  other  peace- 
ful civilizations  don't  remem- 
ber it.” 

END 


Underwater  Water  Manipulators 

A vast  area  some  47  times  larger  than  the  United  States  exists  on  earth. 
Comparatively,  it’s  unused,  unexplored.  Economically,  it’s  vital  to  the 
continued  development  of  this  planet.  Potentially,  it’s  accessible — much 
more  so  than  anything  in  space. 

Yet,  in  reality  its  atmosphere  turns  to  solid  rock  in  the  most  important 
areas  during  parts  of  every  year.  And  even  where  it  remains  fluid,  the 
‘‘atmosphere”  is  as  unbreathable  as  the  moon’s  vacuum;  its  gravity  as 
light  as  Mars’;  its  pressure  as  heavy  as  Jupiter’s. 

It  is,  of  course,  the  140  million  square  miles  of  terrestrial  real  estate 
covered  with  water  and  ice. 

Underwater  manipulation,  like  “planetary’^  engineering  of  science  fic- 
tion, takes  place  in  a completely  alien  environment  and  has  problems 
unlike  anything  on  earth.  The  question  of  keeping  water  liquid  in  sub- 
freezing winter  at  low  cost  is  answered  by  these  underwater  manipulators. 
Year-around  water  commerce  is  part  of  the  promise. 

Not  only  have  underwater  researchers  found  out  how  to  keep  water 
from  freezing  economically  in  20  to  80  below  zero  weather,  but  also  are 
developing  new  piers,  aerators,  wave  control  methods,  propellers,  under- 
water tools  ...  as  reported  by  Industrial  Research.  Largely  as  a result 
of  IGY  explorations,  scientists  are  looking  to  the  seas  to  solve  problems 
now  becoming  unsolvable  on  land  or  on  the  water’s  surface:  new  sources 
of  oil,  manganese,  cobalt,  copper,  gold,  and  other  resources;  water  trans- 
lX)rtation  impervious  to  storms;  undetectable  military  installations;  un- 
limited (by  eicreage)  farms  for  both  crops  and  seastock. 

The  potential  is  as  vast  as  the  imagination. 


130 


J.  F.  BONE 


ATLAST! 


You  can  paint 
an  original  picture 
like  this,  using  real 
artists'  oil  paints... 
the 

Trad*  Mark 

foverlay}  way 


JUST  AS  A TEACHER  by 
your  side,  this  entirely  new 
and  original  method  shows 
you  in  actual  size  and  color 
how  and  what  to  do.  You 
compare  your  progress, 
step-by-step,  with  the  easy- 
to-follow  VIS-A-LENS,  and 
before  you  realize  it,  you 
are  actually  painting. 


A choice  of  subjects 
able — gel  yours  now- — 

Price  includes  Vis-A- 
Lens,  12x16  inch  Art 
Board,  6 tubes  Oil 
Paint,  Oil,  Turpentine, 
2 Brushes,  16  page  In- 
struction Book. 


avail- 

only 

.95 


VIS-A-LENS  is  sold  by  Aldens, 
Montgomery  Word,  Sears,  Roe- 
buck & Co.  and  leading  depart- 
ment stores,  coast  to  coast.  If 
your  local  stores  do  not  have  it, 
ask  them  to  order  an  assortment. 
Address  inquiries  to: 


Vi$-a-lenS/  \nc,  530  E.  Bainbridge  St.,  Elizabethtown,  Penna. 


^nu|t  SAVE  HUNMiEDS  OE  DOLLARS 
ON  HOME  IMPROVEMENTS! 

H H TMB  FAMILY 

Handyman 

# Finishing  Basements 

# Finishing  Attics 

# Essential  Repairs 

# Built-ins 

# Painting 

# Refinishing 

# Landscaping 

# Patios  and  Terraces 

# Barbecues 

Don't  put  off  those  vital  home  repairs  and  improvements  another  day! 
Do-it-yourself  with  the  aid  of  THE  FAMILY  HANDYMAN,  the  magazine  that 
tells  you  "how"  in  language  you  can  understand! 

imagine  changing  that  drab  kitchen,  converting  the  basement  to  a game 
room,  glamourizing  your  outdoor  patio— or  any  other  luxurious  im- 
provement . . all  are  now  possible  at  very  little  cost  to  you! 

THE  FAMILY  HANDYMAN  tells  you  everything  you  need  to  know.  Large, 
clear  drawings  show  every  detail  of  construction.  Easy-to-follow,  step- 
by-step  instructions  make  it  as  simple  as  ABC.  Professionally-written 
articles  give  you  valuable  pointers  on  how  to  save  work,  buy  and  save 
on  proper  materials  and  get  a professionly-perfect  job! 

Get  THE  FAMILY  HANDYMAN  today!  It  will  become  an  invaluable  part 
of  your  workshop  library! 


DO-IT-YOURSELF  with 


AT  NEWSDEALERS  EVERYWHERE  FOR  THE  LOW,  LOW  PRICE  OF  ONLY  35c.